F30 Complete Vehicle - Technical Training
F30 Complete Vehicle - Technical Training
erenceManual
F30
COMPLETEVEHI
CLE
Techni
calTr
aini
ng
Theinf
ormat
ioncontai
nedi
nthismanuali
snott
oberesol
d,bar
ter
ed,copi
edort
ransf
err
ed
wi
thoutt
heexpresswri
tt
enconsentofBMW ofNor
thAmeri
ca,LLC("
BMW NA" )
.
Technical�training.
Product�information.
F30�Introduction
BMW�Service
General�information
Symbols�used
The�following�symbol�is�used�in�this�document�to�facilitate�better�comprehension�or�to�draw�attention
to�very�important�information:
Contains�important�safety�information�and�information�that�needs�to�be�observed�strictly�in�order�to
guarantee�the�smooth�operation�of�the�system.
Information�status�and�national-market�versions
BMW�Group�vehicles�meet�the�requirements�of�the�highest�safety�and�quality�standards.�Changes�in
requirements�for�environmental�protection,�customer�benefits�and�design�render�necessary�continu-
ous�development�of�systems�and�components.�Consequently,�there�may�be�discrepancies�between
the�contents�of�this�document�and�the�vehicles�available�in�the�training�course.
This�document�basically�relates�to�the�European�version�of�left-hand�drive�vehicles.�Some�operating
elements�or�components�are�arranged�differently�in�right-hand�drive�vehicles�than�shown�in�the�graph-
ics�in�this�document.�Further�differences�may�arise�as�a�result�of�the�equipment�specification�in�specif-
ic�markets�or�countries.
Additional�sources�of�information
Further�information�on�the�individual�topics�can�be�found�in�the�following:
• Owner's�Handbook
• Integrated�Service�Technical�Application.
Contact:�[email protected]
©2011�BMW�AG,�Munich,�Germany
Reprints�of�this�publication�or�its�parts�require�the�written�approval�of�BMW�AG,�Munich
The�information�contained�in�this�document�forms�an�integral�part�of�the�technical�training�of�the�BMW
Group�and�is�intended�for�the�trainer�and�participants�in�the�seminar.�Refer�to�the�latest�relevant�infor-
mation�systems�of�the�BMW�Group�for�any�changes/additions�to�the�technical�data.
Information�status:�September�2011
VH-23/International�Technical�Training
F30�Introduction
Contents.
1. Body...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1. Models..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2
1.2. History...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2
1.3. New�technical�features................................................................................................................................................................................. 3
1.4. Dimensions...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4
1.5. Weights�and�load�capacities................................................................................................................................................................ 4
1.6. Silhouette�comparison.................................................................................................................................................................................. 5
2. Bodyshell..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6
2.1. Introduction..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6
2.2. Materials............................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7
3. Doors,�Lids�and�Hatches........................................................................................................................................................................................... 10
3.1. Doors..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 10
3.2. Engine�compartment�lid......................................................................................................................................................................... 10
3.3. Tailgate............................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 13
4. Exterior�Equipment...............................................................................................................................................................................................................14
4.1. Front�end.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................14
4.2. Underfloor�concept.........................................................................................................................................................................................14
4.3. Sound�insulation................................................................................................................................................................................................. 15
4.4. Attachments...............................................................................................................................................................................................................16
4.4.1. Exterior�mirrors.................................................................................................................................................................... 16
4.4.2. Side�sills..........................................................................................................................................................................................17
4.4.3. Reversing�camera............................................................................................................................................................ 18
4.5. Glass�slide/tilt�sunroof............................................................................................................................................................................... 19
5. Interior�Equipment................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 22
5.1. Dimensions.................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 22
5.2. Material�and�color�concept................................................................................................................................................................ 22
5.2.1. Line�package�content............................................................................................................................................... 25
5.3. Dashboard..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 26
5.4. Center�console...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 27
5.5. Inside�mirror............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 29
5.6. Storage�options.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 29
5.7. Front�seats................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 30
5.8. Rear�seats......................................................................................................................................................................................................................33
5.9. Climate�control...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 34
6. Luggage�Compartment................................................................................................................................................................................................. 36
F30�Introduction
1.�Body
The�sixth�edition�of�the�BMW�3-Series�will�be�launched�on�the�market�in�February�2012.�Each�gener-
ation�of�these�vehicles�combine�exceptional�sporting�character�and�dynamics,�maximum�comfort�and
innovation.
The�new�BMW�3-Series�Sedan�also�offers�a�well-balanced�harmonious�design�concept.�This�sporty
Sedan�with�its�confident�appearance�represents�the�ultimate�driving�machine,�first-class�agility�and
driving�dynamics�without�making�any�compromises�elsewhere.
BMW�F30
The�characteristic�BMW�proportions,�the�short�overhang�at�the�front,�the�long�wheelbase�or�the�ex-
tended�engine�compartment�lid�transmit�a�dynamic�image,�even�when�the�vehicle�is�stationary.
The�exceptional�efficiency�offered�by�BMW�engines�was�even�improved�once�again�in�the�F30.�The
new�engines�are�characterized�by�high�power�and�low�consumption�at�the�same�time.
For�the�first�time�in�the�BMW�3-Series�three�different�equipment�packages�are�being�offered,�each
with�their�own�independent�character.
1
F30�Introduction
1.�Body
1.1.�Models
The�following�models�are�offered�by�the�compact�Sedan:
1.2.�History
The�first�3-Series�BMW�was�introduced�in�1975.
The�following�is�a�comparison�of�the�6th�generation�3-series.�The�data�is�based�on�the�four-door
Sedan�(with�the�exception�of�the�two-door�E21).
2
F30�Introduction
1.�Body
Explanation E21 E30/4 E36/4 E46/4 E90 F30
Base
model*
Cubic�capacity�[cm³] 1573 1596 1596 1796 1995 1995
and and and and and and
2315 2495 2793 2993 2996 2979
Engine�performance, 75 90 100 105 125 180
gasoline�[kW] and and and and and and
143 170 192 231 225 225
0–100 km/h�[s] 14.8 15.8 12.9 12.4 9.3 8.1
0–62�mph and and and and and and
10.6 6.9 7.3 5.7 5.6 5.5
Average�consumption 13.5 12.2 9.5 9.0 8.7 7.9
[l/100 km] and and and and and and
11.0 6.9 7.8 6.5 4.1 4.1
Maximum�speed�[km/h] 154 165 191 200 210 210
and and and and and and
190 218 236 250 250 250
1.3.�New�technical�features
Of�the�many�components�which�have�been�altered�or�newly�developed,�the�following�must�be�men-
tioned�in�particular:
• Door�hinges
• Engine�compartment�lid�catches
• Underbody�panelling
• Side�repeaters
• Side�sills
• Inside�mirror
• Seats.
3
F30�Introduction
1.�Body
1.4.�Dimensions
F30�overall�dimensions
1.5.�Weights�and�load�capacities
Model curb�weight�(DIN) curb�weight�(DIN) Load�capacity
(manual�gearbox) (automatic F30
F30 transmission)
F30
BMW 328i kg/ 1545/3406 1570/3461 410/904
lbs
BMW�335i kg/ 1620/3571 1630/3594 410/904
lbs
Through�the�10�mm�forward�shift�of�the�front�axle�while�retaining�the�engine�mount,�an�even�more�rea-
sonable�axle-load�distribution�was�able�to�be�achieved�(between�50�and�56%�for�all�load�statuses).
4
F30�Introduction
1.�Body
1.6.�Silhouette�comparison
F30�Silhouette�comparison�with�BMW�E90
F30* E90
Vehicle�height,�empty [mm] 1429 1421
Front�overhang [mm] 788 767
Wheelbase [mm] 2810 2760
Rear�overhang [mm] 1038 1014
Vehicle�length [mm] 4636 4541
F30�Silhouette�comparison�with�BMW�F10
F30* F10
Vehicle�height,�empty [mm] 1429 1464
Front�overhang [mm] 788 832
Wheelbase [mm] 2810 2968
Rear�overhang [mm] 1038 1099
Vehicle�length [mm] 4636 4899
5
F30�Introduction
2.�Bodyshell
F30�bodyshell
Index Explanation
1 Roof
2 Rear�end
3 Side�frame
4 Floor�assembly
5 Front�end�with�bulkhead
2.1.�Introduction
For�the�F30,�great�importance�was�attached�to�construction�with�lightweight�materials.�This�is
achieved�with�the�targeted�application�of�higher-strength�multi-phase�steels�and�super-strength�hot-
formed�steels.�The�F30�sees�an�increase�in�the�average�strength�of�its�body�materials�of�10%�com-
pared�with�the�E90.
The�construction�with�lightweight�materials�makes�a�decisive�contribution�to�reducing�the�vehicle
weight.�In�conjunction�with�a�rigid�design�of�the�bodyshell,�it�makes�a�significant�contribution�to
6
F30�Introduction
2.�Bodyshell
• Driving�dynamics
• Reduction�of�the�fuel�consumption
• Reducing�CO2�emissions
• Passive�safety.
Special�features
• High�proportion�of�multi-phase�steels�(14%�of�the�bodyshell�weight)
• High�proportion�of�hot-formed�steels�(3%�of�the�bodyshell�weight).
The�higher-strength�multi-phase�steels�and�super-strength�hot-formed�steels�ensure�maximum�safety
of�the�passenger�safety�cell�with�low�weight.�They�therefore�make�a�huge�contribution�to�passive�safe-
ty.
The�reinforcements�of�the�B-pillars�of�the�F30�are�manufactured�from�tailored�blanks�with�hot-formed
steels.
Tailored�blanks�are�tailor-made�printed�circuit�boards�made�from�sheet�steel.�Single�sheets�of�varying
thickness,�strength�and�surface�coating�are�joined�together�by�laser�welding.�This�prefabricated�se-
mi-finished�product�is�then�formed�to�the�desired�component.
Stronger�material�is�used�at�places�with�a�higher�load.�The�clever�use�of�material�lowers�manufacturing
costs�as�the�high-quality�and�expensive�materials�are�only�used�where�necessary.�Thanks�to�the�use�of
customized�steel�solutions�additional�reinforcements�and�overlap�connections�at�the�body�are�super-
fluous.�This�saves�material�and�the�total�weight�is�reduced�further.
With�hot-formed�steels,�an�innovative�new�development�–�passive�corrosion-proofing�–�is�used.�In�the
past,�there�were�no�suitable�hot-formed�sheet�metal�materials�with�galvanized�corrosion-proofing�avail-
able�on�the�market.�With�the�development�of�press-hardening�technology,�however,�there�is�now�a�pro-
cess�of�manufacturing�galvanized�hot-formed�components�that�is�capable�of�application�in�volume�pro-
duction.
The�parts�produced�in�that�way�can�be�used�in�areas�exposed�to�moisture�without�suffering�corrosion
of�the�basic�material.�This�type�of�steel�does�not�therefore�require�any�additional�corrosion-proofing
measures.
2.2.�Materials
A�modern�vehicle�body�must�meet�a�great�many�requirements.�Despite�small�outer�dimensions,�it
should�provide�an�interior�that�is�a�large�as�possible.�In�the�event�of�an�accident,�the�passengers�must
be�protected�against�injury�as�well�as�possible.�The�torque�that�is�generated�also�means�that�all�units,
e.g.�the�engine�and�transmission,�rely�on�the�body�for�support.�Furthermore,�the�body�must�have�high
static�and�above�all�dynamic�strength�in�order�to�guarantee�the�outstanding�driving�characteristics�that
are�typical�of�BMW.
7
F30�Introduction
2.�Bodyshell
Last�but�not�least,�the�supporting�structure�of�the�vehicle�must�be�highly�durable�and,�in�the�event�of�an
accident,�it�must�be�possible�for�repairs�to�be�carried�out�at�a�reasonable�cost�and�without�an�excessive
amount�of�work.
In�order�to�meet�all�of�these�requirements,�BMW�pursues�the�strategy�of�creating�each�component
from�the�material�best�suited�for�its�function.
The�term�steel�is�merely�the�generic�term�for�the�large�number�of�alloys�with�very�different�properties
that�are�deployed.
F30�material�grades�for�bodyshell
Index Explanation
1 Multi-phase�steels�(>�300�MPa)
2 Hot-formed�steels�(>�900�MPa)
3 Other�steels�(<�300�MPa)
Multi-phase�steels�are�steels�where�the�structure�consists�of�a�number�of�phases.�Higher-strength
multi-phase�steels�with�a�yield�strength�Rp0.2�of�300�to�600�MPa�are,�for�example,�dual-phase�steels�or
TRIP�steels.�Super-strength�multi-phase�steels�with�a�yield�strength�Rp0.2�in�excess�of�600�MPa�are,
for�example,�complex-phase�steels�or�martensitic-phase�steels.
Hot-formed�manganese-boron�steels�are�super-strength�steels�with�a�yield�strength�Rp0.2�in�excess�of
900�MPa.
8
F30�Introduction
2.�Bodyshell
Weight�proportions
In�order�to�reduce�the�vehicle�weight�and�still�ensure�maximum�strength�of�the�bodyshell,�the�propor-
tion�of�higher/super-strength�multi-phase�steels�and�super-strength�hot-formed�steels�is�growing.
F30�bodyshell,�distribution�of�material�grades
Index Explanation
1 Multi-phase�steels�(>�300�MPa),�proportion�14%
2 Hot-formed�steels�(>�900�MPa),�proportion�3%
3 Other�steels�(<�300�MPa),�proportion�83%
9
F30�Introduction
3.�Doors,�Lids�and�Hatches
In�addition�to�the�bodyshell,�all�doors�and�flaps�for�the�F30�are�also�made�from�steel.
3.1.�Doors
The�door�hinges�which�are�secured�to�both�the�door�and�the�A-�or�B-pillar�with�one�screw�in�each�case
are�used�in�the�F30.�Previously�the�door�hinges�were�welded�to�the�A-�or�B-pillar�and�secured�to�the
door�with�two�screws�in�each�case.
F30�door�hinge
3.2.�Engine�compartment�lid
The�F30�is�also�equipped�with�a�comfort�opening�for�the�engine�compartment�lid.�The�engine�com-
partment�lid�can�be�unlocked�completely�from�the�passenger�compartment�by�means�of�new,�two-
stroke�engine�compartment�lid�catches.�The�engine�compartment�lid�release�lever�must�be�actuated
twice�in�succession�for�this�purpose.
Advantages
• A�release�lever�does�not�have�to�be�searched�for�and�actuated�at�the�front�of�the�car
• Safety�is�increased�by�the�use�of�two�retaining�hooks
• There�is�no�risk�of�injury�on�exposed�retaining�hooks.
10
F30�Introduction
3.�Doors,�Lids�and�Hatches
F30�engine�compartment�lid,�engine�compartment�lid�catch
When�the�engine�compartment�lid�release�lever�is�activated�for�the�first�time,�this�moves�the�two�en-
gine�compartment�lid�catches�into�the�preliminary�detent.�The�engine�compartment�lid�springs�up-
wards�by�one�stage.�When�the�engine�compartment�lid�release�lever�is�released,�the�engine�compart-
ment�lid�catches�are�moved�into�the�retaining�hook�position.
When�the�engine�compartment�lid�release�lever�is�actuated�again,�the�engine�compartment�lid�is�un-
locked�completely�and�can�be�opened�by�simple�lifting.
11
F30�Introduction
3.�Doors,�Lids�and�Hatches
F30�engine�compartment�lid�catch
If�the�engine�compartment�lid�is�not�completely�locked,�a�Check�Control�message�is�displayed�while
the�engine�is�running.
12
F30�Introduction
3.�Doors,�Lids�and�Hatches
3.3.�Tailgate
The�tailgate�opens�automatically�when�it�is�actuated�via�the�remote�key�or�the�ID�transmitter�or�the�but-
ton�on�the�tailgate.�Depending�on�the�vehicle�equipment�it�can�also�be�actuated�with�the�tailgate�push-
button�on�the�A-pillar�or�contactless�by�means�of�targeted�foot�movement.
F30�tailgate
The�single-joint�hinges�open�automatically�in�the�open�position�with�help�of�two�tension�springs�and�a
gas�spring�damping�action.�The�payload�is�thus�not�damaged,�the�hinge�brackets�run�behind�the�lug-
gage�compartment�trim�panel.�An�additional�cover�ensures�a�high-quality�visible�impression�and�con-
ceals�the�wiring�harness�installation�arrangement.
The�contactless�rear�lid�opening�is�installed�in�vehicles�with�optional�equipment�"Comfort�Access�in-
cluding�Smart�Opener"�(option 322).�It�is�an�additional�operating�element�for�the�tailgate�for�the�cus-
tomer.�The�operation�is�effected�by�means�of�targeted�foot�movement�to�and�back�from�the�bumper.
Two�sensors�identify�the�movement�via�a�capacitive�measurement�in�a�contactless�manner.
Further�information�on�the�contactless�rear�lid�opening�can�be�found�in�the�training�manual�"F30�Gen-
eral�Vehicle�Electrical�System".
13
F30�Introduction
4.�Exterior�Equipment
4.1.�Front�end
The�front�end�of�the�F30�can�be�removed�completely.�It�consists�of�the�bumper,�the�bumper�support,
the�ornamental�grille,�the�lights�and�trim�panels,�among�others.
It�is�imperative�that�the�repair�instructions�are�followed�when�removing�and�refitting�the�front�end.
F30�Bumper�support
The�bumper�support�of�the�F30�is�made�from�aluminium�thus�saving�on�weight�compared�to�a�steel
version.
4.2.�Underfloor�concept
The�virtually�smooth�underbody�throughout�reduces�drag�and�lift�forces.�This�improves�driving�dynam-
ics,�reduces�fuel�consumption�and�thereby�reduces�CO2�emissions.
Strategically�placed�air�inlets�provide�for�optimum�component�cooling.�The�underbody�panelling�al-
so�improve�the�acoustics�and�protect�the�lines�and�other�components�against�stone�chipping�and�dirt
contamination.�In�this�way,�body�and�components�are�protected�against�corrosion.
The�aerodynamic�covers�on�the�rear�axle�are�new�in�the�F30.�These�features�reduce�the�rear�axle�lift,
improve�the�drag�and�provide�protection�against�stone�chipping.
14
F30�Introduction
4.�Exterior�Equipment
F30�Underbody�panelling
Index Explanation
1 Underbody�panelling
2 Wheel�arch�panel
3 Heat�insulation
4 Aerodynamic�cover�on�the�rear�axle
5 Diffuser�cover�(for�vehicles�with�N47�engine)�(not�US)
Changes�and�damage�to�the�underbody�or�omitting�trim�panel�components�leads�to�changes�in�the�air
flow�at�the�underbody.�This�can�influence�road�grip.
4.3.�Sound�insulation
Sound�insulation�has�a�major�impact�on�passenger�compartment�acoustics.�A�heightened�use�of
weight�is�usually�required�to�achieve�a�high�insulating�effect�against�the�noises�radiated�by�the�drive-
train�components.
In�order�to�keep�this�increase�in�weight�as�low�as�possible,�a�new�and�efficient�sound�insulation�con-
cept�is�used�in�the�F30�in�the�area�of�the�transmission�tunnel�and�the�bulkhead.�This�combines�high
sheet�area�stiffness�with�high�damping�action�and�simultaneously�high�fundamental�damping.
Here�sandwich�sheets�are�specifically�connected�to�each�other�by�means�of�damping�compound.
15
F30�Introduction
4.�Exterior�Equipment
F30�sound�insulation�concept
Index Explanation
1 Steel�sheet
2 Damping�compound
4.4.�Attachments
4.4.1.�Exterior�mirrors
The�side�repeaters�required�by�law�which�are�now�integrated�for�the�first�time�by�BMW�in�the�F30�in
the�exterior�mirrors.�They�increase�road�safety.�The�side�repeaters�are�now�omitted�from�the�side�pan-
els.
16
F30�Introduction
4.�Exterior�Equipment
F30�exterior�mirror
Index Explanation
1 Mirror�cap
2 Mirror�glass
3 Flasher�housing
4 Fiber-optic�conductor
5 Mirror�housing
6 LED�module
The�side�repeaters�are�each�operated�with�three�LEDs�and�one�Fiber-optic�conductor.�This�improves
visibility�to�other�road�users.
4.4.2.�Side�sills
The�two�side�sills�of�the�F30�are�screwed�to�the�underbody�and�inserted�at�the�top�into�four�retaining
strips�in�each�case.
The�front�retaining�strips�are�attached�from�below�to�either�side�panel.
17
F30�Introduction
4.�Exterior�Equipment
The�remaining�retaining�strips�are�secured�with�dovetail�guides�to�the�outer�side�frames.�To�remove
them,�they�must�be�slid�towards�the�rear�and�then�removed.
Additional�retaining�elements�are�no�longer�needed.
F30�side�sill
Index Explanation
1 Dovetail�guide
2 Retaining�strip,�front
3 Retaining�strip
4 Side�sills
4.4.3.�Reversing�camera
In�the�F30�a�reversing�camera�(option 3AG)�can�be�ordered.�The�reversing�camera�is�fitted�with�a�hold-
er�and�is�hardly�visible�beside�the�tailgate�push-button.
18
F30�Introduction
4.�Exterior�Equipment
F30�reversing�camera
Index Explanation
1 Reversing�camera
2 Tailgate�push-button
For�further�information�on�the�reversing�camera,�please�refer�to�the� “F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems”
production�information.
4.5.�Glass�slide/tilt�sunroof
The�glass�slide/tilt�sunroof�of�the�F30�is�characterized�by�optimum�sound�insulation�when�closed.�The
sliding�head�liner�can�be�operated�by�hand.�Convenience�operation�consists�of�vent�position�and�open-
ing�and�closing�of�the�glass�slide/tilt�sunroof�cover.
The�glass�slide/tilt�sunroof�is�equipped�with�an�integrated�anti-trap�mechanism.
19
F30�Introduction
4.�Exterior�Equipment
F30�glass�slide/tilt�sunroof
Index Explanation
1 Glass�slide/tilt�sunroof�cover
2 Slide/tilt�sunroof�mechanism
3 Water�channel
4 Gaiter
5 Slide/tilt�sunroof�frame�with�slide/tilt�sunroof�drive
6 Wind�deflector
7 Sliding�head�liner
20
F30�Introduction
4.�Exterior�Equipment
Index Explanation
8 Slider
9 Gate,�front
10 Gate,�rear
11 Guide
21
F30�Introduction
5.�Interior�Equipment
5.1.�Dimensions
Above�all,�the�headroom�and�legroom�in�the�rear�passenger�compartment�have�been�increased�in�the
F30.
F30* E90
Shoulder�room,�front [mm] 1400 1408
Shoulder�room,�rear [mm] 1400 1399
Elbow�room,�front [mm] 1451 1460
Elbow�room,�rear [mm] 1458 1454
Maximum�headroom,�front�-�without�glass�slide/tilt�sunroof [mm] 1023 978
Maximum�headroom,�front�-�with�glass�slide/tilt�sunroof [mm] 992 949
Maximum�headroom,�rear�-�without�glass�slide/tilt�sunroof [mm] 957 953
Maximum�headroom,�rear�-�with�glass�slide/tilt�sunroof [mm] 950 942
Front�footwell [mm] 1068 1054
Rear�footwell [mm] 892 881
Luggage�compartment�volume [liters] 480 460
1
1
�BMW 335i:�450 liters.
To�improve�the�entrance�in�the�rear�passenger�compartment,�the�following�changes�have�been�made�in
comparison�to�the�E90:
• the�door�opening�angle�of�the�rear�doors�has�been�increased�5.5°�to�70°
• the�entrance�height�to�the�roof�edge�has�been�increased�by�approx.�10�mm
• the�B-pillar�trim�panels�have�been�flattened
• the�outer�contours�of�the�seat�bench�have�been�flatted�at�the�side�and�rounded�at�the�front
• the�width�of�the�door�sill�has�been�reduced�by�14�mm
• the�foot�entry�freedom�between�B-pillar�and�heel�panel�has�been�increased�18�mm
• the�seat�distance�between�front�and�rear�has�been�increased�16�mm.
5.2.�Material�and�color�concept
In�addition�to�the�comprehensive�offering�of�optional�equipment,�the�F30�can�also�be�individualized
with�the�following�equipment�packages:
• BMW�Sport�Line�(ZSL)
• BMW�Modern�Line�(ZML)
• BMW�Luxury�Line�(ZLL).
The�equipment�packages�contain�both�general�optional�equipment�and�line-specific�features.
22
F30�Introduction
5.�Interior�Equipment
The�content�of�the�equipment�packages�is�partly�binding.�Individual�elements�cannot�be�deselected,
creating�an�excellent�price/performance�ratio.
F30�Lines,�exterior
23
F30�Introduction
5.�Interior�Equipment
F30�Lines,�interior
24
F30�Introduction
5.�Interior�Equipment
5.2.1.�Line�package�content
Scope�controlled�by�package
25
F30�Introduction
5.�Interior�Equipment
5.3.�Dashboard
The�upper�part�of�the�dashboard�is�black�in�the�basic�version�and�for�the�BMW�Modern�Line�(PA 7S1)
dark�oyster.�The�surface�is�coated�with�a�PUR�spray�(PUR�=�polyurethane)�and�has�a�F30-specific
grain.
A�different�Central�Information�Display�(CID)�is�installed,�depending�on�the�vehicle�equipment�specifi-
cation:
• CID�with�6.5"�screen�in�the�basic�version
• CID�with�8.8"�screen�diagonal�for�Professional�navigation�system�(option 609).
For�vehicles�with�basic�equipment�a�black�high-gloss�link�is�installed�around�the�CID.
F30�CID�with�6.5"�screen�diagonal
In�vehicles�with�Professional�navigation�system�(option 609)�a�CID�with�anti-reflecting�laminated�safety
glass�is�used.�The�glass�cover�stretches�to�the�edge�of�the�CID.
F30�CID�with�8.8"�screen�diagonal
For�further�information�on�the�Central�Information�Display�(CID),�please�refer�to�the�“F30�Displays�and
Controls”�product�training�manual.
In�vehicles�with�then�standard�HiFi�loudspeaker�system�there�is�a�mid-range�speaker�on�the�top�side
of�the�dashboard;�in�vehicles�with�the�optional�Harman�Kardon�Surround�Sound�system�(option�688)
there�is�a�mid-range�and�tweeter�on�the�top�side�of�the�dashboard.
Further�information�on�the�speaker�systems�can�be�found�in�the�product�information�"F30�Information
and�Communication".
For�the�first�time�in�the�3-Series�a�BMW�Head‐Up�Display�(option�610)�can�be�ordered.
Further�information�on�the�Head-Up�Display�can�be�found�in�the�product�information�"F30�Displays
and�Controls".
26
F30�Introduction
5.�Interior�Equipment
F30�dashboard
Index Explanation
1 BMW�Head‐Up�Display�(option�610)
2 Cover�for�mid-range�speaker/tweeter�(for�HiFi�loudspeaker�system�or�for
Harman�Kardon�Surround�Sound�system,�option 688)
The�lower�section�of�the�dashboard�is�available�in�black,�Veneto�beige,�oyster�or�nut�brown.�The�sur-
face�is�coated�with�a�PUR�spray�(PUR�=�polyurethane)�and�has�a�F30-specific�grain.�The�die-cast�pan-
elling�is�covered�with�comfort�paint,�thus�improving�the�optic�and�haptic�elements.
With�corresponding�vehicle�equipment�the�control�box�for�the�assist�systems�is�located�under�the�light
switch�or�for�vehicles�with�a�storage�compartment�package�(option�493)�an�additional�storage�com-
partment.
5.4.�Center�console
The�center�console�is�available�in�the�colors�black,�Veneto�beige�or�oyster.
27
F30�Introduction
5.�Interior�Equipment
F30�center�console
Index Explanation
1 Oddments�tray�and�connector�or�ashtray�and�cigarette�lighter
2 Removable�storage�tray
3 Controller
4 Front�armrest
5 Rear�air�outlet
6 Cup�holder
The�controller�is�ergonomically�embedded�next�to�the�gearshift�in�the�decor.�Two�different�controllers
are�fitted�depending�on�the�vehicle�equipment:
• Controller�with�5 buttons�(basic)
• Controller�with�7 buttons�Professional�navigation�system�(option 609).
With�the�optional�equipment�light�package�(option�563)�the�front�oddments�tray�and�the�storage�com-
partment�under�the�front�armrest�are�illuminated.
There�is�a�storage�tray�on�the�back�of�the�center�console�or�the�rear�air�outlet�for�IHKA�2/1�zones.
28
F30�Introduction
5.�Interior�Equipment
5.5.�Inside�mirror
In�the�F30�a�new�inside�mirror�fitting�is�installed.�To�remove�the�inside�mirror,�the�mirror�base�cover
must�be�removed,�the�plug�connection�disconnected�and�then�the�inside�mirror�with�mirror�base�and
retaining�spring�pulled�down�from�the�guide.
F30�inside�mirror
Index Explanation
1 Inside�mirror
2 Retaining�spring
3 Guide
5.6.�Storage�options
The�F30�features�the�following�storage�options.
29
F30�Introduction
5.�Interior�Equipment
F30�storage�options
Index Explanation
1 Oddments�tray
2 Glove�box
3 Door�pocket
4 Storage�compartment,�center�console
5 Storage�tray�(not�US)
6 Cup�holder�(with�removable�storage�tray)
7 Storage�compartment
A�1-litre�bottle�can�be�easily�stowed�in�the�front�door�pockets.
5.7.�Front�seats
The�following�front�seat�variants�can�be�chosen�for�the�F30:
• Basic�seat,�electrical;�driver's�seat�with�memory
• Sports�seat,�electrical;�driver's�seat�with�memory�(option 481).
30
F30�Introduction
5.�Interior�Equipment
F30�front�seat
The�inclination�of�the�head�restraints�can�be�set�in�three�different�positions�in�the�F30.
31
F30�Introduction
5.�Interior�Equipment
F30�maximum�seat�adjustment
Index Explanation
1 Head�restraint�angle�adjustment
2 Head�restraint�height�adjustment
3 Backrest�angle�adjustment
4 Backrest�width�adjustment
5 Forward/back�seat�adjustment
6 Seat�height�adjustment
7 Seat�angle�adjustment
8 Seat�depth�adjustment
9 Lumbar�support�adjustment
32
F30�Introduction
5.�Interior�Equipment
The�seat�adjustment�options�may�vary�depending�on�the�vehicle�equipment.
F30�switch�block,�driver's�seat�adjustment
Index Explanation
1 Button�2�(calls�up�stored�position)
2 Button�1�(calls�up�stored�position)
3 Button�M�(stores�current�position)
4 Backrest�width�adjustment
5 Lumbar�support�adjustment
6 Backrest�angle�adjustment
7 Forward�/�back,�seat�height�and�seat�angle�adjustment
5.8.�Rear�seats
A�through-loading�system�(option�465)�with�a�separate�folding�center�part�can�be�ordered�as�optional
equipment.�The�backrest�is�divided�in�the�ratio�40-20-40.�The�individual�sections�can�be�folded�to�the
front�as�shown�in�the�following�diagrams:
33
F30�Introduction
5.�Interior�Equipment
F30�through-loading�system
5.9.�Climate�control
One�climate�control�variant�is�available�for�the�F30:
• Integrated�automatic�heating�/�air�conditioning�(IHKA),�2/1-zone.
In�the�zone�specification�the�first�number�denotes�the�number�of�controllable�temperature�zones�(tem-
perature�selector�wheels)�and�the�second�number�the�number�of�controllable�airflow�volume�and�air
distribution�zones�(separate�fan�settings).
In�the�F30�the�IHKA�control�unit�is�separate�from�the�IHKA�controls�and�is�located�on�the�heating�and
air-conditioning�unit.
For�further�information�on�the�heating�and�air-conditioning�systems,�please�refer�to�the�“F30�General
Vehicle�Electrics”�product�information.
34
F30�Introduction
5.�Interior�Equipment
F30�air�ducts�integrated�automatic�heating�/�air-conditioning�system�IHKA 2/1�zones
Index Explanation
1 Driver�zone
2 Front�passenger�zone
35
F30�Introduction
6.�Luggage�Compartment
Special�features
• Luggage�compartment�floor�with�flowing�transition�to�the�side�trim�panel
• Luggage�compartment�floor�stop�in�raised�position
• Level�side�faces�with�maximum�use�of�space
• Large,�depth�storage�tray�on�the�left
• Cover�for�toolkit�and�battery,�right
• Tie-down�by�four�lashing�eyes
• Enlarged�luggage�compartment�(480 liters)
• Bigger�loading�opening�in�both�width�and�height.
36
Bayerische�Motorenwerke�Aktiengesellschaft
Händlerqualifizierung�und�Training
Röntgenstraße�7
85716�Unterschleißheim,�Germany
Technical�training.
Product�information.
F30�Powertrain
BMW�Service
General�information
Symbols�used
The�following�symbol�is�used�in�this�document�to�facilitate�better�comprehension�or�to�draw�attention
to�very�important�information:
Contains�important�safety�information�and�information�that�needs�to�be�observed�strictly�in�order�to
guarantee�the�smooth�operation�of�the�system.
Information�status�and�national-market�versions
BMW�Group�vehicles�meet�the�requirements�of�the�highest�safety�and�quality�standards.�Changes�in
requirements�for�environmental�protection,�customer�benefits�and�design�render�necessary�continu-
ous�development�of�systems�and�components.�Consequently,�there�may�be�discrepancies�between
the�contents�of�this�document�and�the�vehicles�available�in�the�training�course.
This�document�basically�relates�to�the�European�version�of�left-hand�drive�vehicles.�Some�operating
elements�or�components�are�arranged�differently�in�right-hand�drive�vehicles�than�shown�in�the�graph-
ics�in�this�document.�Further�differences�may�arise�as�a�result�of�the�equipment�specification�in�specif-
ic�markets�or�countries.
Additional�sources�of�information
Further�information�on�the�individual�topics�can�be�found�in�the�following:
• Owner's�Handbook
• Integrated�Service�Technical�Application.
Contact:�[email protected]
©2011�BMW�AG,�Munich,�Germany
Reprints�of�this�publication�or�its�parts�require�the�written�approval�of�BMW�AG,�Munich
The�information�contained�in�this�document�forms�an�integral�part�of�the�technical�training�of�the�BMW
Group�and�is�intended�for�the�trainer�and�participants�in�the�seminar.�Refer�to�the�latest�relevant�infor-
mation�systems�of�the�BMW�Group�for�any�changes/additions�to�the�technical�data.
Information�status:�September�2011
VH-23/International�Technical�Training
F30�Powertrain
Contents
1. Powertrain�Variants.................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 1
1.1. Models..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1.1. Gasoline�engines.................................................................................................................................................................. 1
2. Engines............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 2
2.1. N20�Engine...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2
2.1.1. New�features/changes.................................................................................................................................................. 2
2.1.2. Technical�data............................................................................................................................................................................ 4
2.1.3. Full�load�diagram................................................................................................................................................................... 5
2.2. N55�engine...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5
2.2.1. New�features/changes.................................................................................................................................................. 6
2.2.2. Technical�data............................................................................................................................................................................ 7
2.2.3. Full�load�diagram................................................................................................................................................................... 8
2.3. Engine�oil�level�check..................................................................................................................................................................................... 9
2.3.1. Detailed�measurement............................................................................................................................................ 10
2.4. Engine�identification..................................................................................................................................................................................... 10
2.4.1. Engine�designation....................................................................................................................................................... 10
2.4.2. Engine�identification....................................................................................................................................................11
3. Fuel� Supply......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 12
3.1. Gasoline............................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 12
3.1.1. System�overview............................................................................................................................................................... 12
3.1.2. Fuel�delivery............................................................................................................................................................................. 14
3.1.3. Tank�ventilation�system..........................................................................................................................................15
4. Automatic�Start/Stop�II�(MSA�II)................................................................................................................................................................. 16
4.1. System�Overview............................................................................................................................................................................................... 16
4.1.1. Automatic�start/stop�function�-�Manual�transmission............................................. 16
4.1.2. Automatic�start/stop�function�-�Automatic�transmission................................... 16
4.1.3. DC/DC�converter............................................................................................................................................................... 17
4.2. Automatic�mode.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 18
4.2.1. Driving................................................................................................................................................................................................ 19
4.2.2. Stopping......................................................................................................................................................................................... 19
4.2.3. Driving�off..................................................................................................................................................................................... 20
4.2.4. Establishing�start-up�readiness................................................................................................................. 20
4.2.5. Automatic�hold..................................................................................................................................................................... 21
4.2.6. Preventing�automatic�engine�shutdown...................................................................................... 21
4.3. Switch-off�inhibitors...................................................................................................................................................................................... 21
4.4. Switch-on�prompts......................................................................................................................................................................................... 22
4.5. Deactivation................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 23
4.5.1. Deactivation�via�automatic�start/stop�function�button............................................24
F30�Powertrain
Contents
4.6. Hydraulic�pressure�accumulator................................................................................................................................................ 24
4.6.1. Installation�location....................................................................................................................................................... 25
4.6.2. Design................................................................................................................................................................................................ 26
4.6.3. Charging......................................................................................................................................................................................... 27
4.6.4. Locking............................................................................................................................................................................................. 29
4.6.5. Discharging................................................................................................................................................................................ 29
4.7. Service�information.........................................................................................................................................................................................30
5. Manual�Gearboxes..................................................................................................................................................................................................................31
5.1. Designation................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 31
5.2. Variants...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................31
5.3. I�gearbox.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 32
5.3.1. I�Turbo�manual�gearbox......................................................................................................................................... 32
5.3.2. Technical�data........................................................................................................................................................................33
5.4. K�transmission........................................................................................................................................................................................................34
5.4.1. Special�features.................................................................................................................................................................. 35
5.4.2. Technical�data........................................................................................................................................................................35
5.4.3. Intermediate�bearings............................................................................................................................................... 36
5.4.4. Dry-sump�lubrication.................................................................................................................................................. 36
5.4.5. Synchromesh..........................................................................................................................................................................36
5.4.6. Mating�dimensions........................................................................................................................................................ 36
6. Automatic�Transmission............................................................................................................................................................................................. 37
6.1. Designation................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 37
6.2. Variants...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................37
6.3. GA8HP45Z�transmission...................................................................................................................................................................... 37
6.3.1. Technical�data........................................................................................................................................................................38
7. Rear�Axle�Differential....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 40
7.1. Designation................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 41
7.2. Variants...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................41
8. Shafts............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 42
8.1. Drive�shafts..................................................................................................................................................................................................................42
8.1.1. Variants............................................................................................................................................................................................. 44
8.1.2. Crash�function....................................................................................................................................................................... 44
8.2. Rear�axle�output�shafts............................................................................................................................................................................ 44
8.2.1. Variants............................................................................................................................................................................................. 44
F30�Powertrain
1.�Powertrain�Variants
F30�powertrain
1.1.�Models
The�F30�will�be�launched�onto�the�market�in�February�2012�in�the�following�models:
• BMW�328i
• BMW�335i
1.1.1.�Gasoline�engines
BMW�328i BMW�335i
Engine N20B20O0 N55B30M0
Power�output [kW�(HP)] 180�(240) 225�(300)
Torque [Nm�(ft�lbs)] 350�(255) 407�(300)
Automatic�transmission GA8HP45Z GA8HP45Z
Manual�gearbox GS6-17BG GS6-45BZ
Rear�axle�differential HAG�188LW HAG�215LW
1
2
HAG�188LW
1
�with�manual�gearbox.
2
�with�automatic�transmission.
1
F30�Powertrain
2.�Engines
2.1.�N20�Engine
The�N20�engine�is�the�new�generation�of�the�4-cylinder�gasoline�engines�at�BMW�and�was�installed�for
the�first�time�in�the�E84.�It�is�gradually�replacing�both�the�4-cylinder�engines�N46�and�N43,�as�well�as
the�6-cylinder�naturally�aspirated�engines�N52�and�N53.�The�latest�technology�has�been�used�for�the
N20�engine�such�as�Turbo-Valvetronic�direct�injection�(TVDI)�in�connection�with�a�twin-scroll�exhaust
turbocharger�for�example.
Special�features
• Combination�of�TwinPower�Turbo,�direct�fuel�injection�(DI)�and�Valvetronic
• Reduction�of�fuel�consumption�by�15%�compared�to�the�N52 engine
• Reduction�of�the�engine�weight�by�22�kg�compared�to�the�N52 engine
• All-wheel�drive�capability
• Exhaust�emission�standards
• Global�use�thanks�to�homogeneous�mixture�preparation.
2.1.1.�New�features/changes
Engine�mechanics
• Aluminium�crankcase�with�LDS-coated�cylinder�barrels
(The�electric�arc�spraying�is�a�powerful�wire�spraying�for�the�manufacture�of�coatings�for�which
electrically�conducted�materials�are�sprayed.)
• Friction-optimized�crankshaft�drive
• Optimized�cooling�jacket
• Turbo-Valvetronic�direct�injection�(TVDI)
• Twin-scroll�exhaust�turbocharger
• 3rd�generation�Valvetronic�with�new�intermediate�levers
• New�variable�camshaft�timing�control�(VANOS)�with�central�valve
• Camshafts�(all�the�components�are�shrink-fitted�onto�the�shaft�pipe)
• Two-part�crankcase�ventilation
• Forged�crankshaft
• Crosswise�crankshaft�drive�(offset�of�crankshaft�axle�to�cylinder�mid�level)
• Piston�with�negative�axial�offset�(offset�of�piston�pin�axle�from�the�cylinder�mid�level)
• Chain�drive�for�counterbalance�shafts�with�chain�tensioner
• Counterbalance�shafts�arranged�on�top�of�one�another.
2
F30�Powertrain
2.�Engines
Oil�supply
• Map-controlled�oil�pump
• New�pendulum-slide�oil�pump
• Raw�oil�cooling�(engine�oil/coolant�heat�exchanger�in�oil�circuit�before�oil�filter)
• New�combined�oil�pressure�and�temperature�sensor.
Air�intake�and�exhaust�emission�systems
• Twin-scroll�exhaust�turbocharger
• Hot�film�air�mass�meter�7�in�all�engine�versions
• Three�connections�for�crankcase�ventilation
• Different�number�of�connections�for�tank�ventilation�(depending�on�the�variant)
• Air-gap-insulated�exhaust�manifold,�six�into�two
• Upstream�catalytic�converter.
Vacuum�system
• Two-stage�vacuum�pump
• Vacuum�reservoir�for�the�wastegate�valve�permanently�connected�to�the�engine�cover.
Fuel�preparation/supply
• Direct�fuel�injection�with�central�injector�position�and�up�to�200 bar�fuel�injection�pressure
• Solenoid�valve�injectors
• Bosch�high-pressure�pump
• High-pressure�lines�to�the�injectors�soldered�to�the�rail
• No�low�fuel-pressure�sensor
• Three�different�tank�ventilation�variants.
Cooling
• Electric�coolant�pump
• Established�heat�management.
Engine�electrical�system
• Bosch�MEVD�17.2.4�engine�control�unit
For�more�information�please�refer�to�the�"N20�Engine"�Training�Information�ST1111
3
F30�Powertrain
2.�Engines
2.1.2.�Technical�data
N20B20O0
F30,�328i�US�version
Design R4
Valves�per�cylinder 4
Engine�control MEVD�17.2.4
Displacement [cm ]
3 1997
1
�for�automatic�transmission:�1500 –�4800�rpm
2
�values�were�still�not�available�at�editorial�deadline.
4
F30�Powertrain
2.�Engines
2.1.3.�Full�load�diagram
Full�load�diagram�F30,�328i�with�N20B20O0�engine�in�comparison�to�the�N52B30O1�engine
2.2.�N55�engine
The�N55�engine�is�the�successor�to�the�N54�engine�and�is�already�in�use�in�numerous�BMW�models,
for�example�in�the�F07,�F10�and�F25.�Technical�updates�and�modifications�make�it�possible�to�use�on-
ly�one�exhaust�turbocharger.�The�technical�data�have�remained�virtually�the�same�-�with�reduced�costs
and�improved�quality.
5
F30�Powertrain
2.�Engines
2.2.1.�New�features/changes
Engine�mechanics
• Crankcase�adapted�for�twin-scroll�exhaust�turbocharger
• Cylinder�bore�changed�to�84 mm
• Large�longitudinal�ventilation�bore�holes�in�the�crankcase
• Modified�oil�supply�of�vacuum�pump
• Water�duct�for�injector�cooling�integrated�in�the�cylinder�head
• Crankcase�ventilation�and�blow-by�pipe�integrated�in�the�cylinder�head�cover
• Asymmetrical�counterweight�arrangement�of�crankshaft�and�weight�reduction
• Profiled�bore�hole�in�small�connecting�rod�eye
• Unleaded�connecting�rod�bearing�shells.
Valve�gear
• Variable�camshaft�timing�control�(VANOS)
- Solenoid�valves�with�integrated�non-return�valve�and�3 strainers
- Increased�adjustment�speed�and�reduced�susceptibility�to�dirt
• Valvetronic�VTC
- Integrated�in�the�cylinder�head�and�revised
- Brushless�servomotor,�3rd�generation
- Position�identifier�for�eccentric�shaft�integrated�in�the�servomotor.
Belt�drive
• Belt�drive�and�vibration�absorber�newly�developed.
Oil�supply
• Intake�pipe,�oil�deflector�and�oil�collector�integrated�in�one�component
• Oil�pump�with�thermoset�slide�and�map�control
• Modified�oil�filter�housing.
Air�intake�and�exhaust�emission�systems
• Twin-scroll�exhaust�turbocharger�with�wastegate�valve�and�electrical�blow-off�valve
• Air-gap-insulated�exhaust�manifold,�six�into�two
• Upstream�catalytic�converter
• Discontinuation�of�underbody�catalytic�converter.
6
F30�Powertrain
2.�Engines
Vacuum�system
• Revised,�similar�to�N63 engine.
Fuel�preparation
• Direct�fuel�injection�with�central�injector�position�and�up�to�200 bar�fuel�injection�pressure
• Solenoid�valve�injectors.
Cooling
• Coolant�channels�revised�for�exhaust�turbocharger.
Engine�electrical�system
• Crankshaft�sensor�integrated�for�automatic�engine�start-stop�function
• Engine-related�Digital�Engine�Electronics�DME�(MEVD 17.2.6)�secured�to�air�intake�system
and�cooled�using�intake�air,�FlexRay-compatible
• Improved�signal�quality�and�temperature�resistance�of�the�hot-film�air-mass�meter�HFM
• Adoption�of�oxygen�sensor�before�catalytic�converter�from�the�N63 engine
• New�oil�pressure�sensor�for�absolute�pressure�measurement
• Oil�temperature�sensor�screwed�into�main�oil�duct
• Ignition�coils�with�higher�ignition�voltage�and�improvement�of�the�electromagnetic
compatibility
• Spark�plugs�analogous�to�N63 engine
• Solenoid�valve�injectors.
For�more�information�please�refer�to�the�"N55�Engine"training�material�ST916.
2.2.2.�Technical�data
N55B30M0
F30,�335i�US�version
Design R6
Valves�per�cylinder 4
Engine�control MEVD�17.2
Displacement 3
[cm ] 2979
7
F30�Powertrain
2.�Engines
N55B30M0
F30,�335i�US�version
Compression�ratio [ε] 10.2�:�1
Fuel�grade RON�91�–�98
Exhaust�emission�standards Ultra�Low�Emission
Vehicle�(ULEV)�II
Fuel�consumption [l/100 km] ---
(manual/automatic�transmission)
Acceleration�0�–�100�km/h [s] 5.7/5.7
(manual/automatic�transmission)
2.2.3.�Full�load�diagram
When�compared�with�its�predecessor,�the�N55�engine�is�characterized�by�lower�fuel�consumption�with
identical�power�and�torque�data.
8
F30�Powertrain
2.�Engines
Full�load�diagram�F30,�335i�with�N55B30M0�engine�in�comparison�to�the�N54B30O0�engine
2.3.�Engine�oil�level�check
The�F30�has�an�engine�oil�level�check.�Only�the�following�messages�can�be�displayed�while�the�vehicle
is�being�driven:
• Engine�oil�level�OK
• Engine�oil�at�minimum.�Top�up�with�1�liter�engine�oil.
• Engine�oil�level�below�minimum.�Top�up�with�1�liter�of�oil.
9
F30�Powertrain
2.�Engines
2.3.1.�Detailed�measurement
Prerequisites:
• Vehicle�standing�on�a�level�road�with�the�engine�running�at�normal�at�operating�temperature
• Manual�gearbox:�gearshift�lever�in�neutral,�clutch�and�accelerator�pedals�not�pressed
• Automatic�transmission:�selector�lever�in�position�N�or�P�and�accelerator�pedal�not�pressed.
Measurement�must�be�started�from�the�Vehicle�Information�menu�and�takes�roughly�one�minute,�in�the
course�of�which�the�idle�speed�is�automatically�increased�slightly.�The�engine�oil�level�is�then�indicated
on�a�scale.
2.4.�Engine�identification
2.4.1.�Engine�designation
In�the�technical�documentation,�the�engine�designation�is�used�to�ensure�unambiguous�identification
of�the�engine.�However,�an�abbreviated�engine�designation�(e.g.�N20)�is�often�used�which�only�allows
the�engine�type�classification.
10
F30�Powertrain
2.�Engines
Posi- Meaning Index Explanation
tion
5 Capacity�in�liters 1 1�liters
6 Displacement�in�1/10�liter 8 0.8�liters
equals�1.8�liters
7 Performance�class K Lowest
U Lower
M Middle
O Upper�(standard)
T Top
S Super
8 Revision�relevant�to�approval 0 New�development
1�–�9 Redesign
2.4.2.�Engine�identification
The�engines�have�an�identification�mark�on�the�crankcase�to�ensure�unambiguous�identification�and
classification.�This�engine�identification�is�also�necessary�for�approval�by�government�authorities.
With�the�N55�engine,�this�identification�has�been�subject�to�a�further�development,�with�the�previous
eight�positions�being�reduced�to�seven.�The�engine�number�can�be�found�on�the�engine�below�the�en-
gine�identification.�This�consecutive�number,�in�conjunction�with�the�engine�identification,�permits�un-
ambiguous�identification�of�each�individual�engine.
11
F30�Powertrain
3.�Fuel�Supply
3.1.�Gasoline
3.1.1.�System�overview
F30 fuel�tank�for�gasoline�engine
12
F30�Powertrain
3.�Fuel�Supply
F30 fuel�tank�for�gasoline�engine�(European�version)
Index Explanation
A Fuel�filler�cap
B Overpressure�protection�function�(in�the�fuel�filler�cap)
C Non-return�valve
D Surge�tank
E Fuel�tank
F Delivery�module
G Lever�sensor
13
F30�Powertrain
3.�Fuel�Supply
Index Explanation
H Service�vent�valve
I Refuelling�ventilation�valve�with�fuel�tank�overfill�protection�facility
J Maximum�fill�level�(limited�by�refuelling�ventilation�valve)
K Non-return�valve�(only�in�US�version)
L Carbon�canister
M Opening�to�environment
N Tank�vent�valve�(on�engine)
O Purge�air�line
P Liquid�trap
Q Fuel�tank�overfill�protection�facility
1 First�fill�valve�and�surge�tank�inlet
2 Suction�strainer
3 Electric�fuel�pump
4 Non-return�valve�(pressure�holding�function,�delivery�pressure)
5 Pressure-limiting�valve
6 Fuel�filter
7 Pressure�regulator
8 Feed�line
9 Suction�jet�pump
10 Intake�pipe�with�coarse�filter�(suction�jet�pump�transfer)
11 Pressure�control�valve�(for�suction�jet�pump)
12 Electronic�fuel�pump�control�EKPS
3.1.2.�Fuel�delivery
For�vehicles�with�N20�or�N55�engine�the�fuel�tank�has�a�volume�of�60�liters.�It�is�designed�as�a�saddle
tank�on�account�of�the�installation�area�in�the�vehicle.�The�fuel�supply�system�has�a�so-called�delivery
unit�and�a�sensor�unit.�The�delivery�unit�is�accommodated�in�the�right�half,�and�the�sensor�unit�in�the
left�half�of�the�fuel�tank.�The�first�fill�valve�(1)�ensures�that�fuel�is�introduced�into�the�surge�tank�during
refuelling�when�the�surge�tank�is�completely�empty.�It�also�acts�as�an�inlet,�in�that�there�is�no�active�fill-
ing�of�the�surge�tank.
The�fuel�flows�via�the�suction�strainer�(2)�to�the�electric�fuel�pump�(3)�with�non-return�valve�(4)�and
pressure�limiting�valve�(5).�It�flows�further�via�the�fuel�filter�(6)�with�pressure�regulator�(7)�to�the�feed
line�(8).�The�electric�fuel�pump�sits�in�the�surge�tank�and�is�adjusted�via�the�electronic�fuel�pump�con-
trol�unit�EKPS�(12).�The�delivery�pressure�is�configured�at�5.8 bar.
The�suction�jet�pump (9)�conveys�the�fuel�via�an�additional�line�from�the�left�half�of�the�fuel�tank�to�the
surge�tank.�The�location�of�the�suction�jet�pump (9)�in�the�surge�tank�is�new.
14
F30�Powertrain
3.�Fuel�Supply
When�the�engine�is�switched�off,�the�delivery�pressure�is�maintained�for�a�certain�amount�of�time�on
account�of�the�hot-start�response.�The�feed�line�cannot�run�dry,�even�after�the�dwell�time,�because�air
cannot�get�in�with�the�system�being�airtight.�The�non-return�valve�(4)�prevents�the�fuel�tank�from�leak-
ing�in�the�event�of�damage�to�the�lines�on�the�engine�or�underbody.
3.1.3.�Tank�ventilation�system
An�overpressure�protection�function�(B)�is�integrated�in�the�fuel�filler�cap�(A).�The�overpressure�pro-
tection�function�ensures,�in�the�event�of�a�problem�with�the�tank�ventilation�system,�that�any�excess
pressure�that�forms�can�escape�and�the�fuel�tank�is�not�damaged.�A�non-return�valve�(C)�is�located�at
the�end�of�the�fuel�filler�neck.�The�non-return�valve�prevents�fuel�from�sloshing�back�into�the�fuel�filler
neck.�The�non-return�valve�is�closed�by�a�spring�so�that�it�is�fluid-tight.
The�components�in�the�fuel�tank�are�accessible�through�the�service�opening�on�the�right,�which�is�an
integral�part�of�the�delivery�module�(F).
The�fuel�level�is�detected�via�the�two�lever�sensors�(G).
The�surge�tank�(D)�ensures�that�enough�fuel�is�always�available�to�the�electric�fuel�pump�(3)�for�deliv-
ery.�The�surge�tank�is�also�an�integral�part�of�the�delivery�module�and�can�thus�be�changed.
The�refuelling�ventilation�valve�with�fuel�tank�overfill�protection�facility�(I)�is�situated�in�a�high�position.
The�valve�closes�if�the�fill�level�reaches�this�height�during�refuelling.�The�air�can�no�longer�escape�fast
enough�from�the�fuel�tank,�thereby�causing�the�fuel�in�the�filler�pipe�to�rise�and�the�fuel�pump�nozzle�to
cut�out.
Ventilation�is�effected�during�operation�while�the�refuelling�ventilation�valve�is�closed�via�the�service
vent�valves�(H).�They�have�a�smaller�opening�diameter�they�alone�would�not�allow�the�air�to�escape�fast
enough�from�the�fuel�tank�during�refuelling.�The�service�vent�valves�are�arranged�in�such�a�way�that
ventilation�is�also�possible�when�the�vehicle�is�at�an�inclination�of�18°.
The�integrated�fuel�tank�overfill�protection�facility�is�provided�by�a�ball,�which�closes�the�vent�hole�as
a�result�of�its�own�weight.�A�fuel�tank�overfill�protection�facility�is�necessary�to�safeguard�the�compen-
sation�volume�in�the�tank.�When�the�refuelling�ventilation�valve�has�closed,�in�order�to�guarantee�the
compensating�volume�maintained�in�the�tank�an�overpressure�is�built�up�in�the�tank�by�the�integrated
fuel�tank�overfill�protection�facility.�This�overpressure�causes�the�fuel�level�in�the�fuel�filler�pipe�to�rise
and�thus�the�fuel�pump�nozzle�to�cut�out.
During�operation�the�pressure�can�rise�due�to�the�temperature�increase.�If�the�pressure�in�the�fuel�tank
(fill�level�above�the�service�vent�valves)�reaches�approx.�30�mbar�above�the�ambient�pressure,�the�ball�is
lifted�and�the�pressure�can�escape�via�the�liquid�trap�(P).�Entrained�fuel�is�retained�in�the�liquid�trap�and
returned�to�the�tank.�In�this�way,�ventilation�is�possible�even�when�the�fuel�tank�is�full�without�the�risk�of
overfilling.
15
F30�Powertrain
4.�Automatic�Start/Stop�II�(MSA�II)
The�F30�328i�(N20),�335i�(N55)�are�available�with�the�MSA�II�system�(as�standard�equipment)�with�both
the�manual�and�automatic�8�speed�transmission.
MSA�II�system�highlights:
• Air�conditioning�function�is�enhanced�with�the�cold�storage�evaporator.
• The�hydraulic�pressure�accumulator�allows�MSA�II�to�operate�with�automatic�transmissions.
• Driver�presence�detection�via�driver's�seat�belt�and�driver's�door�switch.
MSA�II�System�Components
4.1.�System�Overview
4.1.1.�Automatic�start/stop�function�-�Manual�transmission
When�the�car�is�stopped�and�the�driver�engages�neutral�and�releases�the�clutch�pedal,�the�automatic
start/stop�function�switches�the�engine�off.�This�means�that�the�vehicle�does�not�use�any�fuel�when�it�is
at�a�standstill.�When�the�driver�depresses�the�clutch�pedal�again,�the�engine�is�automatically�restarted
and�the�driver�can�continue�driving.
4.1.2.�Automatic�start/stop�function�-�Automatic�transmission
The�automatic�engine�start-stop�function�switches�off�the�engine�when�the�vehicle�is�brought�to�a
standstill,�the�selector�lever�remains�in�the�D�position,�and�the�driver�depresses�the�brake�pedal�to�hold
the�vehicle�at�a�standstill.�This�means�that�the�car�does�not�use�any�fuel�when�it�is�at�a�standstill.�When
the�driver�releases�the�brake�pedal�again,�the�engine�is�automatically�restarted�and�the�driver�can�con-
tinue�driving.
The�description�that�follows�therefore�deals�specifically�with�the�automatic�start/stop�function�in�con-
junction�with�the�automatic�transmission.
16
F30�Powertrain
4.�Automatic�Start/Stop�II�(MSA�II)
The�engine�will�NOT�automatically�turn�OFF�if:
• Outside�temperature�below�37.4˚F.
• Outside�temperature�above�95˚F.
• Vehicle�interior�is�not�yet�warmed�up�or�cooled�down.
• Engine�is�not�yet�warmed�up.
• Vehicle�battery�state�of�charge�very�low.
• After�vehicle�was�driven�in�reverse.
• Steering�wheel�operated�after�vehicle�stopped.
• Stop&Go�Traffic.
• GWS�selector�in�Sport/Manual�mode.
If�MSA�is�active�(ENGINE�OFF),�the�engine�will�be�turned�ON�automatically�if:
• Interior�temperature�cannot�be�maintained�(cooling�and�heating).
• Windshield�fogging.
• Vehicle�battery�state�of�charge�drops�below�a�threshold.
• Steering�wheel�input�is�detected.
• Change�gear�lever�position�from�D�to�N;�D�to�M/S;�P�to�D.
• The�accelerator�and�the�brake�pedal�are�pressed�at�the�same�time.
• ECO�PRO�mode�activated.
4.1.3.�DC/DC�converter
The�higher�frequency�of�starting�operations�in�vehicles�with�the�automatic�start/stop�function�can�lead
to�voltage�dips�in�the�vehicle�electrical�system.�One�DC/DC�converter�is�installed�in�order�to�protect
specific�voltage-sensitive�components�(depending�on�the�vehicle�equipment).
The�DC/DC�converter�supplies�a�constant�voltage�to�the�30B_DC/DC�terminals,�also�during�the�start-
ing�operation.
A�DC/DC�converter�is�installed�only�if�the�following�options�are�installed:
• Harmon�Kardon�Surround�Sound�System�(SA�688)
• Navigation�system�(optional�609)
Note:�For�a�detailed�explanation�of�how�the�DC/DC�converter�operates�refer�to�the�MSA�I�sec-
tion�of�the�ST1112�training�material.
17
F30�Powertrain
4.�Automatic�Start/Stop�II�(MSA�II)
4.2.�Automatic�mode
The�automatic�start/stop�function�is�ready�for�operation�following�every�engine�start.
The�function�is�activated�once�the�vehicle�reaches�a�specific�speed:
• Vehicles�with�manual�transmission:�>�5�km/h/3�mph.
• Vehicles�with�automatic�transmission:�>�9�km/h/5�mph.
The�driver�presence�detection�via�the�seat�belt�buckle�switch�and�also�via�the�door�contact�has�been
introduced�as�a�new�feature�of�MSA�II.
When�the�driver�leaves�the�vehicle,�the�automatic�start/stop�function�is�deactivated,�in�order�to�prevent
the�engine�from�starting�automatically.
The�MSA�function�is�always�reactivated�if:
• the�driver's�seat�belt�is�fastened�and�the�vehicle�is�travelling�at�a�speed�of�>�5�km/h/3�mph
• the�driver's�door�is�closed�and�the�vehicle�is�travelling�at�a�speed�of�>�5�km/h/3�mph*.
*�>�9�km/h/5�mph�-�vehicles�with�automatic�transmission
The�prerequisites�for�deactivation�of�the�automatic�start/stop�function�vary,�depending�on�which
switching�mode�the�seatbelt�buckle�switch�and�door�contact�are�in�when�the�automatic�start/stop�func-
tion�is�activated:
Status�during�activation�of�automatic Prerequisites�for�deactivation�of�automatic
start/stop�function start/stop�function
• The�driver's�seat�belt�is�fastened. The�driver�unfastens�the�seat�belt�buckle�and
opens�driver's�door.
• The�driver's�door�is�closed.
• The�driver's�seat�belt�is�not�fastened. The�driver�opens�the�driver's�door.
• The�driver's�door�is�closed.
• The�driver's�seat�belt�is�fastened. The�driver�unfastens�the�seat�belt�buckle.
• The�driver's�door�is�opened.
The�automatic�start/stop�function�is�reactivated�if:
• the�seat�belt�buckle�is�fastened�and/or�the�driver's�door�is�closed�and�the�engine�has�been
started
• the�seat�belt�buckle�is�fastened�and/or�the�driver's�door�is�closed�and�the�vehicle�is�travelling�at
a�speed�of�>�5�km/h/3mph*.
*�>�9�km/h/5mph�-�vehicles�with�automatic�transmission
18
F30�Powertrain
4.�Automatic�Start/Stop�II�(MSA�II)
4.2.1.�Driving
The�purpose�of�the�automatic�start/stop�function�is�to�switch�the�engine�off�when�the�vehicle�is�at�a
standstill.�As�long�as�the�vehicle�is�in�motion�the�driver�will�not�be�aware�of�the�automatic�start/stop
function.
Index Explanation
1 Vehicle�moving
2 Selector�lever�in�drive�position�D,�driver�operates�accelerator�pedal
3 Engine�running,�the�driving�situation�is�reflected�by�the�engine�speed�display
and�fuel�consumption�display
4.2.2.�Stopping
From�the�driver's�point�of�view,�the�stopping�process�with�subsequent�engine�stop�is�as�follows:
Index Explanation
1 Vehicle�slows�to�a�standstill,�e.g.�at�a�red�light
2 Selector�lever�remains�in�the�"D"�drive�position,�driver�depresses�the�brake
pedal�to�decelerate�and�hold�the�vehicle�at�a�standstill
3 The�engine�is�switched�off�after�roughly�1�second,�"0"�engine�speed�will�be
displayed�on�the�tachometer�with�the�needle�reading�“Ready”.
19
F30�Powertrain
4.�Automatic�Start/Stop�II�(MSA�II)
In�the�situation�depicted�above�the�driver�holds�the�car�at�a�standstill�by�depressing�the�brake�pedal.
Alternatively,�the�driver�can�select�selector�lever�position�"P"�and�release�the�brake�pedal.�The�engine
remains�switched�off.�If�then�the�drive�position�"D"�is�subsequently�engaged,�the�engine�starts�without
delay.
4.2.3.�Driving�off
The�driver�indicates�his�intention�to�drive�off�by�releasing�the�brake�pedal.
If�the�driver�previously�held�the�car�at�a�standstill�by�depressing�the�brake�pedal,�the�engine�starts�as
soon�as�the�driver�releases�the�brake�pedal.
Index Explanation
1 Driver�wishes�to�continue�the�journey�(e.g.�green�light)
2 The�selector�lever�remains�in�drive�position�"D",�driver�releases�the�brake�pedal
3 Engine�is�started,�revolution�counter�and�fuel�consumption�display�revert�back
to�normal�to�reflect�the�driving�situation
If�the�driver�moves�the�selector�lever�into�position�"P"�after�the�engine�was�switched�off�automatically,
the�engine�starts�automatically�if�the�selector�lever�is�now�moved�to�position�"D".
During�this�process,�the�automatic�engine�start�is�not�activated�automatically�via�a�signal�from�the
brake�light�switch,�but�by�the�DSC�control�unit�that�monitors�the�brake�pressure.
4.2.4.�Establishing�start-up�readiness
If�the�driver�wants�to�start�the�engine�but�not�yet�drive�off,�he�can�establish�start-up�readiness�by:
• Pressing�the�brake�pedal�briefly,�applying�more�force
• Releasing�the�brake�pedal�slightly
Both�of�these�actions�will�prompt�the�engine�to�start�automatically.
20
F30�Powertrain
4.�Automatic�Start/Stop�II�(MSA�II)
4.2.5.�Automatic�hold
If�the�driver�has�activated�the�"Automatic�Hold"�function,�he/she�can�also�release�the�brake�pedal�once
the�vehicle�has�come�to�a�standstill.�The�automatic�start/stop�function�also�switches�the�engine�off�in
this�case.�The�car�is�held�at�a�standstill�by�the�DSC�hydraulics.�The�engine�only�starts�if�the�driver�oper-
ates�the�accelerator�pedal.
4.2.6.�Preventing�automatic�engine�shutdown
In�order�to�be�able�to�drive�off�quickly,�e.g.�at�a�crossing,�the�automatic�engine�shutdown�can�be�ac-
tively�prevented�if�within�one�second�after�the�vehicle�comes�to�a�standstill�the�brake�pedal�is�pressed
briefly,�applying�more�force�than�usual,�then�immediately�held�with�the�usual�brake�pedal�force.
Index Explanation
1 Vehicle�slows�to�a�standstill,�e.g.�at�a�red�light
2 Immediately�after�the�vehicle�comes�to�a�standstill�(within�one�second)
the�brake�pedal�is�pressed�briefly,�applying�more�force�than�usual,�then
immediately�held�with�the�usual�brake�pedal�force
3 The�engine�continues�running
4.3.�Switch-off�inhibitors
Under�certain�conditions�it�is�necessary�to�suppress�the�MSA�function:
• the�vehicle�is�coasting�(vehicles�with�manual�transmission�only)
• the�brake�vacuum�is�too�low�(vehicles�with�manual�transmission�only)
• the�brake�pedal�is�not�pressed�firmly�enough�which�means�the�vehicle�is�detected�as�not�being
held�sufficiently�(vehicles�with�automatic�transmission�only)
• the�vehicle�stops�on�uphill/downhill�gradients�>�12%
• the�steering�angle�is�>�6°
• the�steering�wheel�movement�is�not�yet�complete�(as�otherwise�insufficient�support�will�be
provided�by�the�power�steering�as�a�consequence)
21
F30�Powertrain
4.�Automatic�Start/Stop�II�(MSA�II)
• the�vehicle�was�not�driven�at�a�speed�of�>�5�km/h/3�mph*�following�the�previous�engine�shut-
down
• the�engine�is�not�running�at�idle�speed�(accelerator�pedal�is�being�pressed)
• the�vehicle�is�being�driven�in�reverse
• the�Hill�Descent�Control�(HDC)�has�been�activated
• the�operating�temperature�of�the�engine�is�too�low
• the�carbon�canister�is�being�purged
• the�fuel�grade�is�insufficient
• the�gearbox�adaptation�is�active�(vehicles�with�automatic�transmission�only)
• the�hydraulic�pressure�accumulator�is�not�charged�yet�(vehicles�with�automatic�transmission
only)
• stop-and-go�traffic
• the�state�of�charge�is�too�low
• the�ambient�temperature�is�below�+3�°C/�37.4�°F�(ice�warning)
• the�ambient�temperature�is�above�+35�°C/�95�°F�(with�heating�and�air�conditioning�system
switched�on)
• the�condensation�sensor�of�the�IHKA�detects�fogging�of�the�windshield
• the�heating�and�air�conditioning�system�is�switched�on�but�the�passenger�compartment�has
not�yet�warmed�up�or�cooled�down�to�the�required�temperature
• the�brakes�have�been�applied�via�ABS.
*�>�9�km/h/5�mph�-�vehicles�with�automatic�transmission
4.4.�Switch-on�prompts
Conversely,�it�may�be�necessary�to�start�the�engine�under�the�following�conditions:
• the�vehicle�is�not�sufficiently�held�by�the�released�brake�pedal�(vehicles�with�automatic�trans-
mission�only)
• the�steering�wheel�is�moved
• the�engine�is�not�running�at�idle�speed�(accelerator�pedal�is�being�pressed)
• the�transmission�changes�from�"P"�to�"D";�the�driver�previously�shifted�from�"D"�to�"P"�when
the�engine�was�automatically�switched�off�(vehicles�with�automatic�transmission�only)
• the�transmission�changes�from�"D"�to�"N"�or�"R"�(vehicles�with�automatic�transmission�only)
• the�state�of�charge�is�too�low
• the�ambient�temperature�is�above�+35�°C/95�°F�(with�heating�and�air�conditioning�system
switched�on)
• the�condensation�sensor�of�the�IHKA�detects�fogging�of�the�windshield
• the�evaporator�temperature�is�too�low�to�ensure�sufficient�climate�control.
22
F30�Powertrain
4.�Automatic�Start/Stop�II�(MSA�II)
4.5.�Deactivation
If�a�deactivation�condition�exists,�the�automatic�start/stop�function�is�deactivated.
The�following�scenarios�arise,�depending�on�when�the�deactivation�condition�for�the�automatic�start/
stop�function�occurred:
• the�engine�continues�running�and�is�no�longer�stopped�automatically
• the�engine�was�stopped�automatically�and�starts�once�again�automatically
• the�engine�was�stopped�automatically�and�no�longer�starts�automatically�(the�Check�Control
message�"MSA�off"�appears�-�the�start/stop�button�must�be�operated�in�order�to�the�start�the
engine).
The�following�deactivation�conditions�may�occur:
• the�driver's�absence�has�been�detected
• the�engine�did�not�start�when�starting
• the�engine�compartment�lid�is�unlocked
• a�fault�related�to�the�automatic�start/stop�function�has�been�detected�at�the�engine,�transmis-
sion�or�components�involved�in�the�automatic�start/stop�function
• the�bus�communication�is�faulty
• the�automatic�start/stop�function�has�been�deactivated�via�the�automatic�start/stop�function
button
• the�automatic�start/stop�function�was�deactivated�via�the�diagnosis�system
• the�vehicle�is�in�transport�mode
• the�engine�was�stalled.
The�individual�statuses�can�be�read�out�using�the�diagnosis�system.
An�easy-to-follow�example�of�a�deactivation�with�subsequent�switch-on�request:
• the�automatic�start/stop�function�is�deactivated�via�the�automatic�start/stop�function�button�in
the�automatic�engine�shutdown�phase
• as�a�consequence,�the�engine�starts�automatically
• after�this,�no�further�automatic�engine�shutdowns�occur,�the�automatic�start/stop�function�re-
mains�deactivated.
23
F30�Powertrain
4.�Automatic�Start/Stop�II�(MSA�II)
4.5.1.�Deactivation�via�automatic�start/stop�function�button
F30�automatic�start/stop�function�button�location
The�automatic�start/stop�function�can�be�deactivated�manually�via�the�automatic�start/stop�function
button�(1).�The�LED�in�the�button�lights�up�when�the�function�is�deactivated.�The�automatic�start/stop
function�is�reactivated�each�time�the�engine�is�restarted.
4.6.�Hydraulic�pressure�accumulator
When�the�automatic�start/stop�function�is�activated�the�engine�may�shut�off�once�the�vehicle�is�at�a
standstill,�the�engine�restarts�automatically�as�the�driver�releases�the�brake�to�drive�off.
In�these�engine�stop�phases�the�transmission�oil�pump�is�not�driven,�thus�the�fluid�pressure�supply
ceases,�the�gearshift�elements�open,�and�there�is�no�longer�a�transfer�of�power�in�the�transmission.
Maximum�transmission�oil�pressure�is�required�in�order�for�the�drive�off�process�to�take�place�dynami-
cally�without�a�noticeable�delay�when�the�automatic�start/stop�function�is�activated.�However,�the�me-
chanically�driven�transmission�oil�pump�cannot�build�up�pressure�quickly�enough�while�the�engine�is
starting.
A�hydraulic�pressure�accumulator�is�therefore�used�in�the�automatic�transmission�for�this�purpose�(as
with�F04).�With�the�volume�of�transmission�fluid�stored�in�the�hydraulic�pressure�accumulator,�the�shift
elements�can�be�filled�as�soon�as�the�engine�is�started,�even�before�the�transmission�oil�pump�has�built
up�the�necessary�pressure�to�drive�off.
24
F30�Powertrain
4.�Automatic�Start/Stop�II�(MSA�II)
Variation�in�transmission�oil�pressure�over�time�at�engine�start
Index Explanation
1 Transmission�oil�pressure
2 Nominal�value�of�the�transmission�oil�pressure�which�is�required�to
hydraulically�actuate�the�shift�elements
3 Characteristic�of�the�transmission�oil�pressure�with�hydraulic�pressure
accumulator
4 Characteristic�of�the�transmission�oil�pressure�without�hydraulic�pressure
accumulator
5 Point�at�which�the�automatic�transmission�with�hydraulic�pressure
accumulator�is�ready�to�drive�off
6 Point�at�which�the�automatic�transmission�without�hydraulic�pressure
accumulator�is�ready�to�drive�off
7 Time
4.6.1.�Installation�location
The�hydraulic�pressure�accumulator�is�integrated�in�the�automatic�transmission.�It�is�located�in�the
transmission�oil�sump,�in�the�direction�of�travel�behind�the�mechatronics�module.
The�hydraulic�pressure�accumulator�can�be�replaced�as�a�separate�component.
25
F30�Powertrain
4.�Automatic�Start/Stop�II�(MSA�II)
8–speed�automatic�transmission�cutaway
Index Explanation
1 Transmission�housing
2 Transmission�oil�sump
3 Hydraulic�pressure�accumulator
4.6.2.�Design
Design�of�hydraulic�pressure�accumulator
Index Explanation
1 Connection�to�hydraulic�system�of�automatic�transmission
2 Throttle�and�non-return�valve
3 Hydraulic�piston
4 Hydraulic�cylinder
5 Coil�spring
6 Electromechanical�latch�mechanism
26
F30�Powertrain
4.�Automatic�Start/Stop�II�(MSA�II)
The�hydraulic�pressure�accumulator�consists�of�a�hydraulic�cylinder.�This�cylinder�contains�a�piston
that�moves�against�the�force�of�a�spring.�The�piston�can�be�electromechanically�locked�in�the�ten-
sioned�end�position.�The�electromechanical�latch�mechanism�incorporates�locking�balls,�a�tension
spring,�a�release�spring,�and�a�solenoid.
The�solenoid�is�activated�and�deactivated�by�the�EGS.�A�corresponding�wiring�harness�to�the�hydraulic
pressure�accumulator�is�laid�inside�the�transmission�housing.
The�cylinder�of�the�hydraulic�pressure�accumulator�is�connected�to�the�transmission's�hydraulic�sys-
tem�directly�(without�any�valves�between�them).�The�hydraulic�pressure�accumulator�in�fact�contains
an�element�which�functions�as�a�throttle�and�non-return�valve.�The�throttle�limits�the�volumetric�flow�of
the�fluid�while�the�hydraulic�pressure�accumulator�is�being�filled.�In�general,�this�filling�operation�corre-
sponds�to�the�charging�operation�of�the�accumulator�which�is�why�the�expressions�"charging"�or�"dis-
charging"�are�used�in�this�description.
The�non-return�valve�ensures�that�the�transmission�fluid�flows�into�the�hydraulic�pressure�accumula-
tor�via�the�throttle�during�charging.�The�transmission�fluid�does�not�flow�through�the�throttle�during�the
discharging�process,�the�non-return�valve�now�opens�instead�to�allow�an�unrestricted�flow�of�transmis-
sion�fluid�back�into�the�hydraulic�system.�The�purpose�of�the�non-return�valve�is�therefore�not�to�main-
tain�the�pressure�in�the�charged�state.�In�the�charged�state,�the�transmission�fluid�in�the�hydraulic�pres-
sure�accumulator�is�depressurized�and�the�energy�is�stored�in�the�tensioned�spring.
4.6.3.�Charging
The�hydraulic�pressure�accumulator�is�therefore�always�charged�when�the�engine�is�running�and�the
transmission�oil�pump�is�working.�During�charging�transmission�fluid�flows�through�the�throttle�into�the
hydraulic�cylinder.�In�the�process�only�a�small�volume�is�drawn�from�the�hydraulic�system�so�that�the
pressure�level�does�not�drop�unintentionally.�The�transmission�fluid�pushes�on�the�piston�which�acts
against�the�spring�force�increasing�the�tension�on�the�spring.
27
F30�Powertrain
4.�Automatic�Start/Stop�II�(MSA�II)
Charging�of�the�hydraulic�pressure�accumulator
Index Explanation
A Discharged�state�-�charging�procedure�starts
B Charged�state�-�charging�procedure�ends
1 Transmission�fluid�flows�from�the�hydraulic�system�of�the�automatic
transmission�into�the�hydraulic�pressure�accumulator
2 Volumetric�flow�of�the�transmission�fluid�is�limited�by�the�throttle
3 The�transmission�fluid�exerts�force�on�the�piston�which�moves�and�tensions
the�coil�spring
4 Transmission�fluid�exerts�a�force�on�the�piston�so�that�it�is�held�in�the
"charged"�end�position
At�the�end�of�the�charging�process�the�piston�travels�past�the�latch�mechanism�(locking�balls)�until�it
reaches�the�end/stop.�The�transmission�fluid�pressure�holds�the�piston�against�the�spring�force�in�the
end�position.
The�latch�mechanism�does�not�engage�yet.�The�hydraulic�pressure�accumulator�is�fully�charged�in�this
end�position.
28
F30�Powertrain
4.�Automatic�Start/Stop�II�(MSA�II)
4.6.4.�Locking
When�the�engine�is�switched�off�(while�the�hydraulic�pressure�accumulator�is�charged)�the�transmis-
sion�oil�pressure�drops�causing�the�spring�to�be�released�slightly.�This�allows�the�piston�to�slide�into
the�locked�position�where�locking�balls�hold�the�piston�mechanically�in�place.
The�now�energized�solenoid�holds�the�inner�slide�in�place�so�that�the�locking�balls�cannot�enter�the
channels�designated�for�releasing�the�lock.�The�electric�power�used�for�this�is�low�(<�10�W)�and�is�only
required�while�the�engine�is�off.�Therefor�the�additional�energy�consumption�of�the�hydraulic�pressure
accumulator�viewed�over�an�entire�driving�cycle�is�very�low.
Charged�and�locked�state�of�the�hydraulic�pressure�accumulator
Index Explanation
1 Mechanical�latch�mechanism
2 Solenoid�activated
4.6.5.�Discharging
When�the�engine�is�started,�as�the�driver�wants�to�drive�off,�the�gearshift�elements�in�the�automatic
transmission�for�driving�off�must�be�engaged.�The�hydraulic�pressure�accumulator�supplies�the�trans-
mission�fluid�pressure�required�for�this�during�the�discharging�process.
As�the�solenoid�is�deactivated�for�discharging�the�inner�slide�(driven�by�a�small�spring)�moves�in�the�di-
rection�of�the�locking�balls.�This�allows�the�balls�to�enter�the�channels�designated�for�releasing�the�lock
which�in�turn�releases�the�piston.�The�spring�(compressed�during�the�charging�process)�exerts�force
on�the�piston�which�pressurizes�the�transmission�fluid�in�the�cylinder.
29
F30�Powertrain
4.�Automatic�Start/Stop�II�(MSA�II)
Discharging�of�the�hydraulic�pressure�accumulator
Index Explanation
1 The�large�spring�pushes�on�the�piston,�which�in�turn,�forces�the�transmission
fluid�out�of�the�hydraulic�cylinder
2 Transmission�fluid�can�now�flow�through�the�throttle�and�the�opened�non-
return�valve
3 Transmission�fluid�flows�from�the�hydraulic�pressure�accumulator�back�into�the
hydraulic�system�of�the�automatic�transmission
The�piston�moves�(in�the�graphic�to�the�left)�and�thereby�pushes�the�transmission�fluid�back�into�the
transmission�hydraulic�system.�The�transmission�fluid�exits�the�cylinder�through�the�now�opened�non-
return�valve�and�throttle.
The�oil�volume�forced�back�into�the�hydraulic�system�of�the�transmission�is�sufficient�to�engage�the
gearshift�elements�needed�for�the�driving�off�process.�This�system�is�designed�to�provide�the�initial�flu-
id�pressure�needed�for�the�transmission�to�go�into�“Gear”�at�the�exact�moment�just�before�the�engine
is�started.�As�soon�as�the�engine�is�started,�the�transmission�fluid�pressure�is�then�again�generated�by
the�transmission�oil�pump�and�the�entire�process�is�restarted.
4.7.�Service�information
For�information�on�servicing/diagnosing�the�MSA�II�system,�refer�to�ST1112�Automatic�Start/Stop
(MSA)�training�material.
30
F30�Powertrain
5.�Manual�Gearboxes
In�the�F30�all�the�engine�variants�are�equipped�as�standard�with�manual�gearboxes.
5.1.�Designation
The�transmission�designation�in�the�technical�documentation�allows�it�to�be�uniquely�identified.�In�fre-
quent�cases,�however,�only�a�short�designation�is�used.�such�as�I,�K,�or�G�is�used�to�identify�the�trans-
mission.�For�the�correct�designation,�refer�to�the�following�table.
5.2.�Variants
Model Engine Transmission�designation
BMW�328i N20B20O0 GS6-17BG I-350�Turbo�transmis-
sion
BMW�335i N55B30M0 GS6-45BZ K�transmission
31
F30�Powertrain
5.�Manual�Gearboxes
5.3.�I�gearbox
F30�I�gearbox
Index Explanation
1 GS6-17BG�gearbox
2 Gearshift�rod
3 Gearshift�arm
4 Gaiter
The�I�transmission�is�a�6-speed�manual�gearbox�with�two-piece�die-cast�aluminium�housing.�The�dif-
ferent�engine�applications�can�be�covered�with�a�variation�of�the�clutch�housing.�The�main�housing�is
the�same�for�all�variants.
For�the�I�Turbo�transmission,�the�transmission�ratio�was�adapted�to�the�power�characteristics�of�the
turbo�engines.�In�the�F30�the�I�Turbo�transmission�is�used.�I–350�turbo�transmission�in�the�BMW 328i.
5.3.1.�I�Turbo�manual�gearbox
New�features/changes
• Gear�set�optimized�for�turbo�engines
• Improvement�to�behavior�of�vehicle�in�the�event�of�a�crash�through�reinforced�transmission
mounting�and�a�new�gear�safety�bearing
• Clutch�housing�extended�to�the�fixture�of�the�centrifugal�pendulum�in�the�N20�engine
• Screw�connection�on�engine�standardized�to�M10�thread
• Ground�connection�to�the�body�for�the�first�time.
32
F30�Powertrain
5.�Manual�Gearboxes
Gears
To�minimize�the�gearbox�noise�the�running�gears�have�been�designed�as�high�gears�with�a�particularly
large�helix�angle�and�have�been�optimized�in�terms�of�their�coverage.
Bearings
The�main�bearings�have�a�fundamental�influence�on�the�operational�smoothness�and�the�switching
precision�of�the�transmission.�Play�changes�due�to�temperature�fluctuations�or�an�increase�in�the�play
during�operating�time�are�avoided�by�the�exclusive�use�of�grooved�ball�bearings�and�roller�bearings.
The�main�bearings�are�designed�as�so-called�"clean�bearings".�They�are�protected�against�dirt�with�a
cover�and�are�thus�oil-permeable.�The�operating�safety�is�therefore�increased�and�the�use�of�smaller,
lighter�bearings�is�possible.
Lubrication
The�use�of�a�life-time�oil�filling�(capacity�1.4 liter).�Together�with�the�dirt-resistance�of�the�bearings,�an
optimal�combination�of�a�long�service�life�with�no�maintenance�is�achieved.
Synchronization
In�the�first�and�second�gear�double�taper�synchronizations�are�used.�All�other�gears�are�designed�as
single�taper�synchronization.
Acoustics
A�very�precise�and�smooth�gearshift�is�achieved�by:
• The�shift�gate�installed�in�the�transmission
• The�low-friction�gearshift�shaft�in�a�ball�sleeve
• The�use�of�gearshift�forks.
The�passive�lock�guarantees�locking�safety�with�optimized�ease�of�movement.
5.3.2.�Technical�data
I-350�Turbo
Transmission�designation GS6-17BG
Maximum�drive�torque [Nm] 350
Transmission�ratio�1st�gear 3.6933
Transmission�ratio�2nd�gear 2.0619
Transmission�ratio�3rd�gear 1.3134
Transmission�ratio�4th�gear 1.0000
33
F30�Powertrain
5.�Manual�Gearboxes
I-350�Turbo
Transmission�ratio�5th�gear 0.8092
Transmission�ratio�6th�gear 0.6771
Transmission�ratio�reverse�gear 3.3484
5.4.�K�transmission
F30�K�gearbox
Index Explanation
1 Gearbox�GS6-45BZ
2 Gearshift�arm
3 Gearshift�rod
4 Gaiter
The�K�transmission�is�a�6-gear�inline�manual�gearbox�in�a�countershaft�design.
Instead�of�the�G�gearbox,�the�smaller,�lighter�and�more�cost-effective�gearbox�can�be�used�in�the
N55B30M0�engine.�The�weight�advantage�is�approx.�11�kg�depending�on�the�engine�application.
The�gearbox's�high�transmission�capability�with�at�the�same�time�small�size�and�weight�is�essentially
achieved�by�intermediate�mounting�of�the�main�shafts�and�a�modified�gear�train�concept.
34
F30�Powertrain
5.�Manual�Gearboxes
5.4.1.�Special�features
• Six-speed�gearbox�with�optimized�transmission�ratios
• Intermediate�bearings
• Dry-sump�lubrication
• Reduction�in�consumption�(approx.�–2%�compared�to�G�manual�gearboxes)
• Reduced�weight�(approx.�–11 kg�compared�to�G�manual�gearboxes)
• Synchromesh�units�with�carbon�friction�linings
• Life-time�oil�filling
• Zero-gear�sensor�for�automatic�engine�start-stop�function.
The�gearshift�quality�is�significantly�improved�by
• The�use�of�a�newly�developed�carbon�friction�lining�on�the�synchromesh�units
• Newly�developed�and�very�low-friction�shift�mechanism
• The�low�drag�losses�of�the�gear�train
• The�minimal�overshift�travel.
To�keep�the�drag�losses�low,�dry-sump�lubrication�is�used�for�the�first�time.�Compared�with�conven-
tional�immersion�lubrication,�this�prevents�the�swash�losses�from�the�movement�of�the�gear�train�in�the
sump�oil.�Further�reduction�of�losses�is�achieved�by�the�friction-optimized�radial�shaft�seals.
5.4.2.�Technical�data
K�transmission
Transmission�designation GS6-45BZ
Maximum�drive�torque [Nm] 470
Wheelbase [mm] 80
Weight�incl.�oil [kg] 43.3
Gearbox�length [mm] 646
Transmission�ratio�1st�gear 4.110
Transmission�ratio�2nd�gear 2.315
Transmission�ratio�3rd�gear 1.542
Transmission�ratio�4th�gear 1.179
Transmission�ratio�5th�gear 1.000
Transmission�ratio�6th�gear 0.846
Transmission�ratio�reverse�gear 3.372
35
F30�Powertrain
5.�Manual�Gearboxes
5.4.3.�Intermediate�bearings
In�countershaft-design�manual�gearboxes�the�main�shaft�is�pressed�away�from�the�countershaft�by�the
gearing�forces.�This�gives�rise�to�a�deviation�of�the�ideal�gearing�contact�pattern,�which�results�in�a�sig-
nificant�deterioration�in�the�strength�of�the�gearing�and�the�acoustics.
The�K�gearbox�therefore�makes�use�of�intermediate�bearings�which�significantly�limit�shaft�bending.�In
this�way,�compared�with�conventional�gearboxes,�higher�torques�can�be�transmitted�and�the�gearing
acoustics�can�be�simultaneously�improved.
5.4.4.�Dry-sump�lubrication
The�lubrication�method�used�in�conventional�manual�gearboxes�is�usually�immersion�lubrication.�The
gear�wheels�on�the�countershaft�are�immersed�into�the�gearbox�oil�and�distribute�it�as�the�gear�train
rotates�in�an�uncontrolled�fashion�through�the�entire�gearbox.�Additional�equipment�such�as�oil�bulk-
heads�or�oil�ways�is�often�required�to�deliver�the�oil�to�the�gearing,�the�bearings�or�the�synchromesh
units.
The�K�gearbox�uses�for�the�first�time�a�dry-sump�lubrication�system,�consisting�of
• Oil�filter
• Oil�pump
• Injection�pipe.
This�system�utilizes�less�energy�than�an�immersion�lubrication�system�to�deliver�lubricating�oil�specif-
ically�to�the�gearing,�the�bearings�and�the�synchromesh�units.�Controlled�oil�routing�also�results�in�im-
proved�temperature�management,�in�that�cooling�air�from�the�underbody�area�is�specifically�directed
into�the�area�of�the�filter�intake�opening.�In�this�way,�the�gearbox�oil�is�subjected�to�continuous�cooling.
The�oil�filter�also�improves�the�oil�quality�and�with�it�the�load�capability�of�the�gearing.
5.4.5.�Synchromesh
Triple-band�synchromesh�units�are�used�in�1st�and�2nd�gears.�Single-band�synchromesh�units�are�in-
stalled�in�the�other�gears.�These�are�equipped�with�a�newly�developed�carbon�friction�lining�for�improv-
ing�gearshift�quality.
5.4.6.�Mating�dimensions
The�mating�dimensions�for�the�gearbox�mounting�have�been�adopted�from�established�series�appli-
cations.�In�this�way,�integration�in�the�vehicle�environment�has�been�significantly�simplified,�since�it�is
possible�to�fall�back�on�existing�peripherals.
36
F30�Powertrain
6.�Automatic�Transmission
The�F30�is�available�in�all�engine�versions�also�with�automatic�transmission.�The�established�GA8HP
8-speed�automatic�transmission�is�always�used.
6.1.�Designation
A�unique�designation�is�used�for�the�transmission�in�the�technical�documentation�so�it�can�be�clearly
identified.�In�frequent�cases,�however,�only�a�short�designation�is�used.�This�short�form�is�used�so�the
transmission�can�be�assigned�to�a�transmission�family.�The�GA8HP�transmission�family,�consisting�of
the�GA8HP45Z,�the�GA8HP70Z�and�the�GA8HP90Z�transmissions�for�example,�are�often�mentioned.
6.2.�Variants
Model Engine Transmission Torque�converter
BMW�328i N20B20O0 GA8HP45Z NW235ZDW
BMW�335i N55B30M0 GA8HP45Z NW235TDD
6.3.�GA8HP45Z�transmission
The�GA8HP�transmission�is�already�familiar�from�being�used�in�many�BMW�models.
There�is�also�a�Sport�Automatic�Transmission�option�available�2TB,�this�includes�shift�paddles�on�the
steering�wheel.
37
F30�Powertrain
6.�Automatic�Transmission
For�a�description�of�the�8-speed�automatic�transmission,�please�refer�to�the�"GA8HP�Automatic�Trans-
mission"�Training�information.
automatic�transmission�GA8HP
6.3.1.�Technical�data
GA8HP45Z
Maximum�power [kW] 250
Maximum�torque [Nm] 450
Maximum�permissible�torque,�1st�-�7th�gear [rpm] 7200
Maximum�permissible�torque,�8th�gear [rpm] 5700
Maximum�permissible�engine�speed,�reverse�gear [rpm] 3500
Transmission�ratio�1st�gear 4.714
Transmission�ratio�2nd�gear 3.143
Transmission�ratio�3rd�gear 2.106
Transmission�ratio�4th�gear 1.667
Transmission�ratio�5th�gear 1.285
Transmission�ratio�6th�gear 1.000
38
F30�Powertrain
6.�Automatic�Transmission
GA8HP45Z
Transmission�ratio�7th�gear 0.839
Transmission�ratio�8th�gear 0.667
Transmission�ratio�reverse�gear 3.295
39
F30�Powertrain
7.�Rear�Axle�Differential
The�rear�axle�differential�for�the�F30�is�a�further�development�of�the�low-friction�rear�axle�differential�al-
ready�familiar�from�the�E90�and�F25.
For�a�description�of�the�rear�axle�differential,�please�refer�to�the�following�Training�Manuals:
• "E90�Complete�Vehicle�Powertrain"�for�the�rear�axle�differential�HAG�168L
• "F25�Powertrain�Complete�Vehicle"�for�the�rear�axle�differential�HAG�188LW�and�the�rear�axle
differential�HAG�215�LW.
F30�rear�axle�differential�HAG�188LW
Special�features
• Reduced�transmission�losses
• Optimized�efficiency�(approx.�1%)�by
- The�use�of�lower-viscosity�oil
- Changing�the�material�used�for�the�radial�shaft�seals�on�the�powertrain
- Optimized�lubrication�of�the�pinion�bearing
- Crown�wheel�welded�to�expansion�tank�housing�(previously�screwed�on).
40
F30�Powertrain
7.�Rear�Axle�Differential
7.1.�Designation
Position Meaning Index Explanation
1�-�3 Type�of�transmission HAG Rear�axle�differential
4�-�6 Overall�size 168/188/215 Diameter�of�crown�wheel�pitch�circle
in�mm
7 Bearing�(internal) L Low-friction�bearing�(angular-contact
ball�bearing)
8 Optimization�stage W Efficiency-optimized
7.2.�Variants
Model Transmission Rear�axle�differen- Gear�ratio�i
tial
BMW�328i GS6-17BG HAG 188LW 3.91
BMW�328i GA8HP45Z HAG 188LW 3.15
BMW�335i GS6-45BZ HAG 215LW 3.23
BMW�335i GA8HP45Z HAG 188LW 3.15
41
F30�Powertrain
8.�Shafts
8.1.�Drive�shafts
A�variant�of�the�drive�shaft�that�is�adapted�to�the�torque�requests�is�available�for�each�engine-gearbox
configuration.
Focal�points�in�the�design�of�the�drive�shafts�in�the�were�the�torque�transfer�and�comfort�requirements
with�regard�to�acoustics�and�vibrations.
The�joints,�shaft�divisions�and�shaft�diameters�have�been�designed�to�prevent�disruptive�noises�or�vi-
brations�being�passed�on�to�the�connection�points�at�the�body.
To�minimize�the�high-frequency�tooth�meshing�noise�of�the�rear�axle�differential,�the�drive�shaft�for�en-
gines�with�a�torque�of�over�270 Nm�are�secured�to�the�rear�axle�differential�with�flexible�discs.�The�drive
shaft�is�always�secured�to�the�gearbox�or�automatic�transmission�using�flexible�discs.
Depending�on�the�engine/gearbox�configuration�the�steel�drive�shaft�is�available�in�different�lengths.�It
is�screwed�to�the�gearbox�or�automatic�transmission,�connected�to�the�rear�axle�differential.
42
F30�Powertrain
8.�Shafts
F30�drive�shaft
Index Explanation
1 Flexible�disc
2 Sliding�piece
3 Universal�joint
4 Crash�function
A Connection�to�rear�axle�differential
43
F30�Powertrain
8.�Shafts
8.1.1.�Variants
8.1.2.�Crash�function
In�the�event�of�a�head-on�collision,�the�drive�shaft�absorbs�a�portion�of�the�crash�energy.�The�occupant
load�is�thus�reduced�and�the�passive�safety�increased.
The�crash�function�integrated�in�the�front�drive�shaft�pipe�has�been�optimized.�The�spring�force�at
which�the�front�drive�shaft�tube�selectively�deforms�has�once�again�been�reduced.�The�torque�transfer
capability�has�remained�unchanged.
8.2.�Rear�axle�output�shafts
The�output�shafts�for�the�F30�are�designed�as�a�full-length�shafts�and�have�different�overall�lengths�on
account�of�the�rear�axle�differential�being�positioned�on�the�left�and�right�sides.�The�joints�to�the�rear
axle�differential�and�on�the�wheel�side�are�designed�as�journals�and�are�mounted�by�connection.
F30�rear�drive�shaft
8.2.1.�Variants
44
Bayerische�Motorenwerke�Aktiengesellschaft
Händlerqualifizierung�und�Training
Röntgenstraße�7
85716�Unterschleißheim,�Germany
Technical�training.
Product�information.
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
BMW�Service
General�information
Symbols�used
The�following�symbol�is�used�in�this�document�to�facilitate�better�comprehension�or�to�draw�attention
to�very�important�information:
Contains�important�safety�information�and�information�that�needs�to�be�observed�strictly�in�order�to
guarantee�the�smooth�operation�of�the�system.
Information�status�and�national-market�versions
BMW�Group�vehicles�meet�the�requirements�of�the�highest�safety�and�quality�standards.�Changes�in
requirements�for�environmental�protection,�customer�benefits�and�design�render�necessary�continu-
ous�development�of�systems�and�components.�Consequently,�there�may�be�discrepancies�between
the�contents�of�this�document�and�the�vehicles�available�in�the�training�course.
This�document�basically�relates�to�the�European�version�of�left-hand�drive�vehicles.�Some�operating
elements�or�components�are�arranged�differently�in�right-hand�drive�vehicles�than�shown�in�the�graph-
ics�in�this�document.�Further�differences�may�arise�as�a�result�of�the�equipment�specification�in�specif-
ic�markets�or�countries.
Additional�sources�of�information
Further�information�on�the�individual�topics�can�be�found�in�the�following:
• Owner's�Handbook
• Integrated�Service�Technical�Application.
Contact:�[email protected]
©2011�BMW�AG,�Munich,�Germany
Reprints�of�this�publication�or�its�parts�require�the�written�approval�of�BMW�AG,�Munich
The�information�contained�in�this�document�forms�an�integral�part�of�the�technical�training�of�the�BMW
Group�and�is�intended�for�the�trainer�and�participants�in�the�seminar.�Refer�to�the�latest�relevant�infor-
mation�systems�of�the�BMW�Group�for�any�changes/additions�to�the�technical�data.
Information�status:�September�2011
VH-23/International�Technical�Training
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
Contents
1. Introduction............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 1
1.1. Models..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1
1.2. Driving�dynamics�and�comfort.......................................................................................................................................................... 1
1.3. Bus�overview................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 3
2. Models............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6
2.1. Comparison..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6
3. Chassis�and�Suspension................................................................................................................................................................................................ 7
3.1. Front�axle............................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 7
3.1.1. Technical�data............................................................................................................................................................................ 9
3.1.2. Notes�for�service...............................................................................................................................................................10
3.2. Rear�axle...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................11
3.2.1. Technical�data........................................................................................................................................................................14
3.2.2. Notes�for�Service............................................................................................................................................................. 14
3.3. Suspension/dampers................................................................................................................................................................................... 15
3.3.1. Basic�chassis�and�suspension.................................................................................................................... 15
3.3.2. M�Sports�suspension.............................................................................................................................................. 15
3.3.3. Adaptive�M�chassis�and�suspension.................................................................................................15
3.4. Wheels�and�Tires...............................................................................................................................................................................................16
3.4.1. Tire�Pressure�Monitor�TPMS........................................................................................................................16
4. Brakes............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 17
4.1. Service�brakes........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 17
4.2. Parking�brake............................................................................................................................................................................................................19
5. Steering...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 20
5.1. Electronic�Power�Steering�EPS.................................................................................................................................................. 20
5.1.1. System�overview............................................................................................................................................................... 21
5.1.2. System�wiring�diagram............................................................................................................................................23
5.1.3. Steering�angle�sensor.............................................................................................................................................. 24
5.2. Variable�sport�steering.............................................................................................................................................................................. 24
5.3. Steering�column................................................................................................................................................................................................ 26
5.3.1. Steering�column�adjustment......................................................................................................................... 26
6. Driving�Stability�Control............................................................................................................................................................................................. 27
6.1. Directions�of�action........................................................................................................................................................................................ 27
6.2. Integrated�Chassis�Management�(ICM)......................................................................................................................... 27
6.2.1. System�overview............................................................................................................................................................... 27
6.2.2. System�function................................................................................................................................................................. 28
6.3. Dynamic�Stability�Control�DSC................................................................................................................................................... 29
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
Contents
6.3.1. System�overview............................................................................................................................................................... 30
6.3.2. System�wiring�diagram............................................................................................................................................31
6.3.3. System�function................................................................................................................................................................. 32
6.4. Dynamic�Cruise�Control�DCC........................................................................................................................................................34
6.5. Electronic�Damper�Control�(EDC)........................................................................................................................................... 35
6.5.1. System�overview............................................................................................................................................................... 36
6.5.2. System�wiring�diagram............................................................................................................................................37
6.5.3. System�function................................................................................................................................................................. 38
6.5.4. Notes�for�Service............................................................................................................................................................. 39
6.6. Driving�experience�control�button...........................................................................................................................................39
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
1.�Introduction
1.1.�Models
The�F30�will�be�launched�on�the�market�in�the�following�models�in�February�2012:
• BMW�328i
• BMW�335i
1.2.�Driving�dynamics�and�comfort
F30�Chassis�and�suspension
Index Explanation
1 Suspension/dampers
2 Electronic�Power�Steering�EPS
3 Dynamic�Stability�Control�DSC
4 Five-link�rear�suspension
5 Damping�action
6 Suspension
1
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
1.�Introduction
Index Explanation
7 Parking�brake
8 Wheels
9 Brakes
10 Two-joint�spring�strut�front�axle�with�trailing�links
The�chassis�and�suspension�of�the�F30�is�a�further�development�based�on�the�E90.�The�front�axle�is
designed�as�a�double�pivot�spring�strut�axle.�A�further�improved�version�of�the�five-link�rear�axle�HA5
is�used�on�the�rear�axle.�The�chassis�and�suspension�system�takes�driving�dynamics�and�comfort�to�a
new�level.
2
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
1.�Introduction
1.3.�Bus�overview
F30�bus�overview
3
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
1.�Introduction
Index Explanation
1 Control�units�with�wake-up�authorization
2 Start-up�node�control�units�for�starting�and�synchronizing�the�FlexRay�bus
system
ACSM Advanced�Crash�Safety�Module
AMPT Top-HiFi�amplifier
COMBOX Combox�(Combox�emergency�call,�Multimedia�Combox)
CON Controller
D-CAN Diagnosis-on-Controller�Area�Network
DME Digital�Engine�Electronics�(DME)
DSC Dynamic�Stability�Control
DVDC DVD�changer
EGS Electronic�transmission�control
EKPS Electronic�fuel�pump�control
EPS Electromechanical�Power�Steering
Ethernet Cable-based�data�network�technology�for�local�data�networks
FEM Front�Electronic�Module
FLA High-beam�assistant
FlexRay Fast,�preset�and�fault-tolerant�bus�system�for�use�in�automotive�sector
FZD Roof�function�center
GWS Gear�selector�lever
HEADUNIT/CIC Headunit�(Car�Information�Computer�or�Basic�headunit)
ICM Integrated�Chassis�Management
IHKA Integrated�automatic�heating�/�air�conditioning
K-CAN Body�controller�area�network
K-CAN2 Body�controller�area�network�2
KAFAS Camera-based�driver�assistance�systems
KOMBI Instrument�cluster�(MOST�only�with�option 6WA)
MOST Media�Oriented�System�Transport
OBD On-board�diagnosis�(diagnostic�socket)
PDC Park�Distance�Control�(with�option�5DP,�parking�manoeuvring�assistant:
integrated�in�the�parking�manoeuvring�assistant�control�unit,�otherwise
integrated�in�the�Rear�Electronic�Module�control�unit)
PMA Parking�manoeuvring�assistant
PT-CAN Powertrain�controller�area�network
PT-CAN2 Powertrain�controller�area�network�2
RAD Radio
4
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
1.�Introduction
Index Explanation
REM Rear�Electronic�Module
REMA�LI Reversible�electromotive�automatic�reel,�left�(not�US)
REMA�RE Reversible�electromotive�automatic�reel,�right�(not�US)
SMFA Seat�module,�driver
SWW Lane�change�warning
TPMS Tire�Pressure�Monitoring�System
TRSVC Control�unit�for�all-round�vision�camera
VDM Vertical�Dynamics�Management
ZGM Central�gateway�module
The�FlexRay�is�shown�in�a�simplified�form�in�the�overview�of�the�bus�systems.�The�information�bulletin
"F30�General�vehicle�electrical�system"�contains�the�actual�physical�configuration�(topology).
5
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
2.�Models
2.1.�Comparison
The�following�table�compares�the�technical�data�of�the�chassis�and�suspension�in�the�F30�with�its�pre-
decessor�E90�using�the�example�of�the�BMW 328i�model.
6
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
3.�Chassis�and�Suspension
3.1.�Front�axle
Two-joint�spring�strut�front�axle�with�trailing�links�in�F30
Index Explanation
1 Swivel�bearing
2 Electronic�Power�Steering�EPS
3 Anti-roll�bar
4 Front�axle�support
5 Anti-roll�bar�link
6 Support�bearing
7
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
3.�Chassis�and�Suspension
Index Explanation
7 Wheel�hub
8 Spring�strut
9 Track�rod
10 Wishbone
11 Trailing�link
The�two-joint�spring�strut�front�axle�with�trailing�links�in�the�F30�represents�the�optimum�combination
of�driving�dynamics�and�ride�comfort.�The�load-bearing�function�of�the�steering�box�housing�achieves
an�extremely�high�degree�of�rigidity�with�the�lowest�possible�weight.
Compared�to�its�predecessor�in�the�E90,�the�front�axle�support�in�the�F30�must�satisfy�more�stringent
requirements.�A�second�crash�load�path�has�now�been�integrated�above�the�front�axle�support.�In�order
to�guarantee�optimum�crash�behavior,�a�high-strength�welded�steel�structure�has�been�used�instead�of
an�aluminium�front�axle�support.
Improved�acoustic�properties�and�maximum�rigidity�and�accompanying�increase�in�ride�comfort�can�be
achieved�with�a�small�installation�space.
Front�axle�of�F30�-�viewed�from�below
Index Explanation
1 High-strength�steel
2 Aluminium
8
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
3.�Chassis�and�Suspension
The�ball�joints�of�the�front�axle�have�been�friction-optimized.�This�has�made�it�possible�to�improve�the
response�characteristics.
Use�of�cast�aluminium�parts�(wishbones,�trailing�links)�and�aluminium�die-cast�parts�(swivel�bearings)
reduces�the�unsprung�masses.
The�Electronic�Power�Steering�EPS�(electromechanical�power�steering)�that�features�in�the�F30�makes
an�important�contribution�to�BMW�EfficientDynamics.
For�vehicles�with�an�adaptive�M�sports�suspension�(optional�equipment�2VF)�the�electronic�damper
control�EDC�is�also�integrated.
3.1.1.�Technical�data
Please�refer�to�the�latest�Technical�Data�for�alignment�specs.
For�servicing�a�camber�correction�is�possible�by�means�of�a�disconnected�swivel�bearing�available�in
the�spare�parts�service.
Two�versions�of�this�swivel�bearing�are�available:
• Version�1:�Camber�correction�–0° 30'
• Version�2:�camber�correction�0°�30'.
9
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
3.�Chassis�and�Suspension
3.1.2.�Notes�for�service
The�following�tables�show�when�front�wheel�alignment�is�necessary.
Component�replaced Wheel�alignment�required
Front�axle�support YES
Steering�box YES
Wishbone YES
Rubber�mount�for�wishbone YES
Trailing�link NO
Rubber�mount�for�trailing�link NO
Track�rod YES
Swivel�bearing YES
Wheel�bearing NO
Spring�strut NO
Coil�spring NO
Support�bearing NO
Screw�connection�unfastened Wheel�alignment�required
Front�axle�support�to�body NO
Steering�box�to�front�axle�support YES
Wishbone�to�front�axle�support YES
Wishbone�to�swivel�bearing NO
Trailing�link�to�front�axle�support NO
Trailing�link�to�swivel�bearing NO
Track�rod�to�steering�box NO
Track�rod�end�to�track�rod YES
Track�rod�end�to�swivel�bearing NO
Spring�strut�to�swivel�bearing NO
Support�bearing�to�body NO
Steering�shaft�to�steering�gear NO
Steering�column�to�steering�shaft NO
10
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
3.�Chassis�and�Suspension
3.2.�Rear�axle
F30�Five-link�rear�suspension
Index Explanation
1 Compression�strut
2 Wishbone
3 Damping�action
4 Anti-roll�bar
5 Rear�axle�support
6 Suspension
7 Camber�link
11
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
3.�Chassis�and�Suspension
Index Explanation
8 Wheel�hub
9 Wheel�carrier
10 Trailing�arm
11 Control�arm
12 Camber�link
In�the�F30�a�five-link�rear�axle�has�been�used.�HA5�This�is�based�on�the�predecessor�but�has�under-
gone�significant�further�development�and�has�been�implemented�as�a�steel�construction.
Elasto-kinematics�are�installed�in�the�five-link�rear�axle,�which�are�coordinated�specifically�to�the�F30.
The�precise�and�superior�wheel�control�in�all�driving�situations�has�a�large�spring�travel�range.
It�has�been�possible�to�resolve�the�conflicting�objectives�of�driving�dynamics�and�comfort�by:
• A�flexible�suspension�of�rear�axle�differential�at�rear�axle�support�and�a�flexible�bearing�of�rear
axle�support�at�body�(2x�flexible�bearing),�which�have�been�specifically�coordinated�to�the�F30
• Maximum�support�base�width�for�the�rear�axle�support
• Significant�increase�in�track�width�when�compared�to�E90
• Optimum�connection�of�body�suspension�and�damping.
F30�aerodynamic�covers
Index Explanation
1 Aerodynamic�covers
12
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
3.�Chassis�and�Suspension
Specific�aerodynamic�measures�improve�the�lift�coefficients�and�the�drag�coefficient�(Cd),�which�has
a�positive�impact�on�consumption�and�driving�dynamics.�Thus�aerodynamic�covers�made�of�fibre-
glass-reinforced�polyamide�has�been�fitted�to�the�camber�links�of�the�F30.
When�compared�to�the�E90�,�it�has�been�possible�to�increase�the�loading�width�of�the�luggage�com-
partment�and�leg�room�in�the�rear�passenger�compartment.
F30�shock�absorber,�rear�axle
Index Explanation
1 Support�bearing�with�multiple�load�path
13
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
3.�Chassis�and�Suspension
The�shock�absorber�design�of�the�F30�and�E90�are�different.�In�the�F30,�firstly�the�pivot�point�of�the
shock�absorber�to�the�camber�link�was�modified,�and�secondly�no�more�work�is�necessary�in�the�lug-
gage�compartment�for�dismantling�the�shock�absorber.
The�support�bearing�with�single�load�path�for�the�shock�absorber�in�the�E90�is�screwed�to�the�body
from�the�inside.�The�support�bearing�in�the�F30�is�a�multiple-path�version�and�is�fastened�to�the�body
from�the�outside.
3.2.1.�Technical�data
Please�refer�to�the�latest�Technical�Data�for�alignment�specs.
3.2.2.�Notes�for�Service
The�following�tables�show�when�rear�wheel�alignment�is�necessary.
Component�replaced Wheel�alignment�required
Rear�axle�support YES
Rubber�mount�for�rear�axle�support NO
Wheel�carrier YES
Ball�joint�and�rubber�mount�in�wheel�carrier YES
Control�arm NO
Trailing�arm NO
Wishbone YES
Camber�link YES
Camber�link YES
Wheel�bearing NO
Shock�absorber NO
Coil�spring NO
Support�bearing NO
Screw�connection�unfastened Wheel�alignment�required
Rear�axle�support�to�body NO
Compression�strut�to�body NO
Control�arm�to�rear�suspension�subframe NO
Control�arm�to�hub�carrier NO
14
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
3.�Chassis�and�Suspension
Screw�connection�unfastened Wheel�alignment�required
Trailing�arm�to�rear�axle�support NO
Trailing�arm�to�wheel�carrier NO
Wishbone�to�rear�axle�support YES
Wishbone�to�wheel�carrier NO
Camber�link�to�rear�axle�support YES
Camber�link�to�wheel�carrier YES
Camber�link�to�rear�axle�support YES
Camber�link�to�wheel�carrier YES
Support�bearing�to�body NO
3.3.�Suspension/dampers
3.3.1.�Basic�chassis�and�suspension
Steel�springs�are�mounted�to�the�front�and�rear�axle�of�the�F30.
Damping�is�provided�by�conventional�shock�absorbers�as�standard.�Spring�struts�are�installed�at�the
front�axle�and�springs�and�dampers�are�arranged�separately�at�the�rear�axle.
3.3.2.�M�Sports�suspension
Vehicles�with�M�Sports�suspension�(optional�equipment�704)�have�a�tighter�spring/damper�design�and
are�positioned�10�mm�lower.
3.3.3.�Adaptive�M�chassis�and�suspension
Vehicles�with�an�adaptive�M�sports�suspension�(optional�equipment�2VF)�are�also�positioned�10�mm
lower.
In�addition,�the�electronic�damper�control�EDC�is�integrated.�Here�four�continuously�adjustable�shock
absorbers�with�coupled�rebound/compression�stage�adjustment�produce�damping�forces�according�to
requirements.�The�shock�absorbers�can�automatically�assume�a�harder�setting�(more�dynamic/sporty)
or�softer�(more�comfortable)�setting,�depending�on�the�driving�manoeuvre.
For�more�information�on�the�EDC�refer�to�Chapter�"Electronic�Damper�Control�(EDC)".
15
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
3.�Chassis�and�Suspension
3.4.�Wheels�and�Tires
The�standard�Tire�sizes�are�listed�in�the�following�tables.
Run-flat�tires�on�the�F30�are�standard�equipment.
3.4.1.�Tire�Pressure�Monitor�TPMS
The�F30�is�equipped�with�the�latest�generation�of�the�TPMS�(Tire�pressure�control).
For�further�information�on�the�TPMS,�please�refer�to�the�Training�Material�"F25�Chassis�and�Suspen-
sion".
16
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
4.�Brakes
F30�Brake�system
Index Explanation
1 Brake�fluid�expansion�tank
2 Brake�servo
3 Parking�brake
4 Brake�caliper
5 Brake�pedal
6 Dynamic�Stability�Control�DSC
7 Brake�disc
4.1.�Service�brakes
The�F30�features�a�hydraulic�2-circuit�brake�system�with�“front/rear�split”.�One�brake�circuit�is�intended
for�both�the�front�and�rear�axle.
The�familiar�brake�pad�wear�monitoring�function�for�the�Condition�Based�Service�display�continues�to
be�used.�Single-stage�brake�pad�wear�sensors�are�installed�on�the�front�left�and�rear�right�wheel�brakes
for�this�purpose.
17
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
4.�Brakes
F30�level�sensor�for�brake�fluid
The�brake�fluid�level�sensor�in�the�F30�is�no�longer�integrated�into�the�lid�of�the�tank�and�is�instead�in-
serted�into�the�tank�itself.
The�brake�disc�dimensions�for�the�F30�are�listed�in�the�following�table.
For�all�engine�versions,�internally�ventilated,�coated�brake�discs�are�used�on�both�axles.�In�the
BMW 335i�lightweight�brake�discs�with�an�aluminium�brake�disc�chamber�are�installed�as�standard.
In�the�F30�twor�brake�caliper�variants�are�used�on�the�front�axle�and�two�on�the�rear�axle�depending�on
the�model:
Brake�caliper,�front�axle Models
Single-piston�floating�caliper,�piston��57 mm,�aluminium BMW�328i
Four-piston�fixed�caliper,�piston��40 mm,�aluminium BMW�335i
Brake�caliper,�rear�axle Models
Single-piston�floating�caliper,�piston��42 mm,�cast�iron BMW�328i
Single-piston�floating�caliper,�piston��42 mm,�cast�iron BMW�335i
18
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
4.�Brakes
4.2.�Parking�brake
The�parking�brake�is�designed�as�a�duo-servo�parking�brake�with�the�following�dimensions:
• 185 x 20 mm�for�BMW�328i�and�335i.
19
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
5.�Steering
5.1.�Electronic�Power�Steering�EPS
The�F30�features�Electronic�Power�Steering�EPS�(electromechanical�power�steering)�which�replaces
the�conventional�hydraulic�steering.
When�compared�to�hydraulic�steering,�with�EPS�the�power�assist�is�applied�to�the�rack�via�an�electric
motor�and�a�reduction�gear.
Steering�gear�of�EPS�in�F30
Index Explanation
1 Reduction�gear
2 Steering-torque�sensor
3 Track�rod
4 EPS�control�unit
5 Electric�motor�with�rotor�position�sensor
Thanks�to�the�supply�of�condition-based�power,�the�average�fuel�consumption�has�been�reduced�by
approx.�3%�compared�to�conventional�hydraulic�power�steering.�This�helps�reduce�carbon�dioxide
emissions.
As�there�is�no�oil�in�an�EPS�system,�it�is�more�environmentally�friendly�and�easier�to�service�than�a�con-
ventional�hydraulic�power�steering�system.
Owing�to�the�compact�design�of�the�steering�gear�with�integrated�electric�motor�and�control�electron-
ics,�the�installation�and�maintenance�overheads�are�considerably�less�than�a�conventional�hydraulic
power�steering�system.
With�EPS,�both�the�steering�servo�(steering�force)�and�return�can�be�freely�balanced.�Steerability�and
drivability�can�therefore�be�adapted�optimally�to�the�relevant�driving�situation�(e.g.�when�driving�in�built-
up�areas�or�on�the�highway).
20
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
5.�Steering
Servotronic�is�installed�as�standard�equipment�on�the�F30.�The�Servotronic�controls�the�steering�servo
subject�to�the�vehicle�speed.�Two�different�settings�(“Normal”�and�“Sporty”)�can�be�accessed�via�the
driving�experience�switch.
Active�steering�is�not�available�for�the�F30,�"Variable�sports�steering"�(SA�2VL)�is�instead�available�as
optional�equipment.
The�EPS�a�prerequisite�for�implementation�of�the�Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant�PMA.
Depending�on�the�F30�options�two�variants�of�steering�gear�are�used:
• EPS�basic�steering�gear�for�BMW�328i�and�335i.
With�this�steering�gear�the�housing�and�the�mechanics�are�designed�for�higher�axle�loads.�The
electrical�motor�is�enhanced�and�the�engine�shortened.
Manufacturer:�ThyssenKrupp.
• EPS�for�variable�sport�steering�(optional�equipment 2VL).
In�terms�of�the�housing,�this�steering�gear�corresponds�to�the�mechanics�and�the�engine�of�the
EPS�for�BMW�328i�and�335i.�However,�the�electric�motor�is�designed�for�the�higher�dynamics
of�sport�steering.�In�addition,�a�rack�with�variable�ratio�is�installed.
Manufacturer:�ThyssenKrupp.
5.1.1.�System�overview
Steering�components�of�EPS�in�F30
21
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
5.�Steering
Index Explanation
1 Electronic�Power�Steering�EPS
2 Steering�column
3 Steering�wheel
22
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
5.�Steering
5.1.2.�System�wiring�diagram
System�wiring�diagram�of�EPS�in�F30
23
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
5.�Steering
Index Explanation
1 Dynamic�Stability�Control�DSC
2 Digital�Engine�Electronics�(DME)�or�Digital�Diesel�Electronics�(DDE)�(not�US)
3 Electronic�Power�Steering�EPS
4 Power�distribution�box,�front
5 Power�distribution�box,�engine�compartment
6 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
7 Integrated�Chassis�Management�(ICM)
8 Steering�column�switch�cluster�(SZL)
9 Instrument�cluster�(KOMBI)
Kl.15N Ignition�(after-run)
Terminal�30 Terminal�30
5.1.3.�Steering�angle�sensor
The�information�on�the�steering�angle�in�the�F30�is�not�recorded�by�the�Electronic�Power�Steering�EPS
via�a�separate�sensor�on�the�steering�wheel�and�instead�is�computed�based�on�the�angle�of�the�EPS
motor�position�in�relation�to�the�steering�wheel.
The�EPS�transmits�the�position�of�the�rack�to�the�ICM�control�unit�via�FlexRay.�During�this�process,
the�EPS�calculates�the�absolute�position�of�the�rack�based�on�the�current�rotor�position�of�the�EPS
motor�and�the�number�of�complete�revolutions�performed�by�the�rotor�starting�from�the�zero�position
(straight-ahead�driving�position).
Taking�this�position�as�the�starting�point,�the�ICM�control�unit�determines�the�wheel-specific�steering
angle�among�other�things�using�the�stored�ratio�parameters�(rack�to�wheel-specific�steering�angle)�and
transmits�this�via�FlexRay.�This�wheel-specific�steering�angle�is�used�by�the�DSC�among�other�things
as�a�reference�variable�for�internal�control�functions.
In�cases�where�the�absolute�value�is�not�available�from�the�EPS�(loss�of�Terminal�30,�flash�process),�the
absolute�value�is�determined�through�interaction�between�the�ICM�and�EPS�using�a�teaching�function
in�which�the�steering�wheel�is�turned�from�end�stop�to�end�stop�(e.g.�straight-ahead�position�->�left�->
right�->�straight-ahead�position).
5.2.�Variable�sport�steering
The�"Variable�sport�steering"�(optional�equipment�2VL)�is�available�for�the�F30�as�an�alternative�to�the
basic�version�of�EPS.�This�is�the�first�steering�system�on�the�market�to�combine�the�benefits�of�an�ex-
tremely�direct,�variable�steering�gear�ratio�and�the�operating�principle�of�EPS.
The�variable�sport�steering�increases�both�ride�comfort�and�agility.�The�direct�ratio�reduces�the�over-
all�steering�angle,�i.e.�the�number�of�turns�of�the�steering�wheel�required�to�turn�from�one�steering�stop
to�the�other,�by�roughly�25%.�This�therefore�helps�manoeuvres�that�require�a�larger�steering�angle,�e.g.
parking,�turning�off�or�turning�round,�to�be�carried�out�more�comfortably.
24
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
5.�Steering
The�more�direct�steering�gear�ratio�when�compared�to�the�basic�version�of�the�EPS�and�the�reduced
steering�angle�which�is�required�as�a�result�achieves�a�more�direct�vehicle�response�and�higher�agility.
This�comes�in�handy�during�avoidance�manoeuvres�for�example.
The�variable�steering�gear�ratio�is�implemented�through�the�stroke-dependent�gear�geometry�of�the
rack.�Around�the�center�position�of�the�steering�gear,�the�steering�system�behaves�accurately�with
steady�directional�stability.�As�the�steering�angle�moves�away�from�the�center�position,�the�ratio�be-
comes�increasingly�more�direct.
Comparison�between�steering�gear�ratio�of�basic�EPS�version�and�variable�sport�steering�for�F30
Index Explanation
1 Rack�in�basic�version�of�EPS�(constant�gear�geometry)
2 Variable�sport�steering�rack�(variable�gear�geometry)
A More�indirect�steering�gear�ratio�(variable�sport�steering)
B More�direct�steering�gear�ratio�(variable�sport�steering)
x Steering�angle
y Rack�stroke
25
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
5.�Steering
5.3.�Steering�column
Thanks�to�an�integrated�crash�system,�in�the�event�of�an�accident�the�steering�column�can�dissipate
additional�energy�through�specific�deformation.
5.3.1.�Steering�column�adjustment
The�steering�column�of�the�F30�can�be�adjusted�mechanically;�a�forward/back�adjustment�of�60�mm
and�height�adjustment�of�40�mm�is�possible.�This�allows�optimum�ergonomic�positioning�of�the�driver.
26
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
6.�Driving�Stability�Control
6.1.�Directions�of�action
Driving�stability�control�systems�can�be�differentiated�in�terms�of�their�basic�effective�directions.�They
can�act�along�as�well�as�around�an�axis�of�the�vehicle's�fixed�X,�Y�or�Z�coordinate�system.
6.2.�Integrated�Chassis�Management�(ICM)
6.2.1.�System�overview
F30�ICM�control�unit
27
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
6.�Driving�Stability�Control
Index Explanation
1 ICM�control�unit
6.2.2.�System�function
The�Integrated�Chassis�Management�ICM�coordinates,�as�monitoring�system�so�to�speak,�all�driving
stability�control�systems�and�vehicle�control�systems.�The�advantage�of�this�structure�is�that�the�in-
dividual�systems�can�continue�processing�their�immediate�functions�rapidly�and�also�independently.
As�the�higher-level�central�control�system,�the�ICM�monitors�and�coordinates�interventions�and�sends
instructions�to�intelligent�actuators.�This�allows�braking,�steering�or�torque�interventions�to�be�per-
formed,�for�example.
Influence�of�ICM�control�unit�on�driving�stability�control
• Driving�dynamics�control�FDR
The�driver�can�activate�and�deactivate�the�driving�dynamics�control�(FDR)�via�the�DTC�but-
ton�or�the�driving�experience�switch.�The�function�mode�is�displayed�in�the�instrument�cluster
KOMBI.
The�ICM�control�unit�evaluates�the�DTC�button�and�driving�experience�switch�as�well�as�the
switching�logic,�as�well�as�communication�between�the�various�systems�involved�(including
DSC).�Furthermore,�the�ICM�control�unit�includes�system�monitoring�of�partner�functions
which�switches�back�to�normal�mode�(DSC�ON)�if�one�of�the�functions�being�monitored�drops
out.
• Dynamic�Cruise�Control�DCC
Dynamic�Cruise�Control�DCC�is�a�road�speed�controller�with�braking�intervention.�The�DCC
function�in�the�ICM�control�unit�acts�on�the�powertrain�and�brake�via�corresponding�interfaces.
In�addition,�interfaces�exist�with�display�and�operating�elements�and�the�driving�dynamics�sen-
sor�systems.
Further�information�on�the�DCC�can�be�found�in�the�chapter�entitled�"Dynamic�Cruise�Control
DCC".
• Active�cruise�control�with�Stop&Go�function�(optional�equipment�5DF)�Not�at�start�of
production.
The�active�cruise�control�with�Stop&Go�function�(ACC�Stop & Go)�is�a�speed�regulator�with�a
distance�regulator�function.�The�"ACC�Stop�&�Go"�function�in�the�ICM�control�unit�acts�on�the
powertrain�and�brake�via�corresponding�interfaces.�In�addition,�interfaces�exist�with�display�and
operating�elements�and�the�driving�dynamics�sensor�systems.
Sensor�system
As�the�central�element,�the�ICM�control�unit�incorporates�the�driving�dynamics�sensors�and�central
airbag�sensor�system.�It�is�installed�near�the�vehicle's�center�of�gravity�via�a�holder�on�the�center�con-
sole.
28
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
6.�Driving�Stability�Control
Function Vehicles Vehicles
without�EDC with�EDC
Lateral�acceleration
Vertical�acceleration –
Yaw�rate –
Pitch�rate –
Yaw�rate
The�following�signals�are�calculated�from�this�and�made�available�to�the�DSC�via�FlexRay:
• Yaw�rate
• Lateral�acceleration
• Longitudinal�acceleration
• Steering�angle.
6.3.�Dynamic�Stability�Control�DSC
The�Dynamic�Stability�Control�DSC�forms�the�core�of�the�vehicle�control�systems�that�enhance�active
safety.�It�optimizes�driving�stability�in�all�driving�conditions�and�also�traction�when�driving�off�and�ac-
celerating.�Furthermore,�it�identifies�unstable�driving�conditions�such�as�understeering�or�oversteering
and�helps�maintain�the�vehicle�on�a�steady�course.
In�the�F30�two�variants�of�the�DSC�are�used.�In�the�basic�version�the�hydraulic�unit�has�an�internal�pres-
sure�sensor�and�a�double�piston�pump.�For�vehicles�with�active�cruise�control�with�Stop&Go�function
(optional�equipment 5DF)�“Not�at�start�of�production”�a�version�with�two�additional�pressure�sensors�is
installed.
The�ultra�sensitive�sensors�of�the�F30�record�the�current�driving�condition�permanently.�The�informa-
tion�comes�for�example�from�the�wheel�speed,�steering�angle,�lateral�acceleration,�longitudinal�acceler-
ation,�pressure�and�yaw�sensors�(detect�rotation�on�the�vehicle's�vertical�axis).�The�single-track�mod-
el�calculated�by�the�DSC�control�unit�serves�as�the�basic�variable�for�control�interventions�in�the�DSC.
During�this�process,�the�relevant�driver�input�(steering�wheel�angle�and�vehicle�speed),�in�other�words
"the�desired�state",�and�the�vehicle�sensor�data,�in�other�words�"the�actual�state",�are�compared.
If�the�calculated�desired�state�and�measured�actual�state�do�not�correspond,�stabilizing�or�traction-en-
hancing�measures�are�introduced�once�defined�tolerances�have�been�exceeded.�Driving�stability�can
once�again�be�ensured�or�a�traction�requirement�can�be�implemented�by�selectively�reducing�or�in-
creasing�the�engine�torque�(with�active�engine�drag�torque�control)�or�through�wheel-specific�brake�in-
tervention.
29
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
6.�Driving�Stability�Control
6.3.1.�System�overview
System�overview�of�DSC�in�F30
Index Explanation
1 Dynamic�Stability�Control�(DSC)
2 Driving�experience�control�button
3 Integrated�Chassis�Management�(ICM)
30
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
6.�Driving�Stability�Control
6.3.2.�System�wiring�diagram
System�wiring�diagram�of�DSC�in�F30
31
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
6.�Driving�Stability�Control
Index Explanation
1 Wheel-speed�sensor,�front�left
2 Brake�fluid�level�switch
3 Digital�Engine�Electronics�(DME)�or�Digital�Diesel�Electronics�(DDE)�(not�US)
4 Power�distribution�box,�engine�compartment
5 Power�distribution�box,�front
6 Wheel-speed�sensor,�front�right
7 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
8 Wheel�speed�sensor,�rear�right
9 Brake�pad�wear�sensor,�rear�right
10 Wheel�speed�sensor,�rear�left
11 Operating�facility,�center�console
12 Parking�brake�switch
13 Integrated�Chassis�Management�(ICM)
14 Brake�light�switch
15 Steering�column�switch�cluster�(SZL)
16 Instrument�cluster�(KOMBI)
17 Dynamic�Stability�Control�(DSC)
18 Brake�pad�wear�sensor,�front�right
Terminal�15WUP Wake-up�with�terminal�15�ON
Terminal�30 Terminal�30
Terminal�30B Terminal�30�basic�operation
6.3.3.�System�function
32
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
6.�Driving�Stability�Control
Function Subfunction Designation
BMR Braking�torque�control
DSC Dynamic�Stability�Control
DTC Dynamic�Traction�Control
The�DSC�can�be�operated�in�three�modes:
• DSC�ON
• Dynamic�traction�control,�DTC
• DSC�OFF.
F30�DTC�button
Index Explanation
1 DTC�button
33
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
6.�Driving�Stability�Control
Function DSC DTC DSC
ON OFF
Automatic�Differential�Brake�ADB – –
Driving�dynamics�control�FDR X –
Brake�standby
Dry�by�applying�brake
Drive-off�assistant
Fading�Brake�Support
Dynamic�Braking�Control�DBC
Run�Flat�Indicator�RPA
Condition�Based�Services�CBS
Post�Crash
Symbol Explanation
Function�active
– Function�inactive
X Function�with�modified�control�thresholds
Adopting�a�suitably�adapted�driving�style�always�remains�the�responsibility�of�the�driver.
Not�even�DSC�can�overcome�the�laws�of�physics.
The�additional�safety�features�afforded�by�the�system�should�not�be�diminished�by�risky�driving.
6.4.�Dynamic�Cruise�Control�DCC
Dynamic�Cruise�Control�DCC�is�a�cruise�control�with�comfortable�brake�intervention.�DCC�keeps�the
chosen�speed�constant�above�speeds�of�roughly�30�km/h�-�when�compared�to�conventional�cruise
control�with�the�following�additional�functions:
• Active�brake�intervention�-�if�the�engine�drag�torque�is�insufficient�in�coasting�(overrun)
mode�to�maintain�the�chosen�speed,�the�vehicle�is�decelerated�automatically�through�addition-
al�controlled�brake�intervention.
• Curve�Speed�Limiter�(CSL)�-�Depending�on�the�actual�lateral�acceleration,�the�driving�speed
is�reduced�during�controlled�cornering�as�necessary.�When�coming�out�of�the�bend�the�speed
is�adjusted�until�it�once�again�reaches�the�desired�level.
34
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
6.�Driving�Stability�Control
• Comfort�Dynamic�System�(CDS)�-�Referred�to�as�"Hand-controlled�acceleration�mode",�this
feature�allows�the�driver�to�accelerate�or�decelerate�continuously�via�an�operating�element�on
the�steering�wheel�in�two�dynamic�stages�respectively.�The�driver�can�thus�accelerate�or�de-
celerate�in�the�traffic�flow�without�having�to�estimate�the�target�speed�beforehand.
• Adapted�downhill�driving�–�Maintaining�the�desired�speed�during�controlled�downhill�driv-
ing�is�effected�by�overrun�fuel�cutoff�and�adapted�gear�downshifting.�The�wheel�brakes�are�re-
lieved�and�the�fuel�consumption�reduced.�With�the�DSC�braking�control�system,�correspond-
ing�measures�are�applied�via�a�substitute�temperature�model�to�compensate�for�leaks�and
distribute�torque�between�the�front�and�rear�axle.�This�means�that�any�leaks�that�occur�in�the
braking�control�circuit�can�be�counteracted.
The�desired/resume�speed�is�indicated�in�the�instrument�cluster�KOMBI�by�a�mark�that�moves�round
the�speed�reading.�Depending�on�the�system�status�the�marking�illuminates�in�green�(active)�or�orange
(system�interrupted).
If�the�desired�speed�is�adjusted,�or�when�the�DCC�function�is�activated,�the�updated�digital�value�ap-
pears�briefly�in�the�display�as�acknowledgement�for�the�driver.
6.5.�Electronic�Damper�Control�(EDC)
For�vehicles�with�an�adaptive�M�sports�suspension�(optional�equipment�2VF)�the�electronic�damper
control�EDC�is�used.�Here�four�continuously�adjustable�shock�absorbers�with�coupled�rebound/com-
pression�stage�adjustment�produce�damping�forces�according�to�requirements.�The�shock�absorbers
can�automatically�assume�a�harder�setting�(more�dynamic/sporty)�or�softer�(more�comfortable)�setting,
depending�on�the�driving�manoeuvre.
35
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
6.�Driving�Stability�Control
6.5.1.�System�overview
System�overview�of�EDC�in�F30
Index Explanation
1 Electronic�adjustable�damper,�rear
2 Driving�experience�control�button
3 Electronic�adjustable�damper,�front
4 VDM�control�unit
5 Electromagnetic�adjusting�valve
6 Wheel�acceleration�sensor
36
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
6.�Driving�Stability�Control
6.5.2.�System�wiring�diagram
System�wiring�diagram�of�EDC�in�F30
37
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
6.�Driving�Stability�Control
Index Explanation
1 Vertical�wheel�acceleration�sensor,�front�left
2 Electromagnetic�adjusting�valve,�front�left
3 Dynamic�Stability�Control�DSC
4 Electromagnetic�adjusting�valve,�front�right
5 Vertical�wheel�acceleration�sensor,�front�right
6 Power�distribution�box,�luggage�compartment
7 Electromagnetic�adjusting�valve,�rear�right
8 Vertical�Dynamics�Management�(VDM)
9 Electromagnetic�adjusting�valve,�rear�left
10 Integrated�Chassis�Management�(ICM)
11 Driving�experience�control�button
12 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
Terminal�30 Terminal�30
Terminal�15N Ignition�(after-run)
6.5.3.�System�function
The�Electronic�Damper�Control�EDC�is�a�variable,�electronically�controlled�shock�absorber�adjustment
system�that�controls�the�vertical�dynamics.�The�EDC�adapts�the�damping�forces�of�the�shock�absorber
more�or�less�instantly�to�the�changing�road�or�driving�conditions.
The�Electronic�Damper�Control�(EDC)�comes�with�the�optional�equipment�SA�2VF�"Adaptive�M�sports
suspension".
The�EDC�consists�of:
• Four�continuously�adjustable�shock�absorbers�with�coupled�rebound/compression�stage�ad-
justment
• The�VDM�control�unit
• Two�wheel�acceleration�sensors�on�the�front�axle�to�determine�the�wheel�movement
• Sensor�cluster�integrated�into�the�ICM�control�unit�which�determines�the�body�movements
(pitch,�vertical,�roll).
The�sensors�in�the�vehicle�permanently�measure:
• The�body�and�wheel�acceleration
• The�current�lateral�and�longitudinal�acceleration
• The�vehicle�speed
• The�steering�wheel�position.
38
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
6.�Driving�Stability�Control
Based�on�this�measured�data,�the�VDM�control�unit�calculates�the�control�commands�to�be�sent�to�the
electromagnetic�valves�in�the�shock�absorbers�for�each�individual�wheel�according�to�the�road�profile
and�driving�situation.�This�means�that�the�damping�forces�will�always�be�applied�according�to�require-
ments.
This�improves�ride�comfort�and�also�increases�driving�dynamics.
This�improves�the�vehicle's:
• Suitability�for�long-distance�journeys
• Enhanced�body�stability�and�agility
• Improves�driving�safety�by�minimizing�wheel�load�fluctuations�and�reducing�the�stopping�dis-
tance.
The�driver�can�choose�between�the�more�comfortable�or�more�sporty�aspect�of�the�vehicle's�character
via�the�driving�experience�switch.
6.5.4.�Notes�for�Service
Separate�lines�are�still�used�between�the�dampers,�including�the�sensors�at�the�front�axle�and�wiring
harness.�These�are�not�shown�in�the�system�wiring�diagram�and�can�be�replaced�individually�when�car-
rying�out�repairs.
6.6.�Driving�experience�control�button
F30�driving�experience�control�button
39
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
6.�Driving�Stability�Control
Index Explanation
1 Driving�experience�control�button
The�F30�features�the�driving�experience�switch�in�the�center�console�operating�facility�as�standard.
The�driver�can�use�the�driving�experience�control�button�to�select�different�programs�which�alter�vari-
ous�properties�of�the�vehicle�depending�on�the�vehicle's�equipment�specification.�The�following�pro-
grams�are�available:
• SPORT+
Only�in�connection�with�at�least�one�of�the�following�optional�equipment:
- Sport�Automatic�transmission�(optional�equipment�2TB)
- Variable�sport�steering�(optional�equipment�2VL)
- Adaptive�M�sports�suspension�(optional�equipment�2VF)�or
- BMW�Sport�Line�(PA�7AC)
• SPORT
• COMFORT
• ECO�PRO.
The�Sports�mode�can�be�adapted�by�means�of�the�Controller.�It�is�possible�to�specify�whether�the
Sports�mode�applies�only�to�the�chassis�and�suspension,�only�to�the�powertrain,�or�both.
ECO�PRO�supports�a�consumption-friendly�driving�style.�In�this�regard,�the�engine�control�and�con-
venience�functions�such�as�air-conditioning/heating�are�adapted.�In�addition,�situation-dependent
information�can�be�shown�which�helps�consumption-optimized�driving.�The�extension�of�the�range
achieved�can�be�shown�in�the�instrument�cluster.
Further�information�on�ECO�PRO�can�be�found�in�the�training�information�"F30 Display�and�Operating
Elements".
40
Bayerische�Motorenwerke�Aktiengesellschaft
Händlerqualifizierung�und�Training
Röntgenstraße�7
85716�Unterschleißheim,�Germany
Technical�training.
Product�information.
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
BMW�Service
General�information
Symbols�used
The�following�symbol�is�used�in�this�document�to�facilitate�better�comprehension�or�to�draw�attention
to�very�important�information:
Contains�important�safety�information�and�information�that�needs�to�be�observed�strictly�in�order�to
guarantee�the�smooth�operation�of�the�system.
Information�status�and�national-market�versions
BMW�Group�vehicles�meet�the�requirements�of�the�highest�safety�and�quality�standards.�Changes
in�requirements�for�environmental�protection,�customer�benefits�and�design�render�necessary
continuous�development�of�systems�and�components.�Consequently,�there�may�be�discrepancies
between�the�contents�of�this�document�and�the�vehicles�available�in�the�training�course.
This�document�basically�relates�to�the�European�version�of�left-hand�drive�vehicles.�Some�operating
elements�or�components�are�arranged�differently�in�right-hand�drive�vehicles�than�shown�in�the
graphics�in�this�document.�Further�differences�may�arise�as�a�result�of�the�equipment�specification�in
specific�markets�or�countries.
Additional�sources�of�information
Further�information�on�the�individual�topics�can�be�found�in�the�following:
• Owner's�Handbook
• Integrated�Service�Technical�Application.
Contact:�[email protected]
©2011�BMW�AG,�Munich,�Germany
Reprints�of�this�publication�or�its�parts�require�the�written�approval�of�BMW�AG,�Munich
The�information�contained�in�this�document�forms�an�integral�part�of�the�technical�training�of�the
BMW�Group�and�is�intended�for�the�trainer�and�participants�in�the�seminar.�Refer�to�the�latest�relevant
information�systems�of�the�BMW�Group�for�any�changes/additions�to�the�technical�data.
Information�status:�September�2011
BV-72/Technical�Training
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
Contents
1. Introduction............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 1
2. Vehicle�Electrical�System............................................................................................................................................................................................. 2
2.1. Control�units.................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 2
2.2. Bus�overview................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 4
2.3. OBD�II�diagnostic�access..........................................................................................................................................................................8
3. Voltage�Supply� ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 9
3.1. System�wiring�diagram................................................................................................................................................................................. 9
3.2. Components.............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10
3.2.1. Battery............................................................................................................................................................................................... 12
3.2.2. Wiring�harness......................................................................................................................................................................13
3.2.3. Power�distribution�boxes......................................................................................................................................13
3.3. Stabilization�of�the�vehicle�electrical�system......................................................................................................... 15
3.4. Energy�management.................................................................................................................................................................................... 15
3.4.1. Charge�state�indicator.............................................................................................................................................. 15
3.4.2. Influence�of�steering�power............................................................................................................................. 15
3.4.3. Power�distribution�box,�front.......................................................................................................................... 15
3.5. Supply�to�EPS........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 16
3.5.1. System�wiring�diagram............................................................................................................................................17
3.6. Battery�Guard...........................................................................................................................................................................................................18
4. Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)......................................................................................................................................................................19
4.1. Central�gateway�module�(ZGM)..................................................................................................................................................22
4.2. Control�unit�replacement...................................................................................................................................................................... 22
5. Rear�Electronic�Module�(REM)........................................................................................................................................................................23
6. CAS�Functions.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 25
6.1. System�wiring�diagram............................................................................................................................................................................. 26
6.2. Overview�of�functions.................................................................................................................................................................................29
7. Comfort�Access.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 31
7.1. System�wiring�diagram............................................................................................................................................................................. 32
7.2. Hands-free�trunk�lid�opening..........................................................................................................................................................35
7.2.1. System�wiring�diagram............................................................................................................................................35
7.2.2. Functional�description..............................................................................................................................................36
8. Central�Locking�System.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 39
8.1. System�wiring�diagram............................................................................................................................................................................. 39
9. Power�Window�Regulators..................................................................................................................................................................................... 43
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
Contents
9.1. System�wiring�diagram............................................................................................................................................................................. 43
10. Exterior�Mirrors............................................................................................................................................................................................................................46
10.1. System�wiring�diagram............................................................................................................................................................................. 46
11. Glass�Slide/Tilt�Sunroof.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 49
11.1. System�wiring�diagram............................................................................................................................................................................. 49
12. Alarm�System.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 51
12.1. System�wiring�diagram............................................................................................................................................................................. 52
13. Exterior�Lights............................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 54
13.1. System�wiring�diagram............................................................................................................................................................................. 55
13.2. Adaptive�headlights....................................................................................................................................................................................... 60
13.2.1. Function.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 61
13.2.2. Operation.......................................................................................................................................................................................61
13.2.3. Cornering�light...................................................................................................................................................................... 61
13.2.4. Malfunction................................................................................................................................................................................ 61
13.3. Front�lights................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 62
13.4. Rear�lights..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 63
14. Interior�Lighting.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 64
14.1. System�wiring�diagram............................................................................................................................................................................. 65
15. Seats................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 68
15.1. Front�seats................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 68
15.1.1. System�wiring�diagram............................................................................................................................................68
16. Heating/Air�Conditioning�Systems..........................................................................................................................................................71
16.1. Sensors�and�actuators.............................................................................................................................................................................. 71
16.2. Features............................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 72
16.2.1. IHKA�features......................................................................................................................................................................... 72
16.2.2. Additional�Functions�of�the�IHKA...........................................................................................................72
16.3. 2/1-zone�IHKA........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 73
16.3.1. Control�panel...........................................................................................................................................................................73
16.3.2. System�wiring�diagram............................................................................................................................................74
16.4. Microfilter........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 76
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
1.�Introduction
The�vehicle�electrical�system�of�the�F30�is�based�for�the�most�part�on�the�current�BMW�models.�This
product�information�bulletin�provides�an�overview�of�the�most�important�topics�relating�to�the�vehicle
electrical�system.
For�more�information�on�the�various�topics,�please�refer�to�the�following�documents�covering�the�F01/
F02:
Topic�F30 Training�information�F01/F02
Bus�systems Bus�Systems�F01/F02
Voltage�supply Voltage�Supply�F01/F02
Energy�management Energy�Management�F01/F02
Car�Access�System Car�Access�System�F01/F02
Comfort�Access Comfort�Access�F01/F02
Central�locking�system Central�Locking�System�F01/F02
Power�window�regulators Power�Window�Regulators�F01/F02
Exterior�mirrors Exterior�Mirrors�F01/F02
Glass�slide/tilt�sunroof Slide/Tilt�Sunroof�F01/F02
Alarm�system Alarm�System�F01/F02
Exterior�lights Exterior�Lights�F01/F02
Interior�lighting Interior�Light�F01/F02
Seats Seats�F01/F02
Heating�and�air�conditioning�systems Heating�and�Air�Conditioning�Systems�F01/F02
In�the�F30�the�centralization�of�several�control�units.�Two�control�units�are�installed�in�the�F30�for�this
purpose:
• Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)�and
• Rear�Electronic�Module�(REM).
The�FEM�and�REM�control�units�replace�the�following�control�units�previously�used�in�the�E90:
• Junction�box�(JB)
• Footwell�module�(FRM)
• Car�Access�System�(CAS)
• Comfort�Access�(CA)
• Park�Distance�Control�(PDC).
1
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
2.�Vehicle�Electrical�System
2.1.�Control�units
F30�control�unit�locations
2
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
2.�Vehicle�Electrical�System
Index Explanation
1 Dynamic�Stability�Control�(DSC)
2 Digital�Motor�Electronics�(DME)
3 Vertical�Dynamics�Management�(VDM)
4 Integrated�automatic�heating�/�air�conditioning�(IHKA)
5 Instrument�panel�(KOMBI)
6 Electronic�transmission�control�(EGS)
7 Head�unit
8 High-beam�assistant�(FLA)
9 Roof�function�center�(FZD)
10 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
11 Controller�(CON)
12 Reversible�electric�automatic�reel�right�(REMA�RE)�(not�for�US)
13 Combox
14 Electronic�fuel�pump�control�(EKPS)
15 Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant�(PMA)
16 DC/DC�converter
17 Rear�Electronic�Module�(REM)
18 Blind�spot�detection�(SWW)
19 Video�module�VM�(not�for�US)
20 Hi-Fi�amplifier�AMP/Top-HiFi�amplifier�(AMPT)
21 DVD�changer�(DVDC)
22 Tire�Pressure�Monitoring�System�(TPMS)
23 Integrated�Chassis�Management�(ICM)
24 Gear�selector�switch�(GWS)
25 Reversible�electric�automatic�reel�left�(REMA�LI)�(not�for�US)
26 Driver's�seat�module�(SMFA)
27 Advanced�Crash�Safety�Module�(ACSM)
28 Electronic�Power�Steering�(electromechanical�power�steering)�(EPS)
29 Camera-based�driver�support�systems�(KAFAS)
30 Control�unit�for�camera�systems�(TRSVC)
3
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
2.�Vehicle�Electrical�System
2.2.�Bus�overview
F30�bus�overview
4
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
2.�Vehicle�Electrical�System
Index Explanation
1 Control�units�with�wake-up�authorization
2 Start-up�node�control�units�for�starting�and�synchronizing�the�FlexRay�bus
system
ACSM Advanced�Crash�Safety�Module
AMPT Top-HiFi�amplifier
COMBOX Combox�(Combox�emergency�call,�Multimedia�Combox)
CON Controller
D-CAN Diagnosis-on-Controller�Area�Network
DME Digital�Engine�Electronics�(DME)
DSC Dynamic�Stability�Control
DVDC DVD�changer
EGS Electronic�transmission�control
EKPS Electronic�fuel�pump�control
EPS Electromechanical�Power�Steering
Ethernet Cable-based�data�network�technology�for�local�data�networks
FEM Front�Electronic�Module
FLA High-beam�assistant
FlexRay Fast,�preset�and�fault-tolerant�bus�system�for�use�in�automotive�sector
FZD Roof�function�center
GWS Gear�selector�lever
HEADUNIT/CIC Headunit�(Car�Information�Computer�or�Basic�headunit)
ICM Integrated�Chassis�Management
IHKA Integrated�automatic�heating�/�air�conditioning
K-CAN Body�controller�area�network
K-CAN2 Body�controller�area�network�2
KAFAS Camera-based�driver�assistance�systems
KOMBI Instrument�cluster�(MOST�only�with�option 6WA)
MOST Media�Oriented�System�Transport
OBD On-board�diagnosis�(diagnostic�socket)
PDC Park�Distance�Control�(with�option�5DP,�parking�manoeuvring�assistant:
integrated�in�the�parking�manoeuvring�assistant�control�unit,�otherwise
integrated�in�the�Rear�Electronic�Module�control�unit)
PMA Parking�manoeuvring�assistant
PT-CAN Powertrain�controller�area�network
PT-CAN2 Powertrain�controller�area�network�2
RAD Radio
5
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
2.�Vehicle�Electrical�System
Index Explanation
REM Rear�Electronic�Module
REMA�LI Reversible�electromotive�automatic�reel,�left�(not�US)
REMA�RE Reversible�electromotive�automatic�reel,�right�(not�US)
SMFA Seat�module,�driver
SWW Lane�change�warning
TPMS Tire�Pressure�Monitoring�System
TRSVC Control�unit�for�all-round�vision�camera
VDM Vertical�Dynamics�Management
ZGM Central�gateway�module
The�FlexRay�is�shown�in�a�simplified�form�in�the�overview�of�the�bus�systems.�The�following�system
wiring�diagram�shows�the�actual�physical�layout�(topology).
6
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
2.�Vehicle�Electrical�System
F30�system�wiring�diagram,�FlexRay
7
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
2.�Vehicle�Electrical�System
Index Explanation
1 Dynamic�Stability�Control�DSC
2 Digital�Engine�Electronics�(DME)�or�Digital�Diesel�Electronics�(DDE)�(not�US)
3 Electronic�Power�Steering�(electromechanical�power�steering)�EPS
4 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
5 Vertical�Dynamics�Management�(VDM)
6 Lane�change�warning�SWW
7 Integrated�Chassis�Management�(ICM)
FlexRay�is�used�in�the�F30�as�the�system�bus�for�networking�of�the�systems�that�control�the�dynamic
handling�characteristics�and�engine�control.�A�so-called�star�coupler�with�four�bus�drivers�is�located
in�the�central�gateway�module�(ZGM),�which�is�integrated�in�the�new�Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM).
The�bus�drivers�forward�the�data�of�the�control�units�via�the�communication�controller�to�the�ZGM.�The
FlexRay�control�units�are�connected�to�these�bus�drivers.
Terminating�resistors�are�used�on�both�ends�of�the�data�lines�to�avoid�reflections�on�the�lines.
The�body�controller�area�network�2�(K-CAN2)�facilitates�communication�between�control�units�with
a�high�data�transfer�rate�(500 kBit/s).�The�K-CAN2�is�also�connected�to�the�other�bus�systems�via�the
central�gateway�module�(ZGM).
The�powertrain�controller�area�network�2�(PT-CAN2)�creates�a�redundancy�to�the�powertrain�controller
area�network�(PT-CAN)�in�the�area�of�engine�and�transmission�control.
The�F30�has�Ethernet�access�in�order�to�be�able�to�program�the�complete�vehicle�quickly.�Due�to
the�very�high�data�transfer�rate�of�the�Ethernet�(100 MBit/s),�the�programming�access�via�the�MOST
system�could�be�discontinued.�The�headunit�also�obtains�an�Ethernet�connection,�via�which�the
programming�for�MOST�devices�is�effected.
The�FEM/ZGM�assumes�the�task�in�the�F30�of�distributing�the�telegrams�internally�within�the�vehicle
to�the�buses�and�of�forwarding�to�the�headunit�via�K-CAN2.�The�headunit�then�provides�for�distribution
on�the�MOST.
The�navigation�data�of�the�CIC�High�(Navigation�Professional�option�609)�are�stored�on�its�hard�disk.
These�navigation�data�are�updated�via�the�Ethernet�access�at�the�OBD�II�connection�and�the�internal
vehicle�Ethernet�connection�between�ZGM�and�CIC.
The�D-CAN�at�the�OBD�II�connection�is�used�in�the�dealer�organization�to�program�vehicles�at
"authorized�third�parties".�Legal�provisions�stipulate�that�all�control�units�must�be�able�to�be
programmed�via�the�D-CAN.�HDD�update�is�an�exception.
2.3.�OBD�II�diagnostic�access
The�diagnostic�socket�is�situated�as�in�other�BMW�vehicles�on�the�left�A-pillar.�Both�vehicle�diagnosis
via�the�D-CAN�and�programming�access�via�the�Ethernet�to�the�vehicle�are�made�available�via�the�OBD
II�interface.
8
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
3.�Voltage�Supply
3.1.�System�wiring�diagram
F30�system�wiring�diagram,�voltage�supply
9
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
3.�Voltage�Supply
Index Explanation
1 Power�Distribution�Module�(PDM)
2 Alternator
3 Digital�Engine�Electronics�(DME)�or�Digital�Diesel�Electronics�(DDE)�not�US
4 Starter�motor
5 Electric�fan
6 Relay�for�electric�fan
7 B+�jump�start�terminal�point
8 Power�distribution�box,�front
9 Power�distribution�box,�engine�compartment
10 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
11 Rear�Electronic�Module�(REM)
12 Power�distribution�box,�luggage�compartment
13 Safety�battery�terminal�(SBK)
14 Battery
15 Intelligent�battery�sensor�(IBS)
16 Battery�power�distribution�box
17 Crash�Safety�Module�(ACSM)
Kl.30 Terminal�30
Kl.30B Terminal�30�basic�operation
Kl.15N Ignition�(after-run)
Kl.30F Terminal�30,�fault-dependent
3.2.�Components
The�voltage�supply�of�the�F30�comprises�the�following�components:
• Battery
• Intelligent�battery�sensor�(IBS)
• Safety�battery�terminal�(SBK)
• Power�Distribution�Module�(PDM)
• Power�distribution�box,�front,�with�B+�jump�start�terminal�point
• Power�distribution�box,�engine�compartment
• Power�distribution�box,�luggage�compartment
• Battery�power�distribution�box
10
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
3.�Voltage�Supply
• Battery�cables
• Starter�motor
• Alternator.
Voltage�supply�components
11
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
3.�Voltage�Supply
Index Explanation
A Voltage�supply�components,�front
B Voltage�supply�components,�rear
1 Main�battery�cables
2 Power�distribution�box,�front
3 Power�distribution�box,�engine�compartment
4 B+�jump�start�terminal�point
5 Starter�motor
6 Alternator
7 Power�Distribution�Module�(PDM)
8 Safety�battery�terminal�(SBK)
9 Battery�power�distribution�box
10 Power�distribution�box,�luggage�compartment
11 Intelligent�battery�sensor�(IBS)
12 Battery
3.2.1.�Battery
The�battery�is�located�in�the�luggage�compartment�to�the�right�behind�a�removable�oddments�tray.�It�is
a�wear-resistant�90�Ah�AGM�battery.
Index Explanation
1 Removable�oddments�tray
2 Battery
12
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
3.�Voltage�Supply
3.2.2.�Wiring�harness
There�is�an�increasing�use�of�aluminium�lines�for�the�voltage�supply�in�the�F30.�Lower�weight�and
lower�costs�are�the�reason�for�the�increased�use�of�aluminium.�The�B+�underfloor�cable�made�from
solid�aluminium�with�a�flat�59�mm²�profile�section�runs�from�the�B+�transfer�terminal�point�(rear)�to�the
B+�jump�start�terminal�point�(front).
Connectors�with�a�secondary�lock�(CPA,�Connector�Position�Assurance)�are�used�at�both�the�engine
compartment�power�distribution�box�and�the�luggage�compartment�power�distribution�box.�This
provides�for�significantly�more�reliable�contacting.�Thinner�cables�with�a�cross-section�of�just�0.22
mm²�are�used�in�the�F30.
The�following�tables�shows�the�distribution�of�copper�and�aluminium�cables�in�the�vehicle:
The�cross-section�of�the�line�from�the�power�distribution�box�at�the�front�to�the�EPS�and�the�ground
line�EPS�depends�on�the�steering�of�the�vehicle:
• 27�mm²�aluminium�lines�for�EPS�High�(for�BMW�328i�and�335i)�or�for�EPS+�(for�vehicles�with
variable�sport�steering�(option�2VL).
For�more�information�on�the�Electronic�Power�Steering�EPS,�please�refer�to�the�training�information
“F30�Chassis�and�Suspension".
3.2.3.�Power�distribution�boxes
Two�separate�power�distribution�boxes�-�adapted�to�the�FEM/REM�concept�-�are�installed.�The�engine
compartment�power�distribution�box�is�located�on�the�right�side�of�the�engine�compartment�directly
on�the�front�bulkhead.�The�battery�power�distribution�box�is�no�longer�located�at�the�battery,�but�is
secured�in�front�of�the�battery�at�the�wheel�arch.
A�few�functions�where�load�relays�are�integrated�in�the�FEM/REM�are�fuse-protected�directly�in�the
FEM�or�REM.�This�also�applies�to�the�terminal�30F�controlled�exclusively�by�the�FEM.
13
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
3.�Voltage�Supply
Power�distribution�box,�engine�compartment
Index Explanation
1 Terminal�15N
2 Terminal�30B
When�working�on�the�engine�compartment�power�distribution�box,�it�is�essential�to�ensure�when
closing�the�cover�that�the�four�fastenings�engage�correctly�so�that�the�power�distribution�box�is�safely
protected�against�leaks.
Power�distribution�box,�luggage�compartment
Index Explanation
1 Terminal�15N
2 Terminal�30F
3 Terminal�30B
14
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
3.�Voltage�Supply
3.3.�Stabilization�of�the�vehicle�electrical�system
In�vehicles�equipped�with�the�automatic�engine�start-stop�function�(MSA),�starting�operations,�and
therefore�voltage�dips�in�the�vehicle�electrical�system,�occur�more�frequently.�A�DC/DC�converter
is�installed�in�these�vehicles,�depending�on�the�vehicle�equipment�specification,�to�protect�specific
voltage-sensitive�electrical�components.
The�DC/DC�converter�supplies�a�constant�voltage�to�terminals�30B_DC/DC,�also�during�the�starting
operation.
One�DC/DC�converter�is�installed�in�conjunction�with�one�of�the�following�items�of�optional�equipment:
• Navigation�system�Professional�(optional�extra 609)
• Harman�Kardon�Surround�Sound�System�(option�688).
3.4.�Energy�management
The�energy�management�of�the�F30�has�been�extended�to�include�the�functions�already�added�in�the
F25.
3.4.1.�Charge�state�indicator
If�the�F30�is�in�transport�mode,�the�battery's�state�of�charge�is�continuously�displayed�when�in
operation.�The�carrier�can�therefore�charge�the�battery�on�time�in�order�to�prevent�deep�discharging
of�the�battery,�and�therefore�damage�to�the�battery.�Before�the�vehicle�is�handed�over,�the�dealer�can
check�whether�the�battery�is�sufficiently�charged�or�whether�it�needs�to�be�replaced.
3.4.2.�Influence�of�steering�power
The�power�consumption�of�the�electronic�power�steering�(electromechanical�power�steering)�EPS
is�extremely�high.�In�order�to�avoid�a�brief�reduction�in�the�steering�servo�availability,�the�energy
management�of�the�F30�anticipates�and�responds�to�steering-intensive�driving�manoeuvres�(parking
or�three-point�turns).�To�do�this,�specific�input�variables�(e.g.�driving�speed,�brake�pedal�operation�and
steering�angle)�are�evaluated.�The�energy�management�can�implement�the�following�measures:
• Raise�the�idling�speed�and�adjust�the�ignition�timing�to�increase�the�engine�torque
• Increase�the�vehicle�voltage�via�the�alternator
• Turn�off�convenience�functions�(heated�rear�window,�outside�mirror�heating�system�and�seat
heating).
3.4.3.�Power�distribution�box,�front
A�condenser�is�installed�in�the�front�power�distribution�box�to�reduce�the�harmonic�content�in�the
vehicle�voltage�caused�by�the�alternator.
If�a�faulty�electric�fan�is�replaced,�the�harmonic�content�of�the�voltage�must�also�be�measured.�If�the
harmonic�content�is�too�high,�this�indicates�that�a�condenser�is�faulty�and�must�be�replaced.
15
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
3.�Voltage�Supply
3.5.�Supply�to�EPS
The�F30�is�equipped�as�standard�with�electromechanical�power�steering�(EPS)�with�servotronic�or
variable�sport�steering�(option 2VL)�which�can�be�ordered�as�optional�equipment.
The�EPS�makes�possible�a�reduction�of�the�average�fuel�consumption�by�approx.�3 %�in�comparison�to
conventional�hydraulic�steering.�This�helps�reduce�carbon�dioxide�emissions.
16
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
3.�Voltage�Supply
3.5.1.�System�wiring�diagram
F30�System�wiring�diagram,�EPS�(electromechanical�power�steering)
17
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
3.�Voltage�Supply
Index Explanation
1 Dynamic�Stability�Control�DSC
2 Digital�Engine�Electronics�(DME)�or�Digital�Diesel�Electronics�(DDE)�not�US
3 Electronic�Power�Steering�(electromechanical�power�steering)�EPS
4 Power�distribution�box,�front
5 Power�distribution�box,�engine�compartment
6 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
7 Integrated�Chassis�Management�(ICM)
8 Steering�column�switch�cluster�(SZL)
9 Instrument�cluster�(KOMBI)
Kl.30 Terminal�30
Kl.15N Ignition�(after-run)
3.6.�Battery�Guard
The�Battery�Guard�function�detects�critical�states�of�charge�which�could�jeopardize�engine�starting
and�sends�this�relevant�information�directly�to�the�BMW�Service�authorized�workshop.�The�customer�is
then�notified�by�BMW�Service�department�(via�phone�or�email)�of�the�required�service.
The�optional�equipment�BMW�Assist�with�enhanced�Bluetooth�and�USB�(option�6NL)�and�an�active
BMW�ConnectedDrive�agreement�are�required�for�the�Battery�Guard�function.
The�BMW�TeleServices�Battery�Guard�Call�is�automatically�activated�by�the�vehicle�under�the�following
conditions:
• If�the�battery�voltage�reaches�the�bottom�of�the�starting�ability�limit�because�a�bus�wake-up
signal�is�present,�sleep�mode�is�prevented�or�there�is�a�standby�current�violation�the�BMW
TeleServices�Battery�Guard�informs�the�BMW�Service�authorized�workshop�in�defined�cases
at�the�next�vehicle�start-up�(terminal�15�active).�It�can�then�proactively�contact�the�customer
and�arrange�a�service�appointment�to�eliminate�the�cause.�This�function�is�available�for�the
series�launch�of�the�F30�in�Germany,�the�Netherlands�and�Austria,�the�USA�and�Canada.
18
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
4.�Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
The�Front�Electronic�Module�FEM�is�used�in�the�F30,�similar�to�the�F20.�The�FEM�replaces�the
following�control�units:
• Junction�box�(JB)
• Car�Access�System�(CAS)
• Comfort�Access�(CA)
• Footwell�module�(FRM).
The�ZGM�is�integrated�as�an�independent�control�unit�in�the�FEM.
The�FEM�is�located�at�the�A-pillar�of�the�front�passenger�side.
F30�FEM�installation�location
19
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
4.�Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
Index Explanation
1 Connector�(54-pin)
2 Connector�(12-pin)
3 Connector�(42-pin)
4 Connector�(54-pin)
5 Fuses
6 Connector�(1-pin,�B+�supply)
7 Relay
8 Connector�(54-pin)
9 Connector�(54-pin)
10 Connector�(54-pin)
The�following�functions�are�protected�by�fuses�in�the�FEM:
• Steering�column�switch�cluster�(SZL),�operating�facility�for�driver�assistance�systems,
operating�facility�for�lights
• Headlight�driver�module�for�LED,�Rear�Electronic�Module�(REM)
• OBD�II�connector,�IHKA
20
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
4.�Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
• Outside�door�handle�electronics
• Power�window�regulator
• Central�lLocking�system.
The�following�functions�are�switched�by�relays�in�the�FEM:
• Power�window�regulator,�driver
• Power�window�regulator,�front�passenger
• Central�locking�system
• Headlight�cleaning�system
• Starter�motor
• Horn
• Wiper�speed�1/2.
The�following�table�provides�an�overview�of�the�FEM�functions�when�compared�with�the�relevant
control�units:
Function�in�FEM Control�unit�in�E90
A/C�activation�(actuators,�sensors) JB
Wash/wipe�system JB
Steering�column�switch�cluster�(SZL) JB
Central�locking�system�(ZV) JB
Rain-light-solar-condensation�sensor JB
Inside�mirror FZD
Interior�lighting FRM
Exterior�lights FRM
Headlight�beam�throw�adjustment FRM
Power�window�regulators,�front FRM
Exterior�mirrors FRM
Switch�block,�driver's�door FRM
Mirror�heating FRM
Comfort�Access�(CA) CAS
Remote�control�services�(FBD) CAS
Electronic�immobilizer�(EWS) CAS
Terminal�control CAS
Intelligent�battery�sensor�(IBS) CAS
Central�gateway�module�(ZGM) ZGM
21
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
4.�Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
4.1.�Central�gateway�module�(ZGM)
The�task�of�the�ZGM�is�to�connect�all�the�data�bus�systems�to�each�other.�By�connecting�them�in�this
way,�it�is�possible�to�use�information�from�the�individual�bus�systems�on�a�generalized�level.�The�ZGM
is�able�to�implement�different�protocols�and�speeds�on�other�bus�systems.�The�programming�data�are
transmitted�by�Ethernet�to�the�vehicle�via�the�ZGM.
The�ZGM�is�integrated�as�a�module�in�the�FEM�in�the�electrical�system�architecture�2020.�It�is�viewed
as�a�control�unit�within�a�control�unit.
The�ZGM�has�its�own�complete�software�unit,�comprising�bootloader�and�application,�and�its�own
diagnosis�address.�The�ZGM�is�not�codable.�The�bootloader�and�the�application�software�can�be
flashed�independently�of�the�FEM.
4.2.�Control�unit�replacement
A�counter�exchange�with�control�units�from�other�vehicles�is�not�possible.�A�control�unit�can�only�be
ordered�as�a�spare�part.�It�is�important�to�bear�in�mind�in�this�respect�that�the�FEM�and�the�DME�are
supplied�already�coded�to�the�vehicle.�The�advantage�of�this�is�that�only�the�control�unit�is�replaced
and�there�is�no�need�to�adjust�the�electronic�immobilizer.
In�contrast,�an�adjustment�must�be�made�to�the�electronic�transmission�control�after�the�control�unit
is�replaced.�In�the�course�of�this�adjustment�the�FEM�transmits�the�individual�code�to�the�electronic
transmission�control�unit.
22
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
5.�Rear�Electronic�Module�(REM)
The�Rear�Electronic�Module�(REM)�assumes�the�functions�of�JB�and�PDC�in�the�right�of�the�luggage
compartment�of�the�F30.
F30�REM�installation�location
Rear�Electronic�Module�(REM)
23
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
5.�Rear�Electronic�Module�(REM)
Index Explanation
1 Connector�(54-pin)
2 Connector�(26-pin)
3 Connector�(26-pin)
4 Fuses
5 Connector�(1-pin,�B+�supply)
The�following�table�provides�an�overview�of�the�REM�functions�when�compared�with�the�relevant
control�units:
Function�in�REM Control�unit�in�E90
Fill�level�sensor JB
Heated�rear�window JB
Power�window�regulators,�rear JB
Seat�heating JB
Rear�lights FRM
Park�Distance�Control�(PDC) PDC
The�following�functions�are�protected�by�fuses�in�the�REM:
• Heated�rear�window
• Power�window�regulators,�rear
• Roller�sunblind.
The�following�functions�are�switched�by�relays�in�the�REM:
• Heated�rear�window
• Power�window�regulators,�rear
• Roller�sunblind.
24
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
6.�CAS�Functions
There�are�two�distinct�systems�concerned�with�vehicle�access:
• Basic�access,�central�locking�system
• Comfort�Access�(option�322).
The�entire�access�control�of�the�previous�CAS�control�unit�is�integrated�entirely�in�the�FEM.
Mechanical�access�to�the�vehicle�is�confined�to�opening�the�driver's�door�lock.�Complete�locking�of�the
vehicle�is�thus�not�possible�(except�with�option 302�Alarm�system).
25
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
6.�CAS�Functions
6.1.�System�wiring�diagram
F30�system�wiring�diagram,�Car�Access�System
26
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
6.�CAS�Functions
Index Explanation
1 Dynamic�Stability�Control�DSC
2 Digital�Engine�Electronics�(DME)�or�Digital�Diesel�Electronics�(DDE)�not�US
3 Electronic�transmission�control�(EGS)
4 Engine�compartment�lid�contact�switch
5 Hotel�position�switch�(only�in�US�version)
6 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
7 Remote�control�receiver
8 Interior�antenna�(front)
9 Integrated�Chassis�Management�(ICM)
10 START-STOP�button
11 Ring�antenna�(transponder�coil)
12 Brake�light�switch
13 Clutch�switch�(with�manual�gearbox�only)
14 Electronic�steering�lock�(ELV)�not�US
15 Button�for�central�locking�system/hazard�warning�switch
16 Steering�column�switch�cluster�(SLZ)
17 Trunk�pushbutton
18 Instrument�cluster�(KOMBI)
19 Crash�Safety�Module�(ACSM)
27
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
6.�CAS�Functions
F30�Input/output,�Car�Access�System
Index Explanation
1 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
2 Relay,�term.�15N,�term.�30B,�term.�30F
3 Electronic�transmission�control�(EGS)�(start�enable)
4 Digital�Engine�Electronics�(DME)�or�Digital�Diesel�Electronics�not�US�(DDE)
(start�enable)
5 Engine�compartment�lid�contact�switch
6 Interior�antenna�(front)
7 Remote�control�receiver
8 Clutch�switch�(with�manual�gearbox�only)
9 Integrated�Chassis�Management�(ICM)
10 Brake�light�switch�(BLS)
11 Dynamic�Stability�Control�DSC
12 Ring�antenna�(transponder�coil)
13 START-STOP�button
28
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
6.�CAS�Functions
Index Explanation
14 Button�for�central�locking�system/hazard�warning�switch
15 Electronic�steering�lock�(ELV)�(start�enable)�not�US
16 Steering�column�switch�cluster�(SZL)
17 Trunk�pushbutton
Kl.15N Ignition�(after-run)
Kl.30B Terminal�30�basic�operation
Kl.30F Terminal�30,�fault-dependent
6.2.�Overview�of�functions
There�is�no�longer�an�insertion�slot�in�the�F30.�The�vehicle�can�already�be�started�without�a�key�as
standard.�This�function�is�called�"Passive�Go"�(drive�authorization).�However,�to�gain�access�to�the
vehicle,�it�is�still�necessary�to�actuate�the�ID�transmitter.
The�following�CAS�functions�are�integrated�in�the�F30:
• Comfort�Access
The�optional�equipment�Comfort�Access�contains�the�"Comfort�Entry"�and�"Comfort�Exit"
functions.�The�"Passive�Go"�function�comes�as�standard.
• Central�locking�system
• Power�window�regulators
• Slide/tilt�sunroof
• Terminal�control
• Electronic�immobilizer.
Further�CAS�functions�are�among�others:
• Vehicle�data�storage
• Data�transfer�for�Condition�Based�Service�(CBS).
The�CAS�functions�correspond�to�those�in�the�F01�and�are�described�in�the�"Car�Access�System�F01/
F02"�training�information.
With�regard�to�start�enable�by�the�electronic�immobilizer�(also�called�Challenge�Response),�some
changes�have�been�made�from�the�F01.�What�is�new�is�the�omission�of�the�CAS�bus,�because�PT-CAN
and�FlexRay�already�provide�redundancy�of�data�transfer�between�FEM�and�DME.
The�emergency-start�function�(stopping�the�ID�transmitter�at�the�ring�antenna�on�the�steering�column)
is�already�known�from�the�F01.
29
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
6.�CAS�Functions
F30�Redundancy�in�data�transfer
Index Explanation
1 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
2 Digital�Engine�Electronics�(DME)�or�Digital�Diesel�Electronics�(DDE)�not�US
3 Electronic�transmission�control�(EGS)
4 START-STOP�button
5 Ring�antenna�(transponder�coil)
30
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
7.�Comfort�Access
The�Comfort�Access�function�is�integrated�in�the�Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM).
Comfort�Access�contains�the�following�functions:
• Passive�Entry�(access�authorization)
facilitates�access�to�the�vehicle�without�active�use�of�the�ID�transmitter
• Passive�Go�(drive�authorization)
enables�the�vehicle�to�be�started�when�there�is�a�valid�ID�transmitter�in�the�passenger
compartment
• Passive�Exit�(locking�authorization)
enables�the�vehicle�to�be�locked�without�active�use�of�the�ID�transmitter
• Hands-free�trunk�lid�opening
makes�it�possible�for�hands-free�opening�of�the�trunk�lid�by�a�foot�movement�under�the�rear
bumper.
31
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
7.�Comfort�Access
7.1.�System�wiring�diagram
F30�system�wiring�diagram,�Comfort�Access
32
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
7.�Comfort�Access
Index Explanation
1 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
2 Door�contact,�front�passenger�side
3 Outside�door�handle�electronics�(TAGE)�on�front�passenger�side
4 Comfort�Access�antenna,�side�sill,�right
5 Comfort�Access�antenna,�bumper,�rear
6 Comfort�Access�antenna,�luggage�compartment
7 Remote�control�receiver
8 Comfort�Access�antenna,�passenger�compartment,�rear
9 Comfort�Access�antenna,�side�sill,�left
10 Outside�door�handle�electronics�(TAGE)�on�driver's�side
11 Door�contact,�driver's�side
12 Comfort�Access�antenna,�passenger�compartment,�front
Kl.30F Terminal�30,�fault-dependent
For�the�Comfort�Access�function�the�Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)�activates�the�transmitter
antennae�for�the�exterior�and�passenger�compartment.
The�outside�door�handle�electronics�(TAGE)�are�also�read�in�by�the�FEM.
Input/output,�Comfort�Access
33
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
7.�Comfort�Access
Index Explanation
1 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
2 Door�contact,�front�passenger�side
3 Outside�door�handle�electronics�(TAGE)�on�front�passenger�side
4 Comfort�Access�antenna,�side�sill,�right
5 Comfort�Access�antenna,�passenger�compartment,�rear
6 Comfort�Access�antenna,�luggage�compartment
7 Comfort�Access�antenna,�bumper,�rear
8 Comfort�Access�antenna,�passenger�compartment,�front
9 Comfort�Access�antenna,�side�sill,�left
10 Outside�door�handle�electronics�(TAGE)�on�driver's�side
11 Door�contact,�driver's�side
The�components�and�functionality�of�Comfort�Access�are�familiar�from�the�current�BMW�models.
34
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
7.�Comfort�Access
7.2.�Hands-free�trunk�lid�opening
7.2.1.�System�wiring�diagram
F30�system�wiring�diagram�for�hands-free�trunk�lid�opening
35
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
7.�Comfort�Access
Index Explanation
1 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
2 Power�distribution�box,�luggage�compartment
3 Rear�Electronic�Module�(REM)
4 Control�unit�for�hands-free�trunk�lid�opening
5 Sensor�at�top�for�hands-free�trunk�lid�opening
6 Sensor�at�bottom�for�hands-free�trunk�lid�opening
7 Comfort�Access�antenna,�bumper,�rear
8 Trunk�lock
Kl.30F Terminal�30,�fault-dependent
7.2.2.�Functional�description
The�hands-free�trunk�lid�opening�is�another�operating�element�for�the�trunk�for�the�customer.
The�operation�is�effected�by�means�of�targeted�foot�movement�to�and�from�the�bumper.�Two�sensors
detect�the�movement�via�a�capacitive�measurement.
F30�hands-free�trunk�lid�opening�by�foot�movement
36
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
7.�Comfort�Access
Index Explanation
1 Rear�bumper
2 Control�unit�for�hands-free�trunk�lid�opening
3 Sensor�at�top�for�hands-free�trunk�lid�opening
4 Sensor�at�bottom�for�hands-free�trunk�lid�opening
The�following�components�are�involved�in�the�function:
• FEM
• REM
• Trunk�lock
• Control�unit�for�hands-free�trunk�lid�opening
• Comfort�Access�antenna,�bumper,�rear
• Two�sensors.
F30�sensor�for�hands-free�trunk�lid�opening
Index Explanation
1 Control�unit�for�hands-free�trunk�lid�opening
2 Trunk�lock
3 Sensor�at�top�for�hands-free�trunk�lid�opening
4 Sensor�at�bottom�for�hands-free�trunk�lid�opening
5 Comfort�Access�antenna,�bumper,�rear
37
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
7.�Comfort�Access
The�two�sensors�are�connected�to�the�evaluation�electronics�and�constantly�measure�the�capacity.�A
comparison�of�the�time�characteristic�of�the�measured�capacities�permits�the�identification�of�a�certain
movement�pattern.
A�targeted�foot�movement�to�and�from�the�bumper�can�be�detected�herefrom.�The�top�sensor�detects
the�shin,�the�bottom�sensor�the�toes.
The�detection�range�is�between�the�rear�lights.
The�sensors�are�secured�in�the�inside�of�the�rear�bumper.
The�trunk�opens�regardless�if�it�was�locked�or�unlocked.
This�system�might�also�be�referred�to�in�ISTA�as:
• Smart�Opener
• Contact-less�Tailgate
• Contact-free�Tailgate
• Non-contact�Rear�Lid
• Touch-less�Tailgate�Opening
• Hands-free�Trunk�Lid�Opening
38
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
8.�Central�Locking�System
8.1.�System�wiring�diagram
F30�system�wiring�diagram,�central�locking�system
39
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
8.�Central�Locking�System
Index Explanation
1 Trunk�pushbutton�(fitted�as�standard,�depending�on�version)
2 Instrument�cluster�(KOMBI)
3 Button�for�central�locking�system/hazard�warning�switch
4 Hotel�position�switch�(only�in�US�version)
5 Engine�compartment�lid�contact�switch
6 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
7 Door�contact,�central�locking�system�on�front�passenger�side,�front
8 Door�contact,�central�locking,�passenger�side,�rear
9 Central�locking�system,�fuel�filler�flap
10 Rear�Electronic�Module�(REM)
11 Power�distribution�box,�luggage�compartment
12 Trunk�contact�with�trunk�lock
13 Trunk�light
14 Trunk�light
15 Trunk�light
16 Trunk�pushbutton�on�the�outside�of�the�trunk
17 Luggage�compartment�light
18 Remote�control�receiver
19 Door�contact,�central�locking�system,�driver's�side,�rear
20 Door�contact,�central�locking�system,�driver's�side,�front
Kl.30B Terminal�30�basic�operation
The�radio�signal�from�the�ID�transmitter�is�received�by�the�remote�control�receiver.
After�the�remote�control�receiver�has�verified�the�signal,�it�forwards�it�to�the�Front�Electronic�Module
FEM.�The�signal�causes�the�FEM�to�activate�the�central�locking�system�and�the�interior�lighting.
The�FEM�evaluates�the�status�of�all�door�contacts.�In�this�way,�for�example,�the�vehicle�can�be
prevented�from�being�locked�while�the�driver's�door�is�open.
The�status�of�the�central�locking�system�button/hazard�warning�switch�is�also�evaluated�by�the�FEM.
The�FEM�activates�the�central�locking�system,�depending�on�the�status.
The�Rear�Electronic�Module�(REM)�is�responsible�for�sensing�the�status�and�activating�the�central
locking�system�in�the�trunk.�The�FEM�is�responsible�for�the�activation�of�the�fuel�filler�flap.
40
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
8.�Central�Locking�System
Input/output,�central�locking�system
Index Explanation
1 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
2 Engine�compartment�lid�contact�switch
3 Button�for�central�locking�system/hazard�warning�switch
4 Trunk�pushbutton
5 Door�contact,�central�locking�system,�front�passenger�side,�front
6 Door�contact,�central�locking�system,�front�passenger�side,�rear
7 Central�locking�system,�fuel�filler�flap
8 Rear�Electronic�Module�(REM)
9 Trunk�contact�with�trunk�lock
10 Trunk�pushbutton�on�the�outside�of�the�trunk
11 Luggage�compartment�light
41
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
8.�Central�Locking�System
Index Explanation
12 Remote�control�receiver
13 Door�contact,�central�locking�system,�driver's�side,�rear
14 Door�contact,�central�locking�system,�driver's�side,�front
15 Instrument�cluster�(KOMBI)
The�remote�control�receiver�checks�the�data�telegrams�of�the�ID�transmitter�and�transmits�them�when
identified�correctly�via�the�LIN�bus�to�the�FEM.�The�FEM�evaluates�the�signal�and�causes�the�vehicle�to
be�unlocked�or�locked.
The�central�locking�system�functions�for�the�doors�and�the�trunk�are�controlled�by�the�FEM.�The�REM
controls�the�trunk�central�locking�system.
The�central�locking�system�can�be�operated�from�various�positions:
• inside�the�vehicle
via�the�central�locking�system�button�on�the�dashboard
• outside�the�vehicle
via�the�ID�transmitter�or
via�the�door�handle�on�the�driver�or�front�passenger�door�or
the�trunk�pushbutton�on�the�outer�trunk,�for�Comfort�Access�including�Smart�Opener�(option
322).
42
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
9.�Power�Window�Regulators
9.1.�System�wiring�diagram
F30�system�wiring�diagram,�power�window�regulators
43
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
9.�Power�Window�Regulators
Index Explanation
1 Power�distribution�box,�engine�compartment
2 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
3 Power�window�motor�with�indirect�anti-trap�mechanism,�passenger�side,�front
4 Power�window�switch,�front�passenger�side,�front
5 Power�window�motor�with�indirect�anti-trap�mechanism,�passenger�side,�rear
6 Power�window�switch,�front�passenger�side�rear
7 Rear�Electronic�Module�(REM)
8 Remote�control�receiver
9 Power�window�switch�driver's�side,�rear
10 Power�window�motor�with�indirect�anti-trap�mechanism,�driver's�side,�rear
11 Switch�block,�driver's�door
12 Power�window�motor�with�indirect�anti-trap�mechanism,�driver's�side,�front
Kl.30B Terminal�30�basic�operation
The�front�power�window�regulators�are�activated�by�the�FEM.�The�REM�assumes�the�activation�of�the
rear�power�window�regulators.�The�power�window�regulators�at�the�front�are�protected�directly�via�the
FEM�and�the�power�window�regulators�at�the�rear�are�protected�directly�via�the�REM.�The�relevant�load
relays�are�integrated�directly�in�the�FEM/REM.�There�is�therefore�no�need�for�power�to�be�supplied�via
a�power�distribution�box.
The�functions�with�regard�to�comfort�and�anti-trap�protection�are�already�familiar�from�the�E90.
44
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
9.�Power�Window�Regulators
Input/output,�power�window�regulators
Index Explanation
1 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
2 Power�window�motor�with�indirect�anti-trap�mechanism,�passenger�side,�front
3 Power�window�switch,�front�passenger�side,�front
4 Remote�control�receiver
5 Power�window�motor�with�indirect�anti-trap�mechanism,�passenger�side,�rear
6 Power�window�switch,�front�passenger�side�rear
7 Rear�Electronic�Module�(REM)
8 Power�window�switch�driver's�side,�rear
9 Power�window�motor�with�indirect�anti-trap�mechanism,�driver's�side,�rear
10 Switch�block,�driver's�door
11 Power�window�motor�with�indirect�anti-trap�mechanism,�driver's�side,�front
45
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
10.�Exterior�Mirrors
10.1.�System�wiring�diagram
F30�system�wiring�diagram,�exterior�mirrors
46
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
10.�Exterior�Mirrors
Index Explanation
1 Outside�temperature�sensor
2 Power�distribution�box,�engine�compartment
3 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
4 Exterior�mirror,�front�passenger�side�(turn�indicator�light,�mirror�heating,�motors
for�folding�up�and�down�and�for�adjustment)
5 Switch�block,�driver's�door
6 Exterior�mirror,�driver's�side�(turn�indicator�light,�mirror�heating,�motors�for
folding�up�and�down�and�for�adjustment)
7 Instrument�cluster�(KOMBI)
8 Inside�mirror
Kl.30B Terminal�30�basic�operation
The�additional�side�turn�indicator�is�already�integrated�as�standard�in�the�exterior�mirror.�The�side
repeater�is�operated�using�a�LED�fibre-optic�conductor.
The�exterior�mirror�of�the�F30�is�equipped�without�a�local�interconnect�network�bus�connection�in�the
standard�equipment.
The�exterior�mirror�with�a�local�interconnect�network�bus�connection�is�available�in�the�F30�with�the
following�optional�equipment:
• Interior�and�exterior�mirrors�with�automatic�anti-dazzle�function�(option�430)
• Electrical�seat�adjustment�with�memory�(option�459)
• Surround�View�(option�5DL)
• Lane�change�warning�(option�5AG)
47
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
10.�Exterior�Mirrors
F30�Input/output,�exterior�mirrors
Index Explanation
1 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
2 Inside�mirror
3 Exterior�mirror,�front�passenger�side
4 Switch�block,�driver's�door
5 Exterior�mirror,�driver's�side
6 Outside�temperature�sensor
7 Instrument�cluster
48
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
11.�Glass�Slide/Tilt�Sunroof
11.1.�System�wiring�diagram
F30�system�wiring�diagram,�glass�slide/tilt�sunroof
49
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
11.�Glass�Slide/Tilt�Sunroof
Index Explanation
1 Power�distribution�box,�engine�compartment
2 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
3 Remote�control�receiver
4 Roof�function�center�(FZD)
5 Glass�slide/tilt�sunroof�motor
Kl.30 Terminal�30
The�control�and�monitoring�of�the�motors�of�the�slide/tilt�sunroof�takes�place�in�the�roof�function�center
FZD.
The�FZD�is�connected�to�the�Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM),�which�enables�or�disables�operation�of
the�slide/tilt�sunroof.�The�engine�compartment�power�distribution�box�delivers�the�voltage�supply�to
the�motors�via�terminal�30.
F30�Input/output,�glass�slide/tilt�sunroof
Index Explanation
1 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
2 Remote�control�receiver
3 Roof�function�center�(FZD)
4 Glass�slide/tilt�sunroof�motor
50
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
12.�Alarm�System
In�addition�to�the�monitoring�of�doors�and�the�engine�compartment�lid�and�the�trunk,�the�passenger
compartment�is�also�monitored�in�the�F30�with�the�alarm�system.�Together�with�an�ultrasonic�interior
movement�detector�(USIS),�it�is�fully�integrated�in�the�roof�function�center�(FZD).
51
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
12.�Alarm�System
12.1.�System�wiring�diagram
F30�system�wiring�diagram,�alarm�system
52
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
12.�Alarm�System
Index Explanation
1 Engine�compartment�lid�contact�switch
2 Power�distribution�box,�engine�compartment
3 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
4 Door�contact,�front�passenger�side,�front
5 Door�contact�on�front�passenger�side,�rear
6 Rear�Electronic�Module�(REM)
7 Power�distribution�box,�luggage�compartment
8 Trunk�contact�with�trunk�lock
9 Siren�with�tilt�alarm�sensor�SINE
10 Door�contact�on�driver's�side,�rear
11 Door�contact,�driver's�side,�front
12 Roof�function�center�(FZD)�USIS
13 Alarm�system�LED�in�the�inside�mirror
Kl.30 Terminal�30
The�status�of�the�following�components�is�monitored:
• Door�contacts,�from�Front�Electronic�Module�FEM
• Engine�compartment�lid�contact�switch,�from�Front�Electronic�Module�FEM
• Rear�lid�contact�switch,�from�Rear�Electronic�Module�REM.
As�soon�as�a�status�changes,�the�control�unit�for�the�ultrasonic�interior�movement�detector�USIS
receives�a�corresponding�signal�via�the�K-CAN2.�If�the�alarm�system�is�activated,�an�alarm�is�triggered.
53
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
13.�Exterior�Lights
The�exterior�lights�of�the�F30�are�based�on�the�current�BMW�models.
The�F30�is�equipped�with�halogen�headlights�as�standard.�Bi-xenon�headlights�are�available�as
optional�equipment�(option 522).
With�the�optional�equipment�bi-xenon�headlight,�LEDs�are�used�for�the�daytime�running�lights,�side
lights�and�positioning�lights.
With�halogen�headlights,�the�headlight�beam�throw�is�regulated�manually.
Adaptive�headlights�are�available�as�optional�equipment�(option�524)�for�the�F30.�This�is�only�available
in�conjunction�with�bi-xenon�headlights�(option 522).
The�FEM�as�the�master�control�unit�is�responsible�for�the�exterior�light�functions.�It�decides�which
lighting�functions�have�to�be�activated�or�deactivated�and�makes�this�information�available�to�the�REM
via�the�K-CAN2.�The�REM�in�turn�signals�the�status�of�the�activated�function�in�each�case�back�to�the
FEM.
The�additional�LED�turn�indicators�are�in�the�exterior�mirror.�The�additional�turn�indicators�in�the�side
panel�are�therefore�omitted.
For�more�information�on�exterior�lights,�please�refer�to�the�"Exterior�Lights�F01/F02"�training
information.
54
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
13.�Exterior�Lights
13.1.�System�wiring�diagram
F30�system�wiring�diagram,�front�exterior�lights�(with�halogen�headlights)
55
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
13.�Exterior�Lights
Index Explanation
1 Headlight,�left
2 Fog�light,�left�)
3 Fog�light,�right
4 Headlight,�right
5 Power�distribution�box,�engine�compartment
6 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
7 Additional�turn�indicator,�exterior�mirror,�front�passenger�side
8 Battery�power�distribution�box
9 Additional�turn�indicator,�exterior�mirror,�driver's�side
10 Steering�column�switch�cluster�(SZL)
11 Operating�facility,�light�switch
12 Button�for�central�locking�system/hazard�warning�switch
13 Rain-light-solar-condensation�sensor
Kl.30 Terminal�30
Kl.30F Terminal�30,�fault-dependent
56
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
13.�Exterior�Lights
F30�system�wiring�diagram,�front�exterior�lights�(with�xenon�light,�option�522)
57
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
13.�Exterior�Lights
Index Explanation
1 Headlight,�left
1
2 Fog�light,�left
3 Fog�light,�right
4 Headlight,�right
1
5 Power�distribution�box,�engine�compartment
6 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
7 Additional�turn�indicator,�exterior�mirror,�front�passenger�side
8 Battery�power�distribution�box
9 Ride�height�sensor,�rear
10 Integrated�Chassis�Management�(ICM)
11 Additional�turn�indicator,�exterior�mirror,�driver's�side
12 Operating�facility,�light�switch
13 Button�for�central�locking�system/hazard�warning�switch
14 Rain-light-solar-condensation�sensor
15 Steering�column�switch�cluster�(SZL)
16 Dynamic�Stability�Control�DSC
17 Ride�height�sensor,�front
1
�Second�stepper�motor�only�with�adaptive�headlight�(option 524).
58
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
13.�Exterior�Lights
F30�system�wiring�diagram,�rear�exterior�lights
59
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
13.�Exterior�Lights
Index Explanation
1 Dynamic�Stability�Control�(DSC)
2 Electronic�transmission�control�(EGS)
3 Reversing�light�switch
4 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
5 Trailer�module�(AHM)�not�US
6 Power�distribution�box,�luggage�compartment
7 Rear�Electronic�Module�(REM)
8 Battery�power�distribution�box
9 Outer�rear�light,�right
10 Inner�rear�light,�right�(in�trunk)
11 Number-plate�light,�right
12 Number-plate�light,�left
13 Inner�rear�light,�left�(in�trunk)
14 Outer�rear�light,�left
15 Interference�suppression�filter
16 Additional�brake�light
17 Integrated�Chassis�Management�(ICM)
18 Brake�light�switch
19 Operating�facility,�light�switch
20 Steering�column�switch�cluster�(SZL)
21 Button�for�central�locking�system/hazard�warning�switch
22 Rain-light-solar-condensation�sensor
Kl.30 Terminal�30
Kl.30F Terminal�30,�fault-dependent
13.2.�Adaptive�headlights
In�the�F30�the�adaptive�headlight�(option�524)�is�only�available�with�the�following�optional�equipment:
• Rain�sensor�(option 521)
• Xenon�light�(option�522)
• High-beam�assistant�(option 5AC).
The�adaptive�headlight�enables�dynamic�lighting�of�the�roadway�thanks�to�a�variable�headlight�control
unit.
So�as�not�to�dazzle�oncoming�traffic�the�adaptive�headlight�is�not�active�when�reversing�or�when
steering�in�stationary�mode�to�the�left�(for�left-hand�drive�vehicles).
60
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
13.�Exterior�Lights
The�high-beam�assistant/automatic�high-beams�(option�5AC)�is�dazzle-free�with�the�adaptive
headlight�optional�equipment.�More�information�on�the�dazzle-free�high-beam�assistants�can�be�found
in�the�training�information�"Driver�Assist�Systems�of�the�F30".
13.2.1.�Function
The�headlight�follows�the�course�of�the�road�depending�on�the�steering�angle�and�other�parameters.
For�further�information�on�the�adaptive�headlight,�please�refer�to�the�training�information�"F01/F02
Exterior�Lights".
13.2.2.�Operation
The�adaptive�headlight�is�activated�in�switch�position�"A"�when�the�ignition�is�switched�on.
The�cornering�light�is�automatically�activated�depending�on�the�steering�angle�or�turn�indicator.
13.2.3.�Cornering�light
The�cornering�light�function�is�included�in�the�adaptive�headlight�optional�equipment.�At�narrow�bends
or�when�turning,�one�of�the�two�fog�lights�is�activated�as�a�cornering�light�up�to�a�speed�of�65�km/h.
This�illuminates�the�inner�area�of�the�bend�better.�So�as�not�to�dazzle�oncoming�traffic,�the�adaptive
headlight�points�to�the�front�passenger�side�when�the�vehicle�is�stationary.
Index Explanation
1 Without�cornering�light
2 With�cornering�light
13.2.4.�Malfunction
If�there�is�a�fault�with�the�function,�the�following�Check�Control�message�is�displayed:
Adaptive�headlight�is�faulty�or�has�failed.�Have�the�system�checked�as�soon�as�possible.
For�further�information�on�the�adaptive�headlight,�please�refer�to�the�training�information�"F01/F02
Exterior�Lights".
61
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
13.�Exterior�Lights
13.3.�Front�lights
The�following�graphic�shows�the�layout�of�the�front�headlight.
F30�halogen�headlight,�front
Index Explanation
1 Side�lights
2 High-beam�headlight
3 Low-beam�headlight
4 Turn�indicator
5 Daytime�lights
F30�bi-xenon�headlight,�front
Index Explanation
1 LED�for�side�light/daytime�driving�light
2 Low-beam�and�high-beam�headlight
3 Turn�indicator
62
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
13.�Exterior�Lights
For�vehicles�with�a�xenon�light�(option�522)�the�side�lights/daytime�driving�lights�are�realized�via�LED-
operated�corona�rings.
13.4.�Rear�lights
The�F30�features�a�two-part�rear�light.�One�part�is�located�in�the�quarter�panel,�the�other�in�the�trunk.
The�layout�of�the�rear�lights�is�shown�in�the�following�graphic.
F30�rear�light
Index Explanation
1 Turn�indicator
2 Reversing�light
3 Tail�light
4 Rear�fog�light�(not�US)
5 Brake�light
The�bulbs�of�the�rear�light�in�the�side�wall�are�replaced�by�removing�the�lights�from�the�vehicle.�Access
is�done�via�an�opening�in�the�panel�of�the�water�channel.
63
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
14.�Interior�Lighting
The�ambient�light�package�which�is�standard.�The�luggage�compartment�lights�are�controlled�by�the
REM.�The�FEM�is�responsible�for�the�activation�of�all�interior�lighting.
The�components�of�the�interior�lighting�in�the�front�roof�area�are�integrated�in�the�roof�function�center
and�in�the�sun�visors.�The�footwell�lighting�is�located�on�the�underside�of�the�dashboard.�Voltage�is
supplied�to�the�rear�interior�lighting�via�the�roof�function�center.
F30�roof�function�center
Index Explanation
1 Emergency�call�button�(only�with�option 6NL)
2 Switch�for�panorama�glass�roof
3 Indicator�lamp�for�front�passenger�airbag�deactivation
4 Reading�light�button,�right
5 Reading�light,�right
6 Ambient�lighting
7 Interior�light
8 Ambient�lighting
9 Reading�light�on�left
10 Reading�light�button,�left
In�connection�with�the�line�package�BMW�Line�Sport�(PA�7AC),�BMW�Line�Luxury�(PA�7S2)�or�BMW
Line�Modern�(PA�7S1),�the�color�of�the�ambient�lighting�can�be�changed�depending�on�the�line.�The
changeover�of�the�color�and�the�brightness�of�the�ambient�lighting�are�effected�in�a�menu�in�the�CID.
Depending�on�the�vehicle�line�some�of�the�lights�are�installed�as�switchable�two-colored�LEDs.
64
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
14.�Interior�Lighting
14.1.�System�wiring�diagram
F30�system�wiring�diagram�for�interior�lighting
65
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
14.�Interior�Lighting
Index Explanation
1 Footwell�light�on�driver's�side,�front
2 Glove�box�light
3 Glove�box�switch
4 Footwell�light�on�front�passenger�side,�front
5 Power�distribution�box,�engine�compartment
6 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
7 Inside�door�handle�light�on�front�passenger�side
8 Ground�lights�on�outer�door�handle�on�front�passenger�side
9 Entrance�lighting�on�front�passenger�side,�front
10 Door�contact,�front�passenger�side,�front
11 Lighting,�B-pillar,�front�passenger�side
12 Inside�door�handle�light�on�rear�passenger�side
13 Ground�lights�on�outer�door�handle�on�rear�passenger�side
14 Entrance�lighting�passenger's�side,�rear
15 Door�contact�on�front�passenger�side,�rear
16 Power�distribution�box,�luggage�compartment
17 Rear�Electronic�Module�(REM)
18 Luggage�compartment�light
19 Trunk�contact�with�trunk�lock
20 Interior�light�unit,�rear
21 Door�contact�on�driver's�side,�rear
22 Entrance�lighting�driver's�side,�rear
23 Ground�lights�on�outer�door�handle�on�rear�driver's�side
24 Inside�door�handle�light�on�rear�driver's�side
25 Lighting,�B-pillar,�driver's�side
26 Roof�function�center�(FZD)�with�front�interior�light�unit
27 Door�contact,�driver's�side,�front
28 Entrance�lighting�on�driver's�side,�front
29 Ground�lights�on�outer�door�handle�on�front�driver's�side
30 Inside�door�handle�light�on�front�driver's�side
31 Switch�for�vanity�mirror�light�on�driver's�side
32 Vanity�mirror�light�on�driver's�side
66
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
14.�Interior�Lighting
Index Explanation
33 Lighting,�dashboard
34 Vanity�mirror�light�on�passenger�side
35 Switch�for�vanity�mirror�light�on�passenger�side
Kl.30B Terminal�30�basic�operation
67
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
15.�Seats
15.1.�Front�seats
15.1.1.�System�wiring�diagram
4
�Only�with�seat�heating�for�driver�and�front�passenger�(option 494).
68
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
15.�Seats
F30�system�wiring�diagram,�front�seat,�driver's�side�(with�electric�seat�adjustment,�with�memory,�option 459)
69
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
15.�Seats
Index Explanation
1 Power�distribution�box,�engine�compartment
2 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
3 Exterior�mirror,�front�passenger�side
4 Integrated�automatic�heating�/�air�conditioning�(IHKA)
5 Seat�heating�switch,�driver's�side
4
6 Driver's�seat�module (SMFA)
7 Electric�motor,�forward/back�seat�adjustment
8 Electric�motor,�seat�angle�adjustment
9 Electric�motor,�seat�height�adjustment
10 Electric�motor,�backrest�angle�adjustment
11 Solenoid�valves,�backrest�width�adjustment
1
12 Lumbar�support�pump2
13 Solenoid�valves,�lumbar�support�adjustment
3
14 Switch�block,�seat�adjustment
15 Seat�heating,�backrest
4
16 Seat�heating,�seat�surface
4
17 Switch�block,�driver's�door
18 Exterior�mirror,�driver's�side
Kl.30B Terminal�30�basic�operation
1
�Only�with�sports�seats�for�driver�and�front�passenger�(option 481).
2�
Only�with�sports�seats�for�driver�and�front�passenger�(option 481)�or�with�lumbar�support�for�driver
and�front�passenger�(option 488).
3
�Only�with�lumbar�supports�for�driver�and�front�passenger�(option 488).
4
�Only�with�seat�heating�for�driver�and�front�passenger�(option 494).
70
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
16.�Heating/Air�Conditioning�Systems
In�the�F30�an�integrated�heating�and�air-conditioning�system�(IHKA)�is�used�as�standard�equipment�for
the�heating�and�air-conditioning�system.�In�the�E90�an�integrated�heating�/�air-conditioning�regulation
(IHKR)�was�used�as�standard�equipment.
With�an�integrated�heating�/�air-conditioning�regulation�the�duct�temperature�is�adjusted�to�the�value
set�using�the�control�panel.�In�contrast,�with�an�integrated�heating�/�air-conditioning�system�the�interior
temperature�of�the�vehicle�is�also�taken�into�consideration�when�controlling�the�duct�temperature.
If�the�interior�temperature�deviates�greatly�from�the�set�temperature,�the�duct�temperature�is�then
controlled�at�a�lower�or�higher�value�than�the�set�temperature�in�order�to�quickly�reach�the�set
temperature.
The�IHKA�of�the�F30�therefore�has�an�additional�interior�temperature�sensor�installed�in�the�control
panel.�The�sensor�data�is�digitized�in�the�control�panel�and�the�information�transmitted�to�the�IHKA
control�unit�via�the�local�interconnect�network�bus.�Thanks�to�a�computer�model�integrated�in�the�IHKA
controls,�the�forced�ventilation�of�the�interior�temperature�sensor�in�the�F30�could�be�discontinued.
The�duct�temperature�is�measured�using�sensors�in�the�ventilation�system,�which�are�connected
directly�to�the�IHKA�control�unit.
• Integrated�automatic�heating�/�air�conditioning�(IHKA),�2/1-zone.
In�the�zone�specification�the�first�number�denotes�the�number�of�controllable�temperature�zones
(temperature�selector�wheels)�and�the�second�number�the�number�of�controllable�airflow�volume�and
air�distribution�zones�(separate�fan�settings).
16.1.�Sensors�and�actuators
Sensors�and�actuators�which�are�connected�to�the�FEM�control�unit�are�involved�in�the�function�of
the�heating�and�air�conditioning�system�in�the�F30.�The�following�list�provides�an�overview�of�these
components:
• Refrigerant�circuit�pressure�sensor
The�FEM�evaluates�the�pressure�sensor�signal�and�makes�it�available�to�the�IHKA�control�unit
via�K-CAN
• Blower
The�IHKA�control�unit�request�is�sent�via�the�LIN�bus�to�the�blower
• A/C�compressor
The�A/C�compressor�is�controlled�via�a�pulse-width�modulated�signal�by�the�FEM.�The�FEM
can�also�actuate�the�A/C�compressor�clutch.�The�request�is�always�effected�however�through
the�IHKA�control�unit.�In�the�event�of�a�fault,�a�fault�entry�is�made�by�the�FEM.
• Heat�exchanger�water�valve
• Stepper�motors
- Nine�stepper�motors�for�IHKA�2/1�zones
• Rear-seat�area�ventilation�sensor
The�FEM�evaluates�the�signal�from�the�rear-seat�area�ventilation�sensor�and�makes�it�available
to�the�IHKA�control�unit�via�the�K-CAN.
71
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
16.�Heating/Air�Conditioning�Systems
16.2.�Features
16.2.1.�IHKA�features
• Improved�protection�of�the�blower�motor�through�closed�area�of�the�blower�wheel
- Protection�of�the�blower�motor�against�water�and�contaminants
• One-piece�microfilter�on�the�pressure�side�of�the�blower
- Air�filtering�also�in�air�recirculation�function,�thus�improved�air�quality
- Reduced�build-up�of�odors,�as�well�as�less�corrosion�on�evaporator
• Separation�of�IHKA�controls�and�IHKA�control�unit
- The�IHKA�control�unit�is�now�located�at�the�heating�and�air-conditioning�unit
- Communication�between�IHKA�controls�and�IHKA�control�unit�by�means�of�local
interconnect�network�bus�via�the�audio�control�panel
• Air-conditioning�with�clutch
In�the�case�of�a�switched-off�air-conditioning�system�the�compressor�is�separated�from�the
belt�drive�by�a�clutch,�the�load�on�the�engine�is�therefore�less�thus�saving�on�fuel
• ECO�PRO�function
- Climate�control
Less�air-drying�and�cooling,�thus�less�drive�power�required�for�A/C�compressor
A/C�compressor�is�switched�off�if�required�temperature�is�reached�also�without�cold-air
generation
- Heating�mode
Dispensed�with�operating�mode�of�combustion�engine�with�increased�heat�dissipation.
16.2.2.�Additional�Functions�of�the�IHKA
• Operable�stratification
• Air�flaps�are�individually�activated�using�9�stepper�motors
• Temperature�for�rear-seat�area�ventilation�can�be�adjusted
The�FEM�evaluates�the�signal�from�the�rear-seat�area�ventilation�sensor�and�makes�it�available
to�the�IHKA�control�unit�via�the�K-CAN.
72
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
16.�Heating/Air�Conditioning�Systems
16.3.�2/1-zone�IHKA
16.3.1.�Control�panel
In�the�F30�the�IHKA�2/1�zones�control�panel�is�installed.
F30�control�panel,�IHKA�2/1�zones
73
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
16.�Heating/Air�Conditioning�Systems
16.3.2.�System�wiring�diagram
F30�system�wiring�diagram,�IHKA�2/1�zones
74
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
16.�Heating/Air�Conditioning�Systems
Index Explanation
1 Refrigerant�circuit�pressure�sensor
2 Heat�exchanger�water�valve
3 A/C�compressor
4 Power�distribution�box,�front
5 Power�distribution�box,�engine�compartment
6 Automatic�air�recirculation�control�sensor
7 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
8 Rear�Electronic�Module�(REM)
9 Heated�rear�window
10 Stratification�potentiometer�for�rear-seat�area�ventilation
11 Temperature�sensor�for�evaporator
12 Temperature�sensor,�footwell,�front�right
13 Temperature�sensor,�footwell,�front�left
14 Stepper�motor,�mixing�air�flap,�left
15 Stepper�motor,�mixing�air�flap,�right
16 Stepper�motor,�fresh�air/ram�air/recirculated�air
17 Stepper�motor,�stratification,�front�right
18 Stepper�motor,�stratification,�front�left
19 Stepper�motor,�temperature,�air�quantity,�rear�passenger�compartment
20 Stepper�motor,�footwell,�right
21 Stepper�motor,�footwell,�left
22 Stepper�motor,�defrost
23 Electric�auxiliary�heater�(only�for�diesel�fuel�vehicles)
24 IHKA�control�unit
25 Audio�control�panel
26 IHKA�controls�with�interior�temperature�sensor
27 Rain-light-solar-condensation�sensor
28 Ventilation�temperature�sensor,�left
29 Stratification�potentiometer�for�front�ventilation
30 Ventilation�temperature�sensor,�right
31 Blower
32 Blower�output�stage
Kl.30 Terminal�30
Kl.30B Terminal�30�basic�operation
Kl.15N Ignition�(after-run)
75
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
16.�Heating/Air�Conditioning�Systems
16.4.�Microfilter
The�microfilter�is�installed�on�the�pressure�side�of�the�blower.�This�reduces�air�contaminants�in�both
fresh-air�and�air�recirculation�modes.�Evaporator�corrosion�and�the�build-up�of�odors�are�also�reduced.
Air�route�in�the�heating�and�air�conditioning�system�(air�recirculation�mode)
Index Explanation
1 Evaporator
2 Filter
3 Recirculated�air�flap
4 Blower
5 Recirculated�air�inlet�flap�(opened)
76
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
16.�Heating/Air�Conditioning�Systems
Air�route�in�the�heating�and�air�conditioning�system�(fresh-air�mode)
Index Explanation
1 Evaporator
2 Filter
3 Recirculated�air�flap
4 Blower
5 Recirculated�air�inlet�flap�(closed)
6 Fresh�air�inlet
The�one-part�microfilter�is�located�in�the�F30�behind�the�glove�box�and�can�be�easily�replaced�through
the�footwell�on�the�passenger�side.
77
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
16.�Heating/Air�Conditioning�Systems
Microfilter
Index Explanation
1 Microfilter
2 Filter�cover
78
Bayerische�Motorenwerke�Aktiengesellschaft
Qualifizierung�und�Training
Röntgenstraße�7
85716�Unterschleißheim,�Germany
Technical�training.
Product�information.
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
BMW�Service
General�information
Symbols�used
The�following�symbol�is�used�in�this�document�to�facilitate�better�comprehension�or�to�draw�attention
to�very�important�information:
Contains�important�safety�information�and�information�that�needs�to�be�observed�strictly�in�order�to
guarantee�the�smooth�operation�of�the�system.
Information�status�and�national-market�versions
BMW�Group�vehicles�meet�the�requirements�of�the�highest�safety�and�quality�standards.�Changes�in
requirements�for�environmental�protection,�customer�benefits�and�design�render�necessary�continu-
ous�development�of�systems�and�components.�Consequently,�there�may�be�discrepancies�between
the�contents�of�this�document�and�the�vehicles�available�in�the�training�course.
This�document�basically�relates�to�the�European�version�of�left-hand�drive�vehicles.�Some�operating
elements�or�components�are�arranged�differently�in�right-hand�drive�vehicles�than�shown�in�the�graph-
ics�in�this�document.�Further�differences�may�arise�as�a�result�of�the�equipment�specification�in�specif-
ic�markets�or�countries.
Additional�sources�of�information
Further�information�on�the�individual�topics�can�be�found�in�the�following:
• Owner's�Handbook
• Integrated�Service�Technical�Application.
Contact:�[email protected]
©2011�BMW�AG,�Munich,�Germany
Reprints�of�this�publication�or�its�parts�require�the�written�approval�of�BMW�AG,�Munich
The�information�contained�in�this�document�forms�an�integral�part�of�the�technical�training�of�the�BMW
Group�and�is�intended�for�the�trainer�and�participants�in�the�seminar.�Refer�to�the�latest�relevant�infor-
mation�systems�of�the�BMW�Group�for�any�changes/additions�to�the�technical�data.
Information�status:�September�2011
VH-23/International�Technical�Training
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
Contents
1. Introduction............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 1
1.1. Bus�overview................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 2
2. KAFAS................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................5
2.1. System�wiring�diagram................................................................................................................................................................................. 6
2.2. Operating�facility..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7
2.3. Lane�departure�warning.............................................................................................................................................................................. 8
2.4. Collision�warning.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8
2.4.1. Operation........................................................................................................................................................................................... 8
2.4.2. Operating�principle............................................................................................................................................................ 9
2.4.3. Warning�function................................................................................................................................................................... 9
2.5. Speed�Limit�Information......................................................................................................................................................................... 10
3. High-beam�Assistant........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 12
3.1. System�wiring�diagram,�high-beam�assistant�without�KAFAS�control�unit.............13
4. Lane�Change�Warning.....................................................................................................................................................................................................15
4.1. Operating�principle..........................................................................................................................................................................................15
4.2. System�wiring�diagram............................................................................................................................................................................. 16
4.3. Operation........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 17
4.4. Warning�function................................................................................................................................................................................................ 17
4.4.1. Information�level.................................................................................................................................................................17
4.4.2. Warning............................................................................................................................................................................................ 18
4.5. System�limits............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 18
5. TRSVC.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 19
5.1. Installation�locations..................................................................................................................................................................................... 19
5.2. System�wiring�diagram� ........................................................................................................................................................................... 21
5.3. Reversing�camera.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 22
5.3.1. System�wiring�diagram............................................................................................................................................23
5.3.2. Camera�replacement.................................................................................................................................................. 24
5.3.3. Installation�location....................................................................................................................................................... 25
5.4. Top�View.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 25
5.4.1. Operation.......................................................................................................................................................................................25
5.4.2. Display............................................................................................................................................................................................... 25
5.4.3. Camera�replacement.................................................................................................................................................. 26
5.5. Side�View........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 26
5.5.1. Operation.......................................................................................................................................................................................26
5.5.2. Display............................................................................................................................................................................................... 27
5.5.3. Camera�replacement.................................................................................................................................................. 27
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
Contents
6. Park�Distance�Control..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 28
6.1. System�wiring�diagram............................................................................................................................................................................. 29
7. Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant................................................................................................................................................................... 31
7.1. System�components.................................................................................................................................................................................... 31
7.1.1. System�wiring�diagram............................................................................................................................................33
7.1.2. Sensors............................................................................................................................................................................................ 34
7.1.3. Control�unit................................................................................................................................................................................ 35
7.2. Notes�for�Service............................................................................................................................................................................................... 36
8. DCC.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 38
9. Head-Up�Display....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 39
9.1. Operating�principle..........................................................................................................................................................................................39
9.2. Installation�location......................................................................................................................................................................................... 40
9.3. System�wiring�diagram............................................................................................................................................................................. 42
9.4. Operation........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 43
9.4.1. Switching�on/off..................................................................................................................................................................43
9.4.2. Settings............................................................................................................................................................................................43
9.5. Display................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 43
9.5.1. Recognizability�of�the�display....................................................................................................................... 44
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
1.�Introduction
BMW�has�long�since�offered�a�comprehensive�range�of�driver�assist�systems.�The�driver�assist�sys-
tems�facilitate�driving�of�the�vehicle�by
• Providing�the�driver�with�information
• Giving�the�driver�suggestions
• Automatically�intervening�in�the�driving�process.
This�section�contains�an�overview�of�all�driver�assist�systems�available�in�the�F30.�There�are�also�new
features�such�as�lane�change�warning.
The�centralization�of�many�control�units�in�the�FEM�and�REM.�However,�the�basic�principle�and�the
functions�of�the�driver�assist�systems�correspond�for�the�most�part�to�the�counterpart�systems�in�the
current�BMW�models.
For�further�information�on�the�individual�systems,�please�refer�to�the�training�material�for�the�F01/F02:
• DCC�F01/F02
• KAFAS�F01/F02.
1
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
1.�Introduction
1.1.�Bus�overview
F30�Bus�overview
2
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
1.�Introduction
Index Explanation
1 Control�units�with�wake-up�authorization
2 Start-up�node�control�units�for�starting�and�synchronizing�the�FlexRay�bus
system
ACSM Advanced�Crash�Safety�Module
AMPT Top-HiFi�amplifier
COMBOX Combox�(Combox�emergency�call,�Multimedia�Combox)
CON Controller
D-CAN Diagnosis-on-Controller�Area�Network
DME Digital�Engine�Electronics�(DME)
DSC Dynamic�Stability�Control
DVDC DVD�changer
EGS Electronic�transmission�control
EKPS Electronic�fuel�pump�control
EPS Electromechanical�Power�Steering
Ethernet Cable-based�data�network�technology�for�local�data�networks
FEM Front�Electronic�Module
FLA High-beam�assistant
FlexRay Fast,�preset�and�fault-tolerant�bus�system�for�use�in�automotive�sector
FZD Roof�function�center
GWS Gear�selector�lever
HEADUNIT/CIC Headunit�(Car�Information�Computer�or�Basic�headunit)
ICM Integrated�Chassis�Management
IHKA Integrated�automatic�heating�/�air�conditioning
K-CAN Body�controller�area�network
K-CAN2 Body�controller�area�network�2
KAFAS Camera-based�driver�assistance�systems
KOMBI Instrument�cluster�(MOST�only�with�option 6WA)
MOST Media�Oriented�System�Transport
OBD On-board�diagnosis�(diagnostic�socket)
PDC Park�Distance�Control�(with�option�5DP,�parking�manoeuvring�assistant:
integrated�in�the�parking�manoeuvring�assistant�control�unit,�otherwise
integrated�in�the�Rear�Electronic�Module�control�unit)
PMA Parking�manoeuvring�assistant
PT-CAN Powertrain�controller�area�network
PT-CAN2 Powertrain�controller�area�network�2
RAD Radio
3
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
1.�Introduction
Index Explanation
REM Rear�Electronic�Module
REMA�LI Reversible�electromotive�automatic�reel,�left�(not�US)
REMA�RE Reversible�electromotive�automatic�reel,�right�(not�US)
SMFA Seat�module,�driver
SWW Lane�change�warning
TPMS Tire�Pressure�Monitoring�System
TRSVC Control�unit�for�all-round�vision�camera
VDM Vertical�Dynamics�Management
ZGM Central�gateway�module
4
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
2.�KAFAS
The�following�camera-based�driver�support�systems�are�available�as�optional�equipment�in�the�F30:
• Lane�departure�warning�including�collision�warning�(option�5AD)
• Road�sign�recognition�(option 8TH�Speed�Limit�Information)
• High-beam�assistant�(FLA)�(option 5AC)
If�the�customer�chooses�exclusively�the�high-beam�assistant�(FLA)�from�the�optional�equipment�range,
the�system�is�implemented�with�its�own�FLA�video�camera�and�its�own�FLA�control�unit�electronics�in
the�inside�mirror.
5
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
2.�KAFAS
2.1.�System�wiring�diagram
F30�System�wiring�diagram,�KAFAS
6
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
2.�KAFAS
Index Explanation
1 Dynamic�Stability�Control�(DSC)
2 KAFAS�video�camera
3 Video�camera�heater
4 Power�distribution�box,�front
5 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
6 Central�information�display�(CID)
7 Headunit
8 Reversible�electromotive�automatic�reel,�right�REMABF�(not�US)
9 Integrated�Chassis�Management�(ICM)
10 Reversible�electromotive�automatic�reel,�left�REMAFA�(not�US)
11 Operating�facility,�light�switch
12 Operating�facility,�driver�assist�systems
13 Steering�column�switch�cluster�(SZL)
14 Instrument�cluster�(KOMBI)
15 Head-Up�Display�HUD
16 KAFAS�control�unit
Kl.15N Ignition�(after-run)
Kl.30F Terminal�30,�fault-dependent
2.2.�Operating�facility
F30�Operating�facility,�driver�assist�systems
Index Explanation
1 Lane�change�warning
2 Collision�warning
3 Lane�departure�warning
4 Head‐Up�Display�(HUD)�button�not�installed,�now�in�the�CIC�under
“Settings”�“Head-Up�Display”
7
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
2.�KAFAS
2.3.�Lane�departure�warning
The�lane�departure�warning�(option�5AD)�warns�the�driver�by�vibrations�in�the�steering�wheel�of�the�in-
advertent�departure�from�a�given�lane.�The�prerequisite�for�this�is�the�presence�of�suitable�roadway�or
lane�markings,�that�can�be�recognized�with�the�KAFAS�video�camera�of�the�control�unit.�The�KAFAS
video�camera�is�accommodated�in�the�mirror�base.
The�system�can�thus�support�the�driver�in�maintaining�his�attention.�The�responsibility�for�the�vehicle
remains�exclusively�with�the�driver.
The�system�is�designed�to�support�the�driver�on�highways�and�high-quality�country�roads.�Warnings
are�therefore�only�issued�at�speeds�greater�than�70�km/h�or�43�mph.
The�system�is�activated�or�deactivated�by�pressing�the�button�"Lane�change�warning"�in�the�operating
facility�of�the�driver�assist�systems:
• Activate:�LED�lights�up�over�the�button
• Deactivate:�LED�goes�out�over�the�button.
The�state�is�saved�for�the�ID�transmitter�currently�used.
You�can�obtain�more�information�on�the�lane�departure�warning�system�in�the�"KAFAS�F01/F02"�train-
ing�information.
The�system�cannot�replace�a�personal�assessment�of�the�roads�and�traffic�situation.�If�the�warning�is
issued,�do�not�respond�by�moving�the�steering�wheel�with�unnecessary�force�as�this�could�result�in
control�over�the�vehicle�being�lost.
2.4.�Collision�warning
The�collision�warning�for�equipment�without�ACC�is�an�integral�part�of�the�lane�departure�warning�sys-
tem�(option�5AD)�and�warns�the�driver�of�a�possible�risk�of�collision.�The�collision�warning�is�realized
with�help�of�the�KAFAS�system.
2.4.1.�Operation
The�system�is�activated�or�deactivated�by�pressing�the�button�"Collision�warning"�in�the�operating�fa-
cility�of�the�driver�assist�systems:
• Activate:�LED�lights�up�over�the�button
• Deactivate:�LED�goes�out�over�the�button.
The�state�is�saved�for�the�ID�transmitter�currently�used.
A�display�on�the�CID�is�opened�upon�activation�of�the�function.�Here�the�driver�can�configure�the�time
of�the�early�warning�in�two�stages,�or�deactivate�and�reactivate�the�early�warning.�The�state�is�saved�for
the�ID�transmitter�currently�used.
8
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
2.�KAFAS
2.4.2.�Operating�principle
The�system�warns�of�a�possible�collision�from�a�speed�of�approx.�15�km/h�or�10�mph�in�two�stages.
The�KAFAS�video�camera�records�the�scenery�ahead�of�the�vehicle�and�uses�image�processing�to�de-
tect�vehicles�and�stationary�objects�in�the�field�of�view.�The�corresponding�warning�stages�are�output
in�critical�situations�on�the�basis�of�the�calculated�positions,�distances�and�relative�speeds�of�the�oth-
er�vehicles.�In�addition�to�the�warnings,�the�vehicle's�brakes�are�prepared�for�emergency�braking�in�the
event�of�an�acute�warning.�In�contrast�to�forward�collision�warning�with�braking�function,�there�is,�how-
ever,�no�brake�intervention�by�the�system.
When�an�object�is�deliberately�approached/driven�into,�the�collision�warning�is�issued�later�so�as�to
avoid�unauthorized�warnings.
2.4.3.�Warning�function
The�warning�function�corresponds�to�the�collision�warning�with�brake�function.�The�warning�function�is
divided�into�two�stages.�It�is�displayed�in�the�instrument�cluster.
Collision�warning�display�in�the�instrument�cluster
Early�warning
The�early�warning�is�issued�for�example�in�the�event�of�an�approaching�risk�of�collision�or�if�the�vehicle
is�very�close�to�the�vehicle�in�front.
The�early�warning�is�indicated�by�a�vehicle�permanently�illuminated�in�red�in�the�instrument�cluster.
The�time�of�the�early�warning�can�be�configured�in�the�CID.
Acute�warning
The�acute�warning�is�issued�in�the�event�of�an�immediate�risk�of�collision�when�the�vehicle�is�approach-
ing�another�object�at�a�relatively�high�differential�speed.�The�acute�warning�cannot�be�deactivated.
An�acute�warning�is�indicated�to�the�driver�by�a�red�flashing�vehicle�in�the�instrument�cluster.�In�addi-
tion,�an�acoustic�warning�signal�is�sounded.�The�acute�warning�is�a�prompt�for�braking�intervention�and
if�necessary�for�an�evasive�maneuver.
The�acute�warning�does�not�relieve�the�driver�of�their�responsibility�to�adapt�their�driving�speed�and
driving�style�to�the�road�and�traffic�conditions.
9
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
2.�KAFAS
System�limitations�mean�that�warnings�may�under�certain�circumstances�not�be�issued�or�are�issued
too�late�or�without�authorization.�The�driver�must�therefore�always�remain�alert�and�observant�so�that
they�can�actively�intervene�at�any�time�so�as�to�avoid�the�risk�of�an�accident.
2.5.�Speed�Limit�Information
The�Speed�Limit�Detection�system�is�introduced�for�the�first�time�to�the�US�market�with�the�launch�of
the�F30�in�2012.�The�option�8TH�Speed�Limit�Information�is�only�available�in�combination�with�ZDA
option.
Note:�The�Driver�Assistance�(ZDA)�option�is�necessary�because�it�includes�the�KAFAS�control
unit.�The�KAFAS�system�also�incorporates�LDW,�SLI,�Front�Collision�Warning�and�High�Beam
Assistant.
The�current�posted�speed�limit�signs�are�displayed�in�the�instrument�cluster�and�in�the�Head-Up�Dis-
play�in�order�to�remind�the�driver�not�to�exceed�the�legal�speed�limit.�Speed�Limit�Information�function
works�in�combination�with�the�Navigation�system�(option�609).
Note:�Remember�that�the�driver�assumes�full�responsibility�for�the�vehicle�and�the�speed�at
which�it�is�operated�at�all�times.
The�control�unit�for�the�Speed�Limit�Information�function�is�the�KAFAS�control�unit.
The�KAFAS�video�camera�monitors�the�road�signs�at�the�side�of�the�road�and�takes�into�account�the
information�from�the�Navigation�system�(when�necessary).�The�display�of�the�top�speed�limit�signs�is
based�on�the�evaluation�of�data�from�the�navigation�system�and�the�evaluation�of�image�data�recorded
by�the�KAFAS�video�camera.
The�KAFAS�unit�will�request�the�speed�limit�information�from�the�Navigation�only�if�there�are�no�speed
limit�signs�detected.�If�the�data�is�not�available�3�dashes�will�be�displayed.
The�maximum�speed�allowed�of�the�road�currently�driven�is�displayed�in�the�instrument�cluster�and�in
the�Head-Up�Display.�If�the�vehicle�does�not�have�HUD,�the�end�user�can�display�the�speed�limit�info�by
using�the�BC�button.�This�is�similar�to�how�the�mpg�or�miles�to�empty�is�displayed�(in�the�same�cluster
display).�If�the�vehicle�has�HUD,�then�it�has�to�be�activated�in�the�HUD�menu�via�iDrive.�It�is�important�to
note�here�that�the�option�8TH�Speed�Limit�Information�pertains�only�to�the�maximum�or�top�speed�lim-
it�posted�on�the�highway.�This�has�nothing�to�do�with�ACC�or�the�speed�limit�warning�which�can�be�set
via�the�iDrive.
10
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
2.�KAFAS
Option�8TH�Speed�Limit�Information�displayed�in�HUD
Option�8TH�Speed�Limit�Information�displayed�in�Kombi
The�system�cannot�replace�the�driver's�personal�assessment�of�the�road�and�traffic�situation.�Speed
Limit�Information�supports�the�driver�and�does�not�replace�the�human�eye.
This�system�was�specially�adapted�to�the�US�market�to�recognize�road�speed�signs�only�and�thus�will
not�recognize�stop�signs,�yield�signs�or�any�other�signs.
11
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
3.�High-beam�Assistant
The�high-beam�assistant�FLA�(option�5AC)�assists�the�customer�in�the�use�of�the�high-beam�head-
lights.�Depending�on�the�traffic�situation,�the�prevailing�ambient�light�conditions�and�which�lights�on
the�vehicle�have�been�switched�on,�the�FLA�switches�on�the�high-beam�headlights�automatically�and
thereby�relieves�the�driver�of�having�to�switch�on�the�high-beam�headlight�manually.
The�high-beam�headlight�can�still�be�switched�on�and�off�manually�as�usual.�The�driver�always�has�the
capability,�and�indeed�the�obligation,�to�override�the�system�whenever�the�situation�requires�it.
The�high-beam�assistant�is�only�activated�in�the�F30�if�the�light�switch�is�in�the�switch�position�"A".
The�identification�of�other�road�users�for�automatic�dipping�of�the�high-beam�headlight�is�effected�with
help�of�a�video�camera.�The�video�camera�or�control�used�depends�on�whether�other�KAFAS�system
components�are�installed:
• In�the�combination�with�a�lane�departure�warning�,�the�high-beam�assistant�function�is�realized
with�the�KAFAS�video�camera�and�the�KAFAS�control�unit.
• If�the�customer�only�selects�the�high-beam�assistant�option,�this�functionality�is�implemented
with�a�separate�FLA�video�camera�and�a�separate�FLA�control�unit.�The�video�camera�and�the
control�unit�are�installed�in�a�shared�housing�in�the�inside�mirror.
The�FLA�video�camera�is�a�simplified�image�sensor�that�can�identify�the�color�and�intensity�of�light.
For�more�information�on�the�high-beam�assistant�system,�please�refer�to�the�"KAFAS�F01/F02"�train-
ing�information.
The�high-beam�assistant�cannot�replace�a�personal�decision�on�the�use�of�the�high-beam�headlight.�In
some�situations,�manual�dipping�is�required�as�otherwise�there�is�a�safety�risk.
12
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
3.�High-beam�Assistant
3.1.�System�wiring�diagram,�high-beam�assistant�without�KAFAS
control�unit
F30�System�wiring�diagram,�high-beam�assistant�without�KAFAS�control�unit
13
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
3.�High-beam�Assistant
Index Explanation
1 FLA�video�camera�and�FLA�control�unit�in�the�inside�mirror
2 Power�distribution�box,�front
3 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
4 Operating�facility,�light�switch
5 Steering�column�switch�cluster�(SZL)
6 Instrument�cluster�(KOMBI)
Kl.15N Ignition�(after-run)
Kl.30F Terminal�30,�fault-dependent
The�system�wiring�diagram�for�the�high-beam�assistant�function�with�KAFAS�is�included�in�the�KAFAS
system�wiring�diagram�in�this�training�information.
14
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
4.�Lane�Change�Warning
The�lane�change�warning�(option�5AG)�informs�the�driver�at�speeds�above�50�km/h�or�31�mph�of�possi-
ble�collisions�in�the�event�of�a�lane�change.
4.1.�Operating�principle
Two�24�GHz�radar�sensors�located�under�the�rear�bumper�monitor�at�speeds�above�50�km/h�or�31�mph
the�space�behind�and�beside�the�vehicle.�The�radar�sensors�are�largely�weather-dependent�and�can
reliably�identify�vehicles�up�to�a�distance�of�approx.�60�m.�In�the�blind�spot�range,�the�radar�sensors�for
the�lane�change�warning�identify�other�vehicles�on�the�Neighboring�lane�up�to�roughly�the�center�of
own�vehicle.
Typical�traffic�situation�for�lane�change�warning
Index Explanation
1 Approaching�vehicle�in�the�left�neighboring�lane
2 Vehicle�in�the�left�neighboring�lane�driving�at�the�same�speed
3 Own�vehicle�planning�to�change�lane�to�the�left
4 Identification�range�of�the�lane�change�warning�in�the�area�of�the�blind�spot
(left/right)
5 Faster�vehicle�in�the�neighboring�lane�to�the�right
6 Identification�range�of�the�lane�change�warning�behind�the�F30
15
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
4.�Lane�Change�Warning
4.2.�System�wiring�diagram
F30�System�wiring�diagram�for�lane�change�warning
16
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
4.�Lane�Change�Warning
Index Explanation
1 Rain-light-solar-condensation�sensor�(RLSBS)
2 Power�distribution�box,�front
3 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
4 Light�in�the�exterior�mirror�on�front�passenger�side
5 Trailer�module�AHM�(not�US)
6 Power�distribution�box,�luggage�compartment
7 Lane�change�warning�radar�sensor,�SWW�master�control�unit
8 Lane�change�warning�radar�sensor,�slave�control�unit�SWW2
9 Integrated�Chassis�Management�(ICM)
10 Switch�block�for�driver's�side�door
11 Light�in�the�exterior�mirror�on�driver's�side
12 Operating�facility�for�driver�assist�systems
13 Instrument�cluster�(KOMBI)
14 Steering�column�switch�cluster�(SZL)
Kl.15N Ignition�(after-run)
Kl.30B Terminal�30�basic�operation
4.3.�Operation
The�system�is�activated�or�deactivated�by�pressing�the�button�"Lane�change�warning"�in�the�operating
facility�of�the�driver�assistant�systems:
• Activate:�LED�lights�up�over�the�button
• Deactivate:�LED�goes�out�over�the�button.
The�state�is�saved�for�the�ID�transmitter�currently�used.
4.4.�Warning�function
4.4.1.�Information�level
The�LED�warning�light�in�the�mirror�housing�displays�if�vehicles�are�in�the�blind�spot�or�are�approaching
from�behind.
17
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
4.�Lane�Change�Warning
LED�warning�light�in�the�mirror�housing
4.4.2.�Warning
If�the�turn�indicator�is�set,�while�a�vehicle�is�in�the�critical�area,�the�steering�wheel�vibrates�temporarily
and�the�light�in�the�mirror�housing�flashes�brightly.�The�warning�ends�if�the�turn�indicator�is�reset�to�the
initial�position�or�the�other�vehicle�leaves�the�critical�area.
4.5.�System�limits
The�system�cannot�replace�the�driver's�personal�assessment�of�the�road�and�traffic�situation.
If�warnings�are�issued,�do�not�respond�by�moving�the�steering�wheel�with�unnecessary�force�as�this
could�result�in�control�over�the�vehicle�being�lost.
The�function�can�be�restricted�in�the�following�situations�for�example:
• Sharp�bends�or�on�narrow�roadways
• Heavy�fog,�rain�or�snow
• Dirty�or�frozen�bumper
• Labels�are�attached�to�the�bumper
• The�speed�of�the�approaching�vehicle�is�a�great�deal�higher�than�own�speed.
18
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
5.�TRSVC
Surround�View�provides�support�for�parking,�manoeuvring�and�for�complex�exits�and�junctions.�In�the
F30�the�Surround�View�optional�equipment�(option 5DL)�is�only�available�in�conjunction�with�the�fol-
lowing�optional�equipment�(option 3AG,�option 430�and�option 508).
The�Surround�View�optional�equipment�comprises�the�following�systems:
• Reversing�camera
• Side�View
• Top�View.
Top�View�and�Side�View�are�part�of�the�Surround�View�(option 5DL)�optional�equipment�and�are�not
available�individually.�The�reversing�camera�can�be�ordered�separately�as�optional�equipment�(option
3AG).
The�video�cameras�are�connected�to�the�TRSVC�control�unit�via�4-pole�low-voltage�differential�sig-
nalling�lines.�The�control�unit�is�connected�to�the�FEM�via�K-CAN.
The�TRSVC�control�unit�in�integrated�in�the�dashboard.
There�are�two�variants�of�the�TRSVC�control�unit:
• Control�unit�with�a�connection�for�reversing�camera
• Control�unit�with�five�connections.
The�Surround�View�(SA5DL)�optional�equipment�with�five�video�cameras�requires�the�control�unit�with
five�connections.�If�only�one�reversing�camera�(option�3AG)�without�Surround�View�(option�5DL)�is�in-
stalled,�a�control�unit�with�one�connection�is�used.
5.1.�Installation�locations
Installation�places�of�TRSVC�components
19
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
5.�TRSVC
Index Explanation
1 Bumper�camera
2 TRSVC�control�unit
3 Exterior�mirror�camera
4 Reversing�camera
20
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
5.�TRSVC
5.2.�System�wiring�diagram
System�wiring�diagram�for�Surround�View
21
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
5.�TRSVC
Index Explanation
1 Bumper�camera,�right
2 Bumper�camera,�left
3 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
4 Exterior�mirror�camera,�right
5 Rear�Electronic�Module�(REM)
6 Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant�(PMA)_�control�unit�(only�vehicles�with�option
5DP�Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant)
7 Power�distribution�box,�luggage�compartment
8 Reversing�camera
9 Parking�assistance�button�in�the�center�console
10 Integrated�Chassis�Management�(ICM)
11 Headunit
12 Central�Information�Display�(CID)
13 TRSVC�control�unit
14 Exterior�mirror�camera,�left
Kl.15N Ignition�(after-run)
5.3.�Reversing�camera
The�reversing�camera�(option�3AG)�supports�the�driver�in�parking�and�manoeuvring.�The�reversing
camera�is�only�available�in�connection�with�the�Park�Distance�Control�PDC�(option�508).
The�image�from�the�reversing�camera�is�displayed�with�additional�extension�lines�in�the�CID.
22
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
5.�TRSVC
5.3.1.�System�wiring�diagram
System�wiring�diagram,�reversing�camera
23
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
5.�TRSVC
Index Explanation
1 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
2 Rear�Electronic�Module�(REM)
3 Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant�(PMA)�control�unit�(only�vehicles�with�option
5DP�Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant)
4 Power�distribution�box,�luggage�compartment
5 Reversing�camera
5 Parking�assistance�button�in�the�center�console
7 Integrated�Chassis�Management�(ICM)
8 Headunit
9 Central�Information�Display�(CID)
10 TRSVC�control�unit
Kl.15N Ignition�(after-run)
5.3.2.�Camera�replacement
These�must�be�taught�in�after�the�reversing�camera�is�replaced.�The�reversing�camera�of�the�F30�does
not�need�to�be�calibrated�after�teaching-in,�as�it�is�self-calibrating.�The�calibration�is�effected�during�the
journey�by�the�TRSVC�control�unit�by�means�of�a�steering�angle�sensor�and�known�road�markings.�Cal-
ibration�compensates�for�installation�tolerances�by�shifting�and�rotating�the�image.
The�maximum�time�required�for�a�full�calibration�is�five�hours.�A�Check�Control�message�is�displayed�in
the�CID�if�the�reversing�camera�could�not�be�successfully�calibrated.�Reasons�for�failed�calibration�may
be�incorrect�installation,�dirt�contamination�or�a�defect�with�the�reversing�camera.�The�reversing�cam-
era�is�also�constantly�readjusted�after�a�full�calibration�in�order�to�ensure�an�optimum�image.
The�opening�angle�of�the�reversing�camera's�lens�is�130°.
24
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
5.�TRSVC
5.3.3.�Installation�location
Installation�location,�reversing�camera
Index Explanation
1 Reversing�camera
5.4.�Top�View
Top�View�provides�support�when�parking�and�manoeuvring.�For�this�the�door�and�road�area�of�the�vehi-
cle�is�shown�on�the�CID.
The�Top�View�function�is�realized�with�the�reversing�camera�and�the�two�exterior�mirror�cameras.
The�opening�angle�of�the�lens�of�the�exterior�mirror�camera,�which�is�installed�in�the�two�exterior�mir-
rors,�is�173°.
5.4.1.�Operation
The�operation�is�effected�similar�to�the�reversing�camera.�The�function�is�automatically�switched�on�if
the�reverse�gear�is�engaged�when�the�engine�is�running.�The�images�of�the�exterior�mirror�camera�and
PDC�are�shown�when�the�system�has�been�switched�on�via�iDrive.�The�system�automatically�switch-
es�off�after�20 m�travelled�or�a�speed�above�20�km/h�or�12�mph.�The�function�can�also�be�manually
switched�on�and�off�via�the�PDC�button.
5.4.2.�Display
The�images�of�the�reversing�camera�and�the�exterior�mirror�camera�are�shown�on�the�CID.�In�addition,
the�turning�circle�lines�and�driving�lane�lines�known�from�the�reversing�camera�view�are�also�shown.
25
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
5.�TRSVC
Also�check�the�traffic�situation�around�the�vehicle�by�looking�directly.�Otherwise�there�is�a�risk�of�acci-
dents�for�example�from�road�users�or�objects�that�lie�outside�the�image�range�of�the�camera.
5.4.3.�Camera�replacement
These�must�be�taught�in�after�the�exterior�mirror�camera�is�replaced.�The�exterior�mirror�camera�of�the
F30�does�not�need�to�be�calibrated�after�teaching-in,�as�it�is�self-calibrating.�The�calibration�is�effected
during�the�journey�by�the�TRSVC�control�unit.�Installation�tolerances�are�compensated�by�the�calibra-
tion.
5.5.�Side�View
Side�View�makes�possible�an�early�view�of�the�transverse�traffic�at�complex�exits�and�junctions.
Two�bumper�cameras,�which�are�installed�in�the�wheel�arches�of�the�front�bumper,�record�the�traffic
space�at�the�front�side.�The�two�video�images�of�these�bumper�cameras�are�shown�at�the�same�time
on�the�CID�(split�screen�display).�Extension�lines�on�the�lower�edge�of�the�image�show�the�position�of
the�front�of�the�vehicle.
The�bumper�camera�is�a�common�part�for�the�exterior�mirror�camera�with�another�lens.�The�opening
angle�of�the�lens�is�55°.
5.5.1.�Operation
To�activate�the�function�press�the�Side�View�button�of�the�controller.�To�deactivate�press�the�button
again.�At�speeds�above�20�km/h�or�12�mph�the�Side�View�function�is�automatically�deactivated.
Side�View�button
Index Explanation
1 Side�View�button
26
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
5.�TRSVC
5.5.2.�Display
F30�screen�Side�View�on�the�CID
Index Explanation
1 Split�Screen�display�of�the�bumper�cameras
2 Screen�display�of�the�bumper�camera,�left
3 Screen�display�of�the�bumper�camera,�right
4 Projected�front�of�vehicle�in�the�left�view
5 Projected�front�of�vehicle�in�the�right�view
Objects�may�be�outside�the�range�of�the�bumper�camera.
For�this�reason,�also�check�the�traffic�situation�at�exits�in�complex�locations�by�taking�a�direct�look.
5.5.3.�Camera�replacement
These�must�be�taught�in�after�the�bumper�camera�is�replaced.�The�bumper�camera�of�the�F30�does
not�need�to�be�calibrated�after�teaching-in,�as�it�is�self-calibrating.�The�calibration�is�effected�during�the
journey�by�the�TRSVC�control�unit.�Installation�tolerances�are�compensated�by�the�calibration.
27
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
6.�Park�Distance�Control
Park�Distance�Control�(PDC)�assists�the�driver�when�manoeuvring�in�and�out�of�a�parking�space.�The
current�distance�from�an�obstruction�is�indicated�by�acoustic�signals�and�on�a�visual�display.�PDC�is
available�in�the�F30�in�two�variants:
• The�PDC�front�and�rear�(option�508)�utilizes�the�measured�data�from�four�ultrasonic�sensors
on�both�the�front�and�rear�bumpers.
For�vehicles�with�Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant�(option�5DP)�the�PDC�sensors�are�evaluated�by�the
PMA�control�unit�and�not�the�REM.
The�PDC�is�activated�by�engaging�the�reverse�gear�or�by�operation�of�the�PDC�button�next�to�the�gear
selector�switch.
The�driver�obtains�the�results�of�the�distance�measurement�and�the�distance�warning�acoustically�via
the�speaker�system�and�optically�via�the�display�in�the�CID.
Further�information�on�the�PDC�can�be�found�in�the�training�information�titled�"PDC,�TRSVC�F01/F02".
The�PDC�cannot�replace�the�driver's�personal�judgement�of�the�traffic�situation.�Also�check�the�traffic
situation�by�taking�a�look�around�the�vehicle.�Otherwise�there�is�a�risk�of�accidents�occurring,�due�to
other�road�users�or�objects�that�are�outside�the�detection�range�of�the�PDC�for�example.�Loud�sound
sources�outside�and�inside�the�vehicle�could�drown�out�the�PDC�signal.
28
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
6.�Park�Distance�Control
6.1.�System�wiring�diagram
System�wiring�diagram,�PDC
29
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
6.�Park�Distance�Control
Index Explanation
1 Ultrasonic�sensors,�front
2 Electronic�transmission�control�(EGS)�(automatic�transmission)
3 Reversing�switch�(manual�gearbox)
4 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
5 Rear�Electronic�Module�(REM)
6 Ultrasonic�sensors,�rear
7 Parking�assistance�button�in�the�center�console
8 Integrated�Chassis�Management�(ICM)
9 Headunit
10 Central�information�display�(CID)
11 Instrument�cluster�(KOMBI)
30
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
7.�Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant
In�the�F30�the�Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant�(PMA)�is�available�as�optional�equipment�(option�5DP)�in
association�with�the�optional�equipment�Park�Distance�Control�front�and�rear�(option�508).
The�Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant�facilitates�parking�in�gaps�between�cars�parallel�to�the�roadway.�In
the�case�of�straight�forwards�travel�up�to�approx.�35�km/h�or�22�mph,�parking�spaces�are�measured�re-
gardless�if�the�PMA�is�activated�or�deactivated.�As�soon�as�a�parking�space�that�is�approx.�1.2�m�longer
than�the�vehicle�length�is�found and�the�system�is�already�activated,�this�space�is�shown�to�the�driver
on�CID.�Later�on�in�the�parking�process,�the�Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant�takes�over�the�steering,
with�the�driver�remaining�responsible�for�the�acceleration�and�braking�of�the�vehicle.�With�instructions
and�if�applicable�additional�acoustic�acknowledgements,�the�driver�is�guided�through�the�parking�pro-
cedure.
The�Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant�does�not�relieve�the�driver�of�personal�responsibility�during�park-
ing.
Directly�monitor�gaps�and�the�parking�procedure�and�intervene�if�necessary,�as�otherwise�there�is�a
risk�of�accidents.
7.1.�System�components
F30�System�components�of�the�Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant�(PMA)
31
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
7.�Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant
Index Explanation
1 Ultrasonic�sensors�of�Park�Distance�Control
2 Digital�Engine�Electronics�(DME)
3 Central�information�display�(CID)
4 Car�Information�Computer
5 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
6 Controller
7 Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant�(PMA)
8 Rear�Electronic�Module�(REM)
9 Integrated�Chassis�Management�(ICM)
10 Operating�facility,�center�console
11 Steering�column�switch�cluster
12 Instrument�cluster�(KOMBI)
13 Electromechanical�power�steering
14 Dynamic�Stability�Control�(DSC)
15 Ultrasonic�sensor�of�PMA�in�wheel�arch
32
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
7.�Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant
7.1.1.�System�wiring�diagram
F30�System�wiring�diagram�for�Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant
33
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
7.�Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant
Index Explanation
1 Dynamic�Stability�Control�(DSC)
2 Ultrasonic�sensor�of�Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant�in�wheel�arch
3 Ultrasonic�sensors,�Park�Distance�Control,�front
4 Electronic�Power�Steering�(electromechanical�power�steering)�EPS
5 Reversing�switch�(manual�gearbox)
6 Electronic�transmission�control�(EGS)�(automatic�transmission)
7 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
8 Power�distribution�box,�luggage�compartment
9 Rear�Electronic�Module�(REM)
10 Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant�(PMA)
11 Trailer�module�(AHM)
12 Ultrasonic�sensors,�Park�Distance�Control,�rear
13 Parking�assistance�button�in�the�center�console
14 Integrated�Chassis�Management�(ICM)
15 Headunit
16 Central�information�display�(CID)
17 Steering�column�switch�cluster�(SZL)
18 Instrument�cluster�(KOMBI)
Kl.15N Ignition�(after-run)
7.1.2.�Sensors
The�two�ultrasonic�sensors�for�the�PMA�are�integrated�in�the�front�wheel�arches.
The�function�of�the�two�ultrasonic�sensors�is�similar�to�that�of�the�PDC.�Ultrasonic�pulses�are�transmit-
ted�and�echo�signals�are�received.�The�signals�are�evaluated�by�the�PMA.�The�length�and�width�of�the
gap�is�calculated�from�the�distance�travelled�data�from�the�DSC.
In�the�F30�the�ultrasonic�sensors�for�the�Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant�are�connected�individually�to
the�PMA.
34
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
7.�Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant
F30�Installation�location�of�ultrasonic�sensor�for�Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant
Index Explanation
1 Ultrasonic�sensor�for�Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant
7.1.3.�Control�unit
The�control�unit�for�the�Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant�is�the�PMA.�The�PMA�is�located�in�the�luggage
compartment�behind�the�side�trim�panel.�It�evaluates�signals�from�the�sensor�and�thus�identifies�pos-
sible�parking�gaps.�It�also�calculates�the�optimum�path�into�a�gap�and�monitors�the�parking�process.�In
addition,�it�controls�the�electromechanical�steering�via�the�ICM.
35
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
7.�Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant
F30�Installation�location�of�PMA
7.2.�Notes�for�Service
After�the�PMA�or�an�ultrasonic�sensor�has�been�replaced�no�start-up�is�necessary.�However,�the�PMA
checks�with�every�start-up�procedure�whether�the�sensor�software�is�compatible�with�the�control�unit
software.�If�this�is�not�compatible,�a�corresponding�fault�code�is�set�in�the�PMA�control�unit.�In�this
case�the�service�function�"update�software�of�ultrasonic�sensors"�must�be�performed.
The�PMA�itself�monitors�faults�and�if�required�makes�the�corresponding�fault�code�entries.�In�excep-
tional�cases,�this�is�not�always�possible.�Thus�the�control�unit�cannot�determine�if�the�ultrasonic�sen-
sors�(including�of�the�sealing�ring)�are�incorrectly�installed�or�connected,�of�if�there�is�damage�in�the
vicinity�of�the�ultrasonic�sensors.�This�can�lead�to�customer�complaints�without�fault�entries:
• Small�gaps�are�rarely�identified
• During�parking,�the�vehicle�drives�too�close�or�far�away�from�the�vehicle�in�front
• The�vehicle�is�either�too�far�away,�too�close�or�against�the�kerb�after�the�parking�procedure
• The�vehicle�is�parked�in�the�gap�at�an�angle.
In�this�case�it�must�be�ensured�that�the�ultrasonic�sensors�are�correctly�installed�and�the�possibility�of
damage�of�the�bumper�panel�in�the�vicinity�of�the�ultrasonic�sensors�must�be�excluded.
36
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
7.�Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant
The�Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant�relieves�the�driver�in�two�ways.�On�the�one�hand,�from�the�task�of
having�to�estimate�the�size�of�the�gap�and�on�the�basis�of�this�estimate�of�deciding�whether�the�gap�is
large�enough.�On�the�other�hand,�from�the�task�of�having�to�steer�into�the�gap�itself.�The�vehicle�is�di-
rected�solely�by�the�driver.�When�looking�for�a�parking�space�and�during�the�actual�parking�process,�all
relevant�information�is�made�available�to�the�driver�via�the�PDC�picture�in�an�integrated�screen�mask.
This�includes:
• Results�of�the�parking�space�measurement
• Status�of�the�Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant�and�corresponding�handling�information
• Distances�to�other�objects.
This�makes�it�especially�easy�to�monitor�the�parking�procedure�and�at�the�same�time�to�check�the�ac-
celeration.
37
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
8.�DCC
The�cruise�control�with�braking�function�has�been�used�in�many�BMW�models�since�the�BMW�3�Series
(E9x).�It�is�also�referred�to�as�"Dynamic�Cruise�Control"�(DCC).�It�relieves�the�burden�on�the�driver�on
quiet�roads�by�maintaining�a�constant�speed�regardless�of�the�resistance�to�vehicle�motion�(gradient,
payload).�The�driver�is�still�responsible�for�driving�the�vehicle�when�using�this�support.�The�driver�can
override�the�DCC�function�at�any�time�by�braking�or�accelerating.
The�operation�is�effected�via�a�keypad�in�the�left�steering�wheel�spoke.�The�current�speed�is�saved
by�pressing�the�SET�button.�The�speed�is�increased�or�reduced�by�1�km/h�or�.6�mph�by�touching�the
rocker�switch.�Each�time�the�rocker�switch�is�pressed�above�the�pressure�point�the�speed�is�increased
or�reduced�by�10�km/h�or�6�mph
DCC�constantly�maintains�a�selected�speed�from�approx.�30�km/h�or�18�mph
The�brakes�are�activated�during�steep�downhill�driving�if�sufficient�deceleration�is�not�achieved�by�en-
gine�drag�torque�alone.
In�the�F30�the�cruise�control�with�braking�function�is�implemented�in�the�ICM�control�unit.
38
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
9.�Head-Up�Display
The�name�"Head-Up"�describes�the�principle�benefit�of�this�system.�The�Head-Up�Display�(HUD)
projects�a�virtual�image�into�the�driver's�field�of�view.
The�Head-Up�Display�(option�610)�offers�the�driver�the�option�of�viewing�all�information�relevant�for
driving�directly�in�the�field�of�view�freely�floating�over�the�roadway.
the�Head-Up�Display�used�in�the�F30�can�project�the�colors�red,�green�and�blue�and�by�mixing�these
colors�enables�the�projection�of�image�content�in�all�colors�of�the�red/green/blue�spectrum.�The�HUD
is�not�a�slave�in�the�K-CAN�in�the�F30,�but�has�no�data�bus�systems.�The�HUD�receives�the�control�sig-
nals�and�the�image�content�from�the�instrument�cluster�via�an�APIX�interface.�The�power�supply�of�the
HUD�is�also�effected�in�the�F30�by�the�instrument�cluster.
9.1.�Operating�principle
The�HUD�is�similar�to�a�projector.�A�light�source�is�required�to�project�the�HUD�information.�Using�15
white�LEDs�the�information�is�shown�on�a�one�color,�transparent�red/green/blue�1.8"�display.�The�reso-
lution�is�480x240�pixels.�The�image�obtained�is�projected�into�the�area�of�vision�of�the�driver�using�sev-
eral�deflection�mirrors�and�the�windshield.
HUD�operating�principle
39
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
9.�Head-Up�Display
Index Explanation
1 Light�source
2 Lens
3 TFT�projection�display
4 Plane�mirror
5 Curved�mirror
6 Windshield
7 Observer's�point�of�vision
8 Projected�image
The�screen�mask�appears�freely�floating�over�the�roadway.
F30�HUD�screen�mask
A�special�windshield�is�required�for�the�system,�whose�form�enables�precise�representation.�A�wedge-
shaped�windshield�prevents�the�illustration�of�double�images.�If�the�standard�windshield�was�used,
double�images�would�be�displayed.
9.2.�Installation�location
The�head-up�display�is�fitted�above�the�steering�column,�immediately�behind�the�instrument�cluster.�It
is�secured�to�the�bulkhead�supporting�structure�using�three�screws.
40
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
9.�Head-Up�Display
F30�Installation�location�of�HUD
Index Explanation
1 Screw
2 Head-Up�Display�(HUD)
3 Carrier�bracket
41
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
9.�Head-Up�Display
9.3.�System�wiring�diagram
System�wiring�diagram�of�Head-Up�Display
42
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
9.�Head-Up�Display
Index Explanation
1 Head-Up�Display�(HUD)
2 Power�distribution�box,�front
3 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
4 Controller�(CON)
5 Headunit
6 Central�Information�Display�(CID)
7 Instrument�cluster�(KOMBI)
Kl.30B Terminal�30�basic�operation
9.4.�Operation
9.4.1.�Switching�on/off
The�system�is�activated�or�deactivated�by�accessing�Settings�then�"Head-Up�Display"�in�the�CIC�:
• Activate:�with�tick�mark
• Deactivate:�tick�mark�removed.
9.4.2.�Settings
The�following�settings�can�be�changed�using�the�controller:
• Head-Up�Display�ON/OFF
• Brightness�of�display
• Rotation�of�display
• Height�of�display
• Displayed�information.
9.5.�Display
The�changeover�of�day�design�to�night�design�is�the�same�for�the�display�in�the�instrument�cluster.
The�following�content�can�be�displayed:
• Speed
• Speed�setting�control�of�DCC
• Collision�warning
• Navigation�system
• Check�Control�messages
43
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
9.�Head-Up�Display
• Speed�limit�information
• Lane�departure�warning.
• Entertainment�lists.
With�the�exception�of�the�current�vehicle�speed�and�the�driver�assist�warning�messages,�the�informa-
tion�displayed�can�be�deselected�by�the�controller.
9.5.1.�Recognizability�of�the�display
The�recognizability�of�the�displays�in�the�Head-Up�Display�is�influenced�by:
• The�seat�position
• Objects�on�the�cover�of�the�Head-Up�Display
• Sunglasses�with�certain�polarizing�filters
• Wet�roadway
• Inadequate�lighting�conditions.
If�the�image�is�displayed�blurred,�the�basic�setting�should�be�checked.
44
Bayerische�Motorenwerke�Aktiengesellschaft
Händlerqualifizierung�und�Training
Röntgenstraße�7
85716�Unterschleißheim,�Germany
Technical�training.
Product�information.
F30�Displays,�Indicators�and�Controls
BMW�Service
General�information
Symbols�used
The�following�symbol�is�used�in�this�document�to�facilitate�better�comprehension�or�to�draw�attention
to�very�important�information:
Contains�important�safety�information�and�information�that�needs�to�be�observed�strictly�in�order�to
guarantee�the�smooth�operation�of�the�system.
Information�status�and�national-market�versions
BMW�Group�vehicles�meet�the�requirements�of�the�highest�safety�and�quality�standards.�Changes�in
requirements�for�environmental�protection,�customer�benefits�and�design�render�necessary�continu-
ous�development�of�systems�and�components.�Consequently,�there�may�be�discrepancies�between
the�contents�of�this�document�and�the�vehicles�available�in�the�training�course.
This�document�basically�relates�to�the�European�version�of�left-hand�drive�vehicles.�Some�operating
elements�or�components�are�arranged�differently�in�right-hand�drive�vehicles�than�shown�in�the�graph-
ics�in�this�document.�Further�differences�may�arise�as�a�result�of�the�equipment�specification�in�specif-
ic�markets�or�countries.
Additional�sources�of�information
Further�information�on�the�individual�topics�can�be�found�in�the�following:
• Owner's�Handbook
• Integrated�Service�Technical�Application.
Contact:�[email protected]
©2011�BMW�AG,�Munich,�Germany
Reprints�of�this�publication�or�its�parts�require�the�written�approval�of�BMW�AG,�Munich
The�information�contained�in�this�document�forms�an�integral�part�of�the�technical�training�of�the�BMW
Group�and�is�intended�for�the�trainer�and�participants�in�the�seminar.�Refer�to�the�latest�relevant�infor-
mation�systems�of�the�BMW�Group�for�any�changes/additions�to�the�technical�data.
Information�status:�September�2011
VH-23/International�Technical�Training
F30�Displays,�Indicators�and�Controls
Contents
1. System�Overview.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1. Introduction..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1
2. System�Components............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 2
2.1. Instrument�cluster................................................................................................................................................................................................. 2
2.1.1. Basic�version�of�instrument�cluster......................................................................................................... 3
2.1.2. Instrument�cluster,�high�version.................................................................................................................... 4
2.1.3. On-board�computer..........................................................................................................................................................5
2.2. Central�Information�Display................................................................................................................................................................... 6
2.2.1. CID�with�6.5“�screen�diagonal......................................................................................................................... 6
2.2.2. CID�with�8.8“�screen�diagonal......................................................................................................................... 6
2.3. Head‐Up�Display� ...................................................................................................................................................................................................7
2.4. Operating�elements�on�the�steering�wheel.................................................................................................................. 8
2.5. Operating�elements�in�the�center�console.................................................................................................................... 9
2.5.1. Driving�experience�switch.................................................................................................................................. 10
2.6. Operating�facility�for�driver�assistance�systems............................................................................................... 13
2.7. Service�functions............................................................................................................................................................................................... 14
2.7.1. Resetting�the�scope�of�maintenance�work.............................................................................. 14
2.7.2. Test�functions........................................................................................................................................................................ 14
F30�Displays,�Indicators�and�Controls
1.�System�Overview
1.1.�Introduction
As�with�all�other�BMW�models,�the�operating�concept�of�the�new�BMW�3-Series�center�is�based�on�a
clear�and�optimized�layout�of�the�driving�area.�The�number�of�switches�has�been�reduced�in�order�to
simplify�logical�operation.�The�display�and�operating�elements�are�organized�corresponding�to�their
function.
F30�overview�of�displays�and�operating�elements
Index Explanation
1 Instrument�cluster�(KOMBI)
2 Head‐Up�Display
3 Central�Information�Display�(CID)
4 Favorite�buttons�for�individual�assignment
5 Gear�selector�lever�(GWS)
6 Controller�(CON)
7 Driving�experience�switch
8 Control�buttons,�steering�wheel
9 Operating�facility�for�driver�assistance�systems
1
F30�Displays,�Indicators�and�Controls
2.�System�Components
2.1.�Instrument�cluster
The�central�display�unit�with�speedometer,�rev�counter,�fuel�gauge,�engine�oil�temperature,�and�indica-
tor�and�warning�lights�is�referred�to�as�the�instrument�cluster.
The�instrument�cluster�receives�information�on�the�wiring�harness�in�the�form�of�analogue�and�digital
electrical�signals.�These�signals�are�processed�and�then�displayed�in�the�instrument�cluster,�or�passed
on�as�information�to�other�control�units.
Depending�on�the�equipment,�two�different�instrument�cluster�versions�are�used�in�the�F30.
As�a�control�unit,�the�basic�version�of�the�instrument�cluster�is�a�bus�user�on�the�PT-CAN.
As�a�control�unit,�the�high�version�of�the�instrument�cluster�is�a�bus�user�on�the�MOST�bus�and�on�the
PT-CAN.
F30�versions�of�instrument�clusters
Index Explanation
A Basic�version�of�instrument�cluster
B High�version�of�instrument�cluster
In�addition,�there�are�different�versions�of�the�two�variants�of�the�instrument�cluster�depending�on�the
vehicle�line.�In�the�following�image�you�see�the�instrument�cluster�of�the�different�lines�using�the�exam-
ple�of�the�high-version�instrument�cluster.
F30�line�versions,�instrument�cluster,�high-version
2
F30�Displays,�Indicators�and�Controls
2.�System�Components
Index Explanation
A Instrument�cluster�without�line�package�or�with�BMW�Luxury�Line�package�PA
7S2
B Instrument�cluster�with�BMW�Modern�Line�package�PA�7S1
C Instrument�cluster�with�BMW�Sport�Line�package�PA�7AC
2.1.1.�Basic�version�of�instrument�cluster
F30�basic�instrument�cluster
Index Explanation
1 TFT�display
The�basic�instrument�cluster�in�the�F30�has�five�analogue�instrument�dials�in�four�tubes.�The�basic�ver-
sion�of�the�instrument�cluster�incorporates�a�TFT�display�with�a�resolution�of�320�x�120�pixels�at�the
bottom�between�the�round�instruments.�It�has�a�screen�diagonal�of�2.7“.
The�basic�instrument�cluster�is�installed�in�the�F30�for�vehicles�without�Professional�navigation�system
(optional�equipment�609),�without�Lane�departure�warning�(optional�equipment�5AD),�without�Head‐
Up�Display�(optional�equipment�610),�and�without�speed�limit�information�(optional�equipment�8TH).
The�two�large�round�instruments�show�the�road�speed�and�engine�speed.�The�indication�of�the�status
of�the�automatic�engine�start-stop�function�(MSA)�(READY/OFF)�is�integrated�in�the�rev�counter.�The
current�fuel�consumption�is�displayed�at�the�bottom�of�the�rev�counter.
The�two�small�round�instruments�on�the�left-�and�right-hand�side�show�the�fuel�tank�capacity�and�en-
gine�oil�temperature�respectively.
The�indicator�lights�are�located�centrally�at�the�top�between�the�two�large�round�instruments�and�be-
low�the�speedometer.
3
F30�Displays,�Indicators�and�Controls
2.�System�Components
2.1.2.�Instrument�cluster,�high�version
F30�instrument�cluster,�high�version�option�6WA
Index Explanation
1 TFT�display
The�instrument�cluster�high-version�has�been�designed�for�the�F30�and�has�four�analogue�instrument
dials�in�four�tubes.�Each�of�the�scales�in�the�instrument�cluster�is�specific�to�the�country,�vehicle�and
engine.
The�two�large�round�instruments�show�the�road�speed�and�engine�speed.�The�indication�of�the�status
of�the�automatic�engine�start-stop�function�(MSA)�(READY/OFF)�is�integrated�in�the�rev�counter.�The
current�consumption�is�shown�on�the�display�under�the�rev�counter�and�the�energy�recovery�is�shown
in�the�coasting�(overrun)�mode.
The�two�small�round�instruments�on�the�left-�and�right-hand�side�show�the�fuel�tank�capacity�and�en-
gine�oil�temperature�respectively.
The�high�version�of�the�instrument�cluster�is�available�as�the�optional�equipment�instrument�cluster
with�extended�functional�scope�(optional�equipment�6WA).�The�high�version�of�the�instrument�cluster
incorporates�a�TFT�display�with�a�resolution�of�640�x�160�pixels�below�the�round�instruments.�Its�diag-
onal�screen�size�is�5.7“.
The�high�version�of�the�instrument�cluster�is�required�for�some�items�of�optional�equipment.�This�in-
cludes�the�Professional�navigation�system�(optional�equipment�609),�the�Lane�departure�warning�(op-
tional�equipment�5AD),�the�Head‐Up�Display�(optional�equipment�610)�and�the�speed�limit�information
(optional�equipment�8TH).�A�variant�of�the�instrument�cluster�is�used�in�connection�with�the�Head‐Up
Display�and�has�an�APIX�interface.
4
F30�Displays,�Indicators�and�Controls
2.�System�Components
2.1.3.�On-board�computer
The�F30�is�equipped�as�standard�with�an�on-board�computer.
The�on-board�computer�functions�can�be�called�up�by�briefly�pressing�the�on-board�computer�button
on�the�steering�column�switch.
Pressing�the�on-board�computer�button�again�displays�information�in�the�following�order:
• Range
• Average�consumption
• Average�speed
• Distance�(with�activated�route�guidance)
• Arrival�time�(with�activated�route�guidance)
• Arrow�display�of�the�navigation�system�(for�activated�route�guidance�and�deactivated�display�in
the�Head‐Up�Display)
• Date
• Speed�limit�information.
• ECO�PRO�bonus�range.
The�functions�to�be�displayed�in�the�CID�can�be�selected�via�"Settings"�->�"Information�Display".
F30�buttons�on�steering�column�switch
Index Explanation
1 On-board�computer�button
2 High-beam�assistant�button
3 Steering�column�switches
More�detailed�information�can�be�obtained�from�the�current�Owner's�Handbook�for�the�BMW�3-Series
sedan.
5
F30�Displays,�Indicators�and�Controls
2.�System�Components
2.2.�Central�Information�Display
Depending�on�the�equipment�installed,�two�different�versions�of�a�freestanding�Central�Information
Display�(CID)�are�installed�in�the�F30.�.
The�Central�Information�Display�(CID)�in�the�F30�no�longer�has�a�bus�connection.�The�CID�is�direct-
ly�connected�to�the�headunit�via�an�APIX�interface.�APIX�(Automotive�Pixel�Link)�is�a�bit-serial�1�Gbit/s
video�link�with�just�one�copper�core�pair.�The�CID�is�connected�by�2�APIX�video�links�to�the�headunit.
The�APIX�link�is�an�EMC-optimized�physical�layer�for�real�time�video�transfer�via�copper�cables.�The
CID�can�be�supplied�with�power�via�two�leads�directly�by�the�headunit.
As�with�all�new�BMW�models,�the�system�is�operated�by�means�of�the�central�operating�element,�the
controller.
The�Central�Information�Display�is�an�integrated�display�and�operating�facility�for�the�following�func-
tions:
• Audio�functions,�such�as�radio,�CD,�MP3
• Telephone
• Navigation
• On-board�computer,�journey�computer
• Vehicle�information,�Interactive�Owner's�Handbook�IBA
• Vehicle�settings
• Vehicle�functions,�such�as�PDC�for�example
• BMW�Services.
2.2.1.�CID�with�6.5“�screen�diagonal
A�CID�with�6.5"�screen�diagonal�is�installed�in�conjunction�with�out�navigation.�The�display�resolution�is
800�x�480�pixels.
A�CID�with�a�black�high-gloss�clasp�is�used�in�vehicles�with�BMW�Professional�radio�(standard�equip-
ment).
F30�CID�with�6.5“�screen�diagonal
2.2.2.�CID�with�8.8“�screen�diagonal
A�CID�with�8.8“�screen�diagonal�is�installed�in�conjunction�with�the�Professional�navigation�system�(op-
tion�609).�The�display�resolution�is�1280�x�480�pixels.�The�CID�with�8.8“�screen�diagonal�also�has�a
cover�made�from�anti-reflecting�laminated�safety�glass�which�stretches�to�the�edge�of�the�CID.
6
F30�Displays,�Indicators�and�Controls
2.�System�Components
F30�CID�with�8.8“�screen�diagonal
2.3.�Head‐Up�Display
The�name�"Head-Up"�describes�the�principle�benefit�of�this�system.�The�Head‐Up�Display�(HUD)
projects�a�virtual�image�into�the�driver's�field�of�view.�Important�information,�e.g.�from�the�cruise�control
or�navigation�system�with�activated�arrow�display,�is�reflected�on�the�windscreen�and�is�therefore�per-
manently�available�in�the�driver's�field�of�view.
The�Head‐Up�Display�(optional�equipment�610)�in�the�F30�contains�various�functions�aimed�at�en-
hancing�road�safety�and�ride�comfort.�This�includes�display�of:
• Speed
• Speed�setting�control�of�DCC
• Collision�warning
• Navigation�system
• Check�Control�messages
• Speed�limit�information
• Lane�departure�warning.
• Entertainment�lists.
The�HUD�used�in�the�F30�has�been�developed�further�to�include�the�following�functions:
• Intersection�view
• Road�symbol�in�the�junction�view.
The�HUD�in�the�F30�can�now�also�project�the�color�blue,�in�addition�to�red�and�green.�Contents�can�be
displayed�in�all�colors�of�the�RGB�color�spectrum,�as�is�the�case�with�an�LCD�monitor,�by�mixing�the
three�colors.
Having�the�displays�in�the�driver's�direct�field�of�view�increases�safety,�as�this�allows�the�driver�to�keep
his�eyes�on�the�road�at�all�times.
7
F30�Displays,�Indicators�and�Controls
2.�System�Components
F30�Head‐Up�Display
Further�information�on�the�Head‐Up�Display�can�be�taken�from�the�training�information�F30�Assist
Systems.
2.4.�Operating�elements�on�the�steering�wheel
A�switch�block�is�integrated�into�the�steering�wheel�on�the�left-�and�right-hand�side�respectively.
The�operating�elements�for�the�cruise�control�with�braking�function�(Dynamic�Cruise�Control�-�DCC)
are�on�the�left-hand�side�of�the�steering�wheel.
The�operating�elements�for�operation�of�the�radio�and�telephone�functions�are�on�the�right.
F30�operating�elements�on�the�steering�wheel
8
F30�Displays,�Indicators�and�Controls
2.�System�Components
Index Explanation
1 Increase�distance�button�(only�with�optional�equipment�5DF�ACC)�not�US
2 Rocker�switch�±,�change�speed,�set�speed
3 Knurled�wheel,�select/set�radio�station�or�track
4 MODE�button,�change�between�audio�sources
5 Shift�paddle�for�upshifting�(only�with�SA�2TB)
6 Rocker�switch�+,�increase�volume
7 Rocker�switch�-,�reduce�volume
8 Voice�recognition�system�button
9 Telephone�button
10 Reduce�distance�button�(only�with�optional�equipment�5DF�ACC)�not�US
11 Switch�DCC�on/off,�interrupt
12 Resume�button,�call-up�stored�speed
13 Set�speed�button
14 Shift�paddle�for�downshifting�(only�with�SA�2TB)
2.5.�Operating�elements�in�the�center�console
The�center�console�of�the�F30�features�the�following�operating�elements:
F30�operating�elements�in�the�center�console
9
F30�Displays,�Indicators�and�Controls
2.�System�Components
Index Explanation
1 Gear�selector�switch
2 Controller
3 Park�Distance�Control�/�Reversing�camera�/�Top�view
4 Side�View
5 Driving�experience�switch
6 Dynamic�Stability�Control
2.5.1.�Driving�experience�switch
The�F30�is�equipped�as�standard�with�the�driving�experience�switch.
F30�driving�experience�switch
Index Explanation
1 Driving�experience�switch
10
F30�Displays,�Indicators�and�Controls
2.�System�Components
The�driver�can�use�the�driving�experience�switch�to�select�different�programs�which�alter�various�prop-
erties�of�the�vehicle�depending�on�the�vehicle's�equipment�specification.�The�following�programs�are
available:
• SPORT+�(only�in�vehicles�with�sport�automatic�transmission�option�2TB,�variable�sport�steer-
ing�option�2VL�or�Sport�Line�PA�7AC)
• SPORT
• COMFORT
• ECO�PRO.
When�the�driver�switches�to�a�different�program,�the�selected�program�is�displayed�in�the�instrument
cluster.�In�vehicles�with�CID�a�pop-up�also�appears�for�the�selected�program.
SPORT�mode
In�conjunction�with�the�optional�equipment�Professional�navigation�(option�609)�additional�SPORT
mode�displays�can�be�called�up�in�the�CID.
SPORT�mode�displays�in�the�CID
Index Explanation
1 Power�output
2 Torque
ECO�PRO�mode
The�ECO�PRO�mode�supports�the�driver�in�adopting�an�optimized-consumption�driving�style�and�re-
duces�fuel�consumption�through�intelligent�control�of�energy�and�A/C�management.�Essentially�the
following�measures�help�to�reduce�fuel�consumption:
• The�driver�is�supported�in�adopting�an�optimized-consumption�driving�style�by�means�of�an
alteration�of�the�accelerator�pedal�characteristic�and�the�shift�program�in�automatic�transmis-
sions�or�the�shift�point�indicator�in�manual�gearboxes.
• The�A/C�system�is�placed�in�the�ECO�PRO�operating�state.�Here�the�A/C�system�operates�at
reduced�air�drying�and�cooling.�If�the�required�temperature�can�be�achieved�without�cold�pro-
duction,�the�A/C�compressor�is�switched�off.�During�heating�mode�the�engine�operating�mode
with�increased�heat�dissipation�is�to�the�greatest�possible�extent�dispensed.
11
F30�Displays,�Indicators�and�Controls
2.�System�Components
The�ECO�PRO�operating�condition�of�the�heating/air-conditioning�unit�can�be�reset�by�the�driv-
er�in�the�COMFORT�operating�condition.�The�setting�of�the�operating�state�of�the�heating�and
A/C�system�is�stored�and�re-established�when�the�ECO�PRO�mode�is�called�up�again.
• The�exterior�mirror�heating�is�switched�off�and�the�seat�heating�temperature�is�limited�to�37.5
°C�instead�of�42�°C.�These�measures�are�allied�to�the�ECO�PRO�operating�state�of�the�heating
and�A/C�program.
• The�driver�is�prompted�by�various�displays�to�adopt�an�optimized-consumption�driving�style
and�is�supported�in�optimizing�their�driving�style.
Displays�of�the�ECO�PRO�mode�in�the�instrument�cluster�with�extended�functional�scope�(extended�cluster�function�optional�equipment�6WA)
Index Explanation
1 ECO�PRO�display
2 ECO�PRO�driving�instructions
3 Display�of�the�bonus�range
The�bonus�range�is�the�actual�additional�range�which�was�achieved�through�your�ECO�PRO�driving
style.�The�bonus�range�is�calculated�in�the�BC�according�to�the�personal�driving�style�and�the�resulting
consumption.�The�BC�gets�to�know�the�personal�long-term�consumption�of�the�driver.�To�determine
the�range�the�current�consumption�in�ECO�PRO�mode�is�compared�to�your�'learnt'�consumption�in�the
instrument�cluster�outside�of�the�ECO�PRO�mode.�This�creates�a�difference�in�liters�which�is�recalcu-
lated�into�the�bonus�range.
12
F30�Displays,�Indicators�and�Controls
2.�System�Components
ECO�PRO�mode�displays�in�the�CID
Index Explanation
1 ECO�PRO�information�in�the�EfficientDynamics�menu
2 Configure�ECO�PRO�mode
3 Consumption�history�in�the�EfficientDynamics�menu�(only�with�optional
equipment�6WA)
4 Technology�experience�monitor�in�the�EfficientDynamics�menu
Through�these�measures�a�reduction�of�the�practical�consumption�of�up�to�20%�can�be�reached�de-
pending�on�the�driving�style
Upon�activation�of�the�ECO�PRO�mode�the�automatic�engine�start-stop�function�is�automatically
switched�on.
2.6.�Operating�facility�for�driver�assistance�systems
The�individual�driver�assistance�systems�can�be�activated�or�deactivated�via�the�driver�assistance�sys-
tems�operating�facility,�which�is�located�next�to�the�steering�wheel�in�the�dashboard.
F30�operating�facility�for�driver�assistance�systems
Index Explanation
1 Lane�change�warning
2 Collision�warning
3 Lane�departure�warning
4 Head‐Up�Display�(HUD)�button�not�installed,�now�in�the�CIC�under
“Settings”�“Head-Up�Display”
13
F30�Displays,�Indicators�and�Controls
2.�System�Components
2.7.�Service�functions
2.7.1.�Resetting�the�scope�of�maintenance�work
If�the�service�has�been�carried�out�for�one�or�more�scopes�of�maintenance�work,�replacement�of�front
brake�pads�for�example,�the�full�service�interval�must�be�reset�for�these�scopes.
When�resetting�the�scopes�of�maintenance�work,�a�differentiation�is�made�between�two�types:
• Statutory�scopes�of�maintenance�work,�such�as�the�vehicle�inspection,�area�specific,�which
can�only�be�reset�in�the�"Service"�menu.
• All�service-related�scopes�of�maintenance�work,�such�as�changing�the�spark�plugs�for�exam-
ple,�are�reset�via�the�reset�mode�in�the�instrument�cluster�or�via�the�BMW�workshop�system.
Activating�reset�mode
• Terminal�15�ON
• Press�and�hold�down�the�reset�button�in�the�instrument�cluster�for�between�five�and�ten�sec-
onds.
Keep�the�reset�button�pressed�for�longer�than�ten�seconds�to�call�up�the�test�functions.
Press�the�reset�button�briefly�once�to�scroll�through�the�scopes�of�maintenance�work.�Keep�the�re-
set�button�pressed�for�longer�to�access�the�reset�menu�for�the�selected�scope�of�maintenance�work.
Press�and�hold�the�button�again�to�reset�the�scope�of�maintenance�work.�It�is�only�possible�to�reset�the
scopes�of�maintenance�work�once�thresholds�for�specific�scopes�of�maintenance�work�have�been�un-
dercut.
Exiting�reset�mode
• Terminal�15�OFF
• Start�engine
• Do�not�press�button�for�15�seconds.
2.7.2.�Test�functions
The�test�functions�are�shown�in�the�TFT�display�of�the�instrument�cluster.�The�test�functions�also�pro-
vide�BMW�Service�with�help�in�troubleshooting�without�a�BMW�diagnosis�system.
To�start�functional�check
• Terminal�15�ON
• Press�and�hold�down�the�reset�button�in�the�instrument�cluster�for�ten�seconds.
14
F30�Displays,�Indicators�and�Controls
2.�System�Components
Locking�and�unlocking�the�test�functions�(test�function�04)
Only�the�first�four�test�functions�are�freely�accessible.�All�test�functions�are�locked�from�the�fifth�test
function�onwards.�The�test�functions�can�be�unlocked�via�test�function�04.
The�test�functions�are�unlocked�by�entering�the�cross�total�of�the�last�five�digits�of�the�vehicle�identifi-
cation�number.
Display�of�test�functions
The�test�functions�are�faded�into�the�center�of�the�TFT�display,�between�the�two�round�instruments.
The�main�test�functions�are�listed�below.�In�addition�to�the�majority�of�test�functions,�there�are�further
equivalent�functions�for�which�a�similar�display�appears�in�the�instrument�cluster.
Test�function Description
01 Identification
02 System�test
03 Test�end
04 Unlock�test�functions
05 Current�consumption
06 Range�/�Consumption
07 Fuel�gauge�values
08 Coolant�temperature,�ambient�temperature,�engine�oil�temperature
09 On-board�computer�average�values
10 Speedometer�/�Rev�counter
11 Display�of�vehicle�voltage
12 Acoustics,�triggering�of�audio�signals
13 Read�fault�codes�(“DTC”)
14 Dim�LCD
15 Dim�PWM�signal
16 Condition�Based�Service
17 Check�Control
18 Correction�factor,�consumption�figures
19 Software�reset�/�RAM�reload
Operation�of�test�functions
The�test�functions�are�operated�with�the�assistance�of�the�reset�button�in�the�instrument�cluster.
Press�the�reset�button�briefly�once�to�scroll�through�the�test�functions.�Keep�the�reset�button�pressed
down�for�longer�to�access�the�selected�test�function.
15
F30�Displays,�Indicators�and�Controls
2.�System�Components
Exit�test�functions
• Terminal�15�OFF
• Keep�reset�button�pressed�for�longer�than�ten�seconds.
The�main�menu�fades�into�the�instrument�cluster
• Call�up�test�function�03�(end�test)
• Call�up�test�function�19�(RESET).
To�protect�against�unauthorized�access,�all�but�the�first�four�test�functions�are�locked�again�when�the
test�functions�are�exited.
16
Bayerische�Motorenwerke�Aktiengesellschaft
Händlerqualifizierung�und�Training
Röntgenstraße�7
85716�Unterschleißheim,�Germany
Technical�training.
Product�information.
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
BMW�Service
General�information
Symbols�used
The�following�symbol�is�used�in�this�document�to�facilitate�better�comprehension�or�to�draw�attention
to�very�important�information:
Contains�important�safety�information�and�information�that�needs�to�be�observed�strictly�in�order�to
guarantee�the�smooth�operation�of�the�system.
Information�status�and�national-market�versions
BMW�Group�vehicles�meet�the�requirements�of�the�highest�safety�and�quality�standards.�Changes�in
requirements�for�environmental�protection,�customer�benefits�and�design�render�necessary�continu-
ous�development�of�systems�and�components.�Consequently,�there�may�be�discrepancies�between
the�contents�of�this�document�and�the�vehicles�available�in�the�training�course.
This�document�basically�relates�to�the�European�version�of�left-hand�drive�vehicles.�Some�operating
elements�or�components�are�arranged�differently�in�right-hand�drive�vehicles�than�shown�in�the�graph-
ics�in�this�document.�Further�differences�may�arise�as�a�result�of�the�equipment�specification�in�specif-
ic�markets�or�countries.
Additional�sources�of�information
Further�information�on�the�individual�topics�can�be�found�in�the�following:
• Owner's�Handbook
• Integrated�Service�Technical�Application.
Contact:�[email protected]
©2011�BMW�AG,�Munich,�Germany
Reprints�of�this�publication�or�its�parts�require�the�written�approval�of�BMW�AG,�Munich
The�information�contained�in�this�document�forms�an�integral�part�of�the�technical�training�of�the�BMW
Group�and�is�intended�for�the�trainer�and�participants�in�the�seminar.�Refer�to�the�latest�relevant�infor-
mation�systems�of�the�BMW�Group�for�any�changes/additions�to�the�technical�data.
Information�status:�September�2011
VH-23/International�Technical�Training
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
Contents
1. Introduction............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 1
1.1. F30�bus�overview.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 2
2. Radio�and�Headunits............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 5
2.1. Overview�of�headunits�F30.................................................................................................................................................................... 5
2.2. Basic�headunit............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 5
2.2.1. Block�diagram............................................................................................................................................................................ 8
2.2.2. System�wiring�diagram................................................................................................................................................ 9
2.3. Car�Information�Computer�(CIC)............................................................................................................................................... 11
2.3.1. System�wiring�diagram............................................................................................................................................13
3. Speaker�Systems..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 15
3.1. Overview.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 15
3.2. Components.............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 15
3.2.1. HiFi�system................................................................................................................................................................................ 15
3.2.2. Top�HiFi�system................................................................................................................................................................. 17
4. Telephone�Systems..............................................................................................................................................................................................................21
4.1. Overview.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 21
4.2. System�components.................................................................................................................................................................................... 21
4.3. General�information........................................................................................................................................................................................ 22
4.3.1. Compatibility............................................................................................................................................................................ 23
4.4. Hands-free�system�with�USB�interface.......................................................................................................................... 23
4.4.1. System�wiring�diagram............................................................................................................................................23
4.5. Mobile�phone�preparation�with�connection�for�Bluetooth�and�USB
devices................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 25
4.5.1. System�wiring�diagram............................................................................................................................................27
4.5.2. Office................................................................................................................................................................................................... 28
5. Video�System.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 32
5.1. Functional�diagram..........................................................................................................................................................................................32
6. BMW�ConnectedDrive..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 34
6.1. BMW�Online�formally�BMW�Search.................................................................................................................................... 34
6.2. HOW�TO�ACCESS�THE�SERVICES................................................................................................................................... 37
7. Personal�Profile........................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 39
8. Navigation.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 41
9. Antenna�Systems..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 42
9.1. Antenna�and�phase�diversity...........................................................................................................................................................44
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
Contents
9.2. Bluetooth�Antenna.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 45
9.3. System�wiring�diagram............................................................................................................................................................................. 46
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
1.�Introduction
The�information�and�communication�system�plays�a�significant�role�in�the�F30.�It�can�access�the�highly
advanced�technology�available�in�the�BMW�module.�which�provides�the�driver�with�a�wide�selection�of
Infotainment�systems.
The�purpose�of�this�information�bulletin�is�to�provide�an�overview�of�the�following�systems:
• Radio�and�headunits
• Speaker�systems
• Telephone�systems
• BMW�ConnectedDrive
• Antenna�Systems.
1
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
1.�Introduction
1.1.�F30�bus�overview
F30�bus�overview
2
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
1.�Introduction
Index Explanation
1 Control�units�with�wake-up�authorization
2 Start-up�node�control�units�for�starting�and�synchronizing�the�FlexRay�bus
system
ACSM Advanced�Crash�Safety�Module
AMPT Top�HiFi�amplifier
COMBOX Combox�(Combox�emergency�call,�Multimedia�Combox)
CON Controller
D-CAN Diagnosis-on-Controller�Area�Network
DME Digital�Engine�Electronics�(DME)
DSC Dynamic�Stability�Control
DVDC DVD�changer
EGS Electronic�transmission�control
EKPS Electronic�fuel�pump�control
EPS Electromechanical�Power�Steering
Ethernet Cable-based�data�network�technology�for�local�data�networks
FEM Front�Electronic�Module
FLA High-beam�assistant
FlexRay Fast,�preset�and�fault-tolerant�bus�system�for�use�in�automotive�sector
FZD Roof�function�center
GWS Gear�selector�lever
HEADUNIT/CIC Headunit�(Car�Information�Computer�or�Basic�headunit)
ICM Integrated�Chassis�Management
IHKA Integrated�automatic�heating�/�air�conditioning
K-CAN Body�controller�area�network
K-CAN2 Body�controller�area�network�2
KAFAS Camera-based�driver�assistance�systems
KOMBI Instrument�cluster�(MOST�only�with�option 6WA)
MOST Media�Oriented�System�Transport
OBD On-board�diagnosis�(diagnostic�socket)
PDC Park�Distance�Control�(with�option�5DP,�parking�manoeuvring�assistant:
integrated�in�the�parking�manoeuvring�assistant�control�unit,�otherwise
integrated�in�the�Rear�Electronic�Module�control�unit)
PMA Parking�manoeuvring�assistant
PT-CAN Powertrain�controller�area�network
PT-CAN2 Powertrain�controller�area�network�2
RAD Radio
3
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
1.�Introduction
Index Explanation
REM Rear�Electronic�Module
REMA�LI Reversible�electromotive�automatic�reel,�left�(not�US)
REMA�RE Reversible�electromotive�automatic�reel,�right�(not�US)
SMFA Seat�module,�driver
SWW Lane�change�warning
TPMS Tire�pressure�control
TRSVC Control�unit�for�all-round�vision�camera
VDM Vertical�Dynamics�Management
ZGM Central�gateway�module
4
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
2.�Radio�and�Headunits
2.1.�Overview�of�headunits�F30
Optional�equipment Headunit CID Controller Navigation
Radio�(standard) Basic�headunit 6.5" 5-button No
Navigation�system Car�Information 8.8" 7-button Yes
(option 609) Computer�(CIC)
2.2.�Basic�headunit
F30�Basic�headunit
Index Explanation
1 CID
2 Audio�system�operating�facility
3 Basic�headunit
4 Controller
The�entry�level�radio�for�F30�(w/o�navigation)�is�the�Basic�headunit�(HU-B)�and�is�offered�as�standard
equipment.
The�controller�of�the�Basic�headunit�has�only�five�function�buttons�and�can�only�be�toggled�to�the�left
and�right.�The�Favorite�buttons�only�have�a�touch�sensor�system.
5
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
2.�Radio�and�Headunits
The�Basic�headunit�comes�with�a�central�information�display�(CID)�with�6.5”�screen.
APIX�connection,�CID�to�headunit
Index Explanation
1 Basic�headunit
2 APIX�jack�to�Basic�headunit
3 Central�information�display�(CID)
4 APIX�jack�to�central�information�display�(CID)
5 APIX�data�connection�lines
6 Power�supply
The�CID�in�the�F30�is�not�connected�to�a�bus.�The�CID�is�directly�connected�to�the�headunit�via�an
APIX�interface.�APIX�(Automotive�Pixel�Link)�is�a�bit-serial�data�transfer�system�with�a�data�transfer�rate
of�1�Gbit/s�on�just�one�copper�core�pair.�Each�APIX�video�link�also�has�a�bidirectional�reverse�channel.
Data�transfer�via�the�APIX�interface�has�been�optimized�with�regard�to�electromagnetic�compatibility
and�power�consumption.
Because�of�the�CID's�low�power�consumption,�the�CID�can�be�supplied�with�power�via�2�separate�cur-
rent�leads�directly�by�the�headunit,�and�there�is�no�need�for�a�separate�power�supply�to�the�CID.�Be-
cause�of�the�high�data�transfer�rate�with�low�electromagnetic�emissions,�it�is�also�possible�to�use�cop-
per�wiring�for�applications�with�a�high�bandwidth�requirement�and�to�dispense�with�fiber�optic�net-
working.
The�CID�is�connected�via�two�APIX�links�to�the�headunit.�The�two�copper�core�pairs�and�the�two�pow-
er�supply�leads�are�connected�by�a�common�connector�to�the�headunit�and�the�CID.�An�APIX�video�link
serves�to�transfer�the�screen�content�to�the�CID.�The�bidirectional�reverse�channels�of�the�APIX�video
links�serve�to�transfer�status�information�(such�as�e.g.�CID�operating�temperature),�diagnostic�informa-
tion�and�control�signals.
6
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
2.�Radio�and�Headunits
In�the�radio�systems�area,�in�addition�to�an�AM/FM�double�tuner,�are�integrated�in�the�Basic�headunit.
In�conjunction�with�the�Basic�headunit,�phase�diversity�is�used�instead�of�the�previously�customary�an-
tenna�diversity�for�FM�radio�reception.�For�further�information�on�phase�diversity,�please�refer�to�the
chapter�entitled�antenna�Systems.
In�the�F30�the�Basic�headunit�has�-�in�conjunction�with�a�mobile�phone�preparation�with�connection�for
Bluetooth�and�USB�devices�(option�6NL)�-�a�voice�recognition�system.
The�Telephone�function�is�realized�in�the�headunit�and�the�Contact�information�is�stored�on�internal
memory�as�there�is�no�removable�SD�Card.
F30�connections,�Basic�headunit
Index Explanation
1 AM/FM
2 AM/FM
3 Bluetooth
4 APIX�and�CID�power�supply
5 USB
6 MOST
7 Main�connector
8 DAB�L�Band�(not�US)
9 DAB�Band�III�(not�US)
The�Basic�headunit�does�not�contain�any�components�that�are�replaceable�by�a�BMW�Service�agent
and�has�to�be�replaced�completely�if�defective.�The�Ethernet�connection�from�the�FEM�to�the�headunit
is�used�solely�to�update�the�headunit's�software.
7
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
2.�Radio�and�Headunits
2.2.1.�Block�diagram
F30�block�diagram,�Basic�headunit
Index Explanation
1 Central�information�display
2 Basic�headunit
3 User�interface
4 Application�software
5 Hardware�and�interfaces
8
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
2.�Radio�and�Headunits
2.2.2.�System�wiring�diagram
F30�system�wiring�diagram,�Basic�headunit
9
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
2.�Radio�and�Headunits
Index Explanation
1 Dynamic�Stability�Control�(DSC)
2 Power�distribution�box,�front
3 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
4 Power�distribution�box,�luggage�compartment
5 Integrated�Chassis�Management�(ICM)
6 Controller�(CON)
7 Integrated�automatic�heating�/�air�conditioning
8 Audio�operating�facility
9 IHKA�operating�facility
10 AUX-In�connection�with�USB�audio�interface�in�center�console
1
11 Bluetooth�antenna�in�wiring�harness
12 Basic�headunit
13 Central�information�display�(CID)
14 Steering�column�switch�cluster�(SZL)
15 Instrument�cluster�(KOMBI)
1
�In�vehicles�with�mobile�phone�preparation�with�connection�for�Bluetooth�and�USB�devices�(option
6NL)�the�AUX-In�connection�with�USB�audio�interface�is�connected�to�the�Combox.
10
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
2.�Radio�and�Headunits
2.3.�Car�Information�Computer�(CIC)
F30�Car�Information�Computer
Index Explanation
1 CID
2 Audio�system�operating�facility
3 Car�Information�Computer�(CIC)
4 Controller
The�CIC�headunit�was�installed�for�the�first�time�in�2008�in�the�BMW�1�and�3�Series�vehicles�in�con-
junction�with�the�Navigation�system�(option�609).�This�is�now�also�used�in�the�F30.
The�CID�in�the�F30�is�not�connected�to�a�bus.�The�CID�is,�as�with�the�Basic�headunit,�directly�connect-
ed�to�the�headunit�via�an�APIX�interface.�The�CID�can�be�supplied�with�power�via�two�leads�directly�by
the�headunit.
In�the�F30�the�CIC�always�has�a�voice�recognition�system.�To�be�able�to�operate�the�voice�recognition
system�with�the�buttons�on�the�steering�wheel,�it�is�necessary�for�the�Multifunction�for�steering�wheel
to�be�installed�as�standard.
The�headunit�provides,�through�data�management�on�an�80�GB�hard�disk,�for�a�multitude�of�new�possi-
bilities.
11
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
2.�Radio�and�Headunits
This�is�clearly�shown�in�the�audio�field�particularly�with�the�compiling�of�music.�Music�files�can�be�con-
verted�(ripped)�or�copied�for�compiling�music�on�the�hard�disc.�Stored�on�the�CIC-dedicated�hard�disk,
fast�access�to�these�music�files�is�ensured�at�all�times.�A�choice�of�up�to�3700�music�files�(12�GB)�is
possible�here.
For�further�information�on�the�Car�Information�Computer,�please�refer�to�the�“Car�Information�Comput-
er�CIC”�training�information.
12
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
2.�Radio�and�Headunits
2.3.1.�System�wiring�diagram
F30�system�wiring�diagram,�Car�Information�Computer�(CIC)
13
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
2.�Radio�and�Headunits
Index Explanation
1 Dynamic�Stability�Control�(DSC)
2 Power�distribution�box,�front
3 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
4 Power�distribution�box,�luggage�compartment
5 DC/DC�converter
6 Combox
7 Bluetooth�antenna�in�wiring�harness
8 AUX-In�connection�with�USB�audio�interface�in�center�console
9 Integrated�Chassis�Management�(ICM)
10 Controller�(CON)
11 Integrated�automatic�heating�/�air�conditioning
12 IHKA�operating�facility
13 Audio�operating�facility
14 USB�connection�in�glove�box
15 Car�Information�Computer
16 Central�information�display�(CID)
17 Steering�column�switch�cluster�(SZL)
18 Microphone
19 Instrument�cluster�(KOMBI)
14
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
3.�Speaker�Systems
3.1.�Overview
The�speaker�systems�in�the�F30�are�available�in�three�specification�levels:
• HiFi�system�=�HiFi�loudspeaker�system
• Top�HiFi�system�=�HiFi�loudspeaker�system�Harman�Kardon�(optional�equipment�688).
This�means�the�HiFi�system�is�standard�equipment.
The�speaker�and�amplifier�from�the�F30�have�a�similar�design�to�the�systems�currently�used�in�the�5-
Series�and�7-Series.�The�amplifier�and�headunits�have�been�optimally�adapted�to�the�passenger�com-
partment�of�the�F30�through�vehicle-specific�equalizing.
The�two�central�basses,�like�in�all�the�current�BMW�vehicles,�are�positioned�under�the�front�seats,
whereby�a�consistent�bass�reproduction�is�possible�in�the�entire�vehicle.�The�necessary�housing�vol-
ume�is�achieved�by�connecting�the�central�basses�to�the�side�sill.
All�systems�have�an�adjustable,�speed-dependent�volume�adjustment,�whereby�the�higher�driving
noise�level�is�compensated�at�higher�driving�speeds.
3.2.�Components
3.2.1.�HiFi�system
The�HiFi�loudspeaker�system�consists�of�nine�speakers.�A�seven-channel�amplifier�is�integrated�in�the
HiFi�loudspeaker�system.�The�amplifier�of�the�HiFi�system�has�no�bus�connection�and�receives�the
switch-on�signal�instead�via�a�separate�line.
Separate�speakers�are�installed�in�the�HiFi�system�for�the�treble�and�mid-tone�ranges.
The�HiFi�system�also�has�a�significantly�louder�center�bass�speaker�and�a�mid-range�speaker�posi-
tioned�centrally�in�the�instrument�cluster�as�a�center�speaker.
The�speakers�and�the�amplifier�of�the�HiFi�system�are�illustrated�in�the�following�graphic.�The�speakers
are�operated�with�a�power�output�of�5�x�25�watts�for�the�mid-range�speakers�and�tweeters�and�2�x�40
watts�for�the�bass�speakers.
15
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
3.�Speaker�Systems
F30�HiFi�loudspeaker�system
Index Explanation
1 Mid-range�speaker,�front�center
2 Tweeter,�exterior�mirror�cover,�front�right
3 Mid-range�speaker,�front�right�door
4 Bass�speaker�under�the�front�right�seat
5 Mid-range�speaker,�rear�right�door
6 HiFi�amplifier
7 Mid-range�speaker,�rear�left�door
8 Bass�speaker�under�the�front�left�seat
9 Mid-range�speaker,�front�left�door
10 Tweeter,�exterior�mirror�cover,�front�left
16
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
3.�Speaker�Systems
3.2.2.�Top�HiFi�system
F30�tweeter,�exterior�mirror�cover
The�Harman�Kardon�HiFi�loudspeaker�system�(optional�equipment�688),�which�has�been�further�opti-
mized�in�comparison�to�the�HiFi�loudspeaker�system,�is�complemented�with�two�additional�mid-range
speakers�and�five�additional�tweeters.�The�Top�HiFi�system�thus�comprises�a�total�of�16�speakers.�In-
corporated�in�the�Top�HiFi�system�is�a�nine-channel�amplifier�with�digital�equalizing.�The�AMPT�of�the
Top�HiFi�system�is�a�bus�user�in�Media�Oriented�System�Transport�(MOST).
The�mid-range�speakers�and�tweeters�of�the�Top�HiFi�system�have�high-quality�aluminium�diaphragms
for�a�clearly�differentiated�acoustic�pattern.�Thanks�to�the�additional�use�of�hexagonally�structured
metal�covers�the�damping�and�resonances�of�the�covers�are�minimized.
The�high-quality�panels�with�lettering,�which�are�made�from�anodized�aluminium,�in�the�mirror�triangles
are�a�notable�visible�difference.
The�amplifier�of�the�Top�HiFi�system�is�equipped�with�a�so-called�load�logic�separator�in�the�F30.�Here
the�amplifier�electronics�are�supplied�and�connected�with�a�separate�voltage�line.�This�is�specially�pro-
tected�against�brief�voltage�dips�which�in�turn�prevents�failure�of�the�electronics�if�a�voltage�dip�occurs
briefly.
The�speakers�and�the�amplifier�of�the�Top�HiFi�system�are�illustrated�in�the�following�graphic.�The
speakers�are�operated�with�a�power�output�of�7�x�50�watts�for�the�mid-range�speakers�and�tweeters
and�2�x�125�watts�for�the�bass�speakers.
17
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
3.�Speaker�Systems
F30�Top�HiFi�loudspeaker�system�Harman�Kardon
Index Explanation
1 Tweeter,�front�center
2 Tweeter,�exterior�mirror�cover,�front�right
3 Mid-range�speaker,�front�right�door
4 Bass�speaker�under�the�front�right�seat
5 Mid-range�speaker,�rear�right�door
6 Tweeter,�rear�right�door
7 Mid-range�speaker,�luggage�compartment�capping,�right
8 Tweeter,�luggage�compartment�capping,�right
9 Top�HiFi�amplifier
10 Tweeter,�luggage�compartment�capping,�left
11 Mid-range�speaker,�luggage�compartment�capping,�left
12 Tweeter,�rear�left�door
13 Mid-range�speaker,�rear�left�door
14 Bass�speaker�under�the�front�left�seat
15 Mid-range�speaker,�front�left�door
16 Tweeter,�exterior�mirror�cover,�front�left
17 Mid-range�speaker,�front�center
18
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
3.�Speaker�Systems
System�wiring�diagram
F30�system�wiring�diagram,�Top�HiFi�system
19
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
3.�Speaker�Systems
Index Explanation
1 Tweeter,�front�center
2 Mid-range�speaker,�front�center
3 Headunit
4 Front�Electronic�Module
5 Tweeter,�exterior�mirror�cover,�front�right
6 Mid-range�speaker,�front�right�door
7 Bass�speaker�under�the�front�right�seat
8 Mid-range�speaker,�rear�right�door
9 Tweeter,�rear�right�door
10 Power�distribution�box,�luggage�compartment
11 Top�HiFi�amplifier
12 Mid-range�speaker,�luggage�compartment�capping,�right
13 Tweeter,�luggage�compartment�capping,�right
14 Tweeter,�luggage�compartment�capping,�left
15 Mid-range�speaker,�luggage�compartment�capping,�left
16 Tweeter,�rear�left�door
17 Mid-range�speaker,�rear�left�door
18 Bass�speaker�under�the�front�left�seat
19 Mid-range�speaker,�front�left�door
20 Tweeter,�exterior�mirror�cover,�front�left
20
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
4.�Telephone�Systems
4.1.�Overview
Three�different�items�of�optional�equipment�are�available�for�the�F30�telephone�systems:
• Hands-free�system�with�USB�interface�(standard)
• Mobile�phone�preparation�with�connection�for�Bluetooth�and�USB�devices�(option�6NL�with
telematics).
The�specified�range�of�functions�is�only�achieved�with�BMW-recommended�Bluetooth-capable�mobile
phones.�A�list�of�currently�recommended�Bluetooth-capable�mobile�phones�can�be�called�up�through
the�Aftersales�Assistance�Portal�(ASAP)�or�at�http://www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth.
4.2.�System�components
System�components,�telephone
21
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
4.�Telephone�Systems
Index Explanation
1 Emergency�call�speaker�(only�with�option�6NL)
2 Microphone,�driver's�side
3 Central�information�display
4 Headunit
5 Controller
6 Base�plate�(only�with�option�6NL)
7 Microphone,�front�passenger�side�(only�with�option�6NL)
8 Roof�antenna
9 Combox�(only�with�option�6NL�or�with�option�609)
10 Emergency�call�antenna�(only�with�option�6NL)
The�Bluetooth�antenna�is�located�in�the�audio�wiring�harness�of�the�F30.�In�the�case�of�a�tele-
phone-supported�headunit,�it�is�located�in�the�center�console.�In�vehicles�with�the�Combox�control
unit,�it�is�located�in�the�C-pillar�area.
4.3.�General�information
The�telephone�functions�in�the�F30�are�provided�by�either�the�headunit�or�the�Combox.�The�following
table�summarizes�this�information:
The�optional�equipment�Navigation�System�(option�609)�always�contains�telephone�functionality�in�the
F30.
The�telephone�functions�contained�in�the�Hands-free�Bluetooth�system�with�USB�interface�(standard
equipment�6NH)�is�installed�and�realized�in�the�Basic�headunit�for�the�standard�equipment�radio�op-
tion.�In�the�Basic�headunit�the�Contact�information�is�stored�internally�as�there�is�no�removable�SD�card
installed.
22
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
4.�Telephone�Systems
4.3.1.�Compatibility
The�range�and�diversity�of�mobile�phones�available�on�the�market�is�steadily�increasing.�Not�every
Bluetooth-enabled�mobile�phone�is�automatically�compatible�with�a�hands-free�system.�The�Internet
site�http://www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth�has�been�completely�revised�to�enable�the�customer�to�make
as�easy�and�clear�an�enquiry�as�possible.
The�customer�can�now�obtain�information�regarding�the�compatibility�of�specific�mobile�phones�with
his�vehicle�(by�entering�the�vehicle�identification�number�for�example).�A�prospective�BMW�customer
can�also�find�out�which�mobile�phones�are�compatible�with�specific�BMW�models.
BMW�Bluetooth�Internet�page
4.4.�Hands-free�system�with�USB�interface
A�telephone-supported�headunit�is�used�in�conjunction�with�radio�(standard�equipment)�in�the�F30.
With�this,�no�additional�control�unit�is�required�in�order�to�provide�telephone�functions�in�the�vehicle.
In�vehicles�with�Navigation�System�(option�609)�a�Combox�is�installed�as�well�as�the�headunit�to
achieve�the�telephone�function.�In�this�case,�the�microphone,�the�Bluetooth�antenna�and�the�AUX-In
connection�with�USB�audio�interface�are�connected�not�to�the�headunit,�but�to�the�Combox.
The�functionality�and�operation�of�the�telephone�function�follow�the�established�BMW�logic.�Business
Connectivity�can�be�used�to�pair�a�wide�range�of�mobile�phones�via�Bluetooth.�A�list�of�compatible�de-
vices�is�available�at�http://www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth.
The�phone�book�and�lists�of�callers�are�transferred�from�the�mobile�phone.�Contacts�can�be�stored�in
the�address�memory�of�the�headunit�in�addition�to�the�mobile�phone's�phone�book.
During�the�call�the�telephone�function�allows�calls�to�be�held�or�extended�(conference�call),�DTMF
tones�to�be�transmitted,�and�the�microphone�to�be�muted.
4.4.1.�System�wiring�diagram
The�system�wiring�diagram�for�Business�Connectivity�in�conjunction�with�Navigation�System�(option
609)�is�depicted�in�the�system�wiring�diagram�in�the�section�entitled�Car�Information�Computer�(CIC).
23
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
4.�Telephone�Systems
F30�system�wiring�diagram,�Hands�free�and�Bluetooth/USB�standard�equipment
24
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
4.�Telephone�Systems
Index Explanation
1 Microphone
2 Instrument�cluster�(KOMBI)
3 Steering�column�switch�cluster�(SZL)
4 Central�information�display�(CID)
5 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
6 Headunit
7 Bluetooth�antenna�in�wiring�harness
8 Controller�(CON)
9 AUX-In�connection�with�USB�audio�interface�in�center�console
4.5.�Mobile�phone�preparation�with�connection�for�Bluetooth�and
USB�devices
F30�mobile�phone�preparation�with�AUX-In�connection�with�USB�audio�interface
Vehicles�are�equipped�with�a�Multimedia�Combox.�The�Multimedia�Combox�with�telematics�board�(op-
tion�6NL)�in�conjunction�with�the�Mobile�phone�preparation�with�connection�for�Bluetooth�and�USB
devices.�Vehicles�have�a�USB�audio�interface�and�two�microphones.�In�addition,�a�base�plate�with
charger�function�is�used�for�the�connection�of�the�telephone�antenna�on�the�roof.�In�vehicles�with�the
optional�equipment�Music�interface�for�smartphones�(optional�equipment�6NF)�the�base�plate�is�also
extended�to�include�a�USB�data�connection�to�the�Combox.
In�vehicles�with�the�standard�radio�equipment�the�Combox�also�has�a�GPS�receiver.
25
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
4.�Telephone�Systems
The�following�functions�are�available�in�the�F30�with�the�Combox:
• Connection�of�external�audio�players�(e.g.�smartphones)�via�Bluetooth
• Simultaneous�pairing�of�several�mobile�phones�and�audio�devices�via�Bluetooth
• Contacts�with�pictures
• Software�updating�directly�by�customer
• Connection�of�certain�iPods�via�a�cable�(omission�of�Y-cable)
• Album�cover�display�(with�iPod/MTP�player/MP3�via�USB)
• Office�with�email,�calendar�and�notes�from�mobile�phone
26
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
4.�Telephone�Systems
4.5.1.�System�wiring�diagram
F30�system�wiring�diagram,�Connectivity
27
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
4.�Telephone�Systems
Index Explanation
1 Dynamic�Stability�Control�(DSC)
2 Crash�Safety�Module�(ACSM)
3 Emergency�call�button�in�roof�function�center�FZD�(option�6NL�only)
4 Microphone�1
5 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
6 USB�connection�in�glove�box
7 Integrated�Chassis�Management�(ICM)
8 Power�distribution�box,�luggage�compartment
9 Combox
10 Emergency�GSM�antenna�(option�6NL�only)
11 Roof�antenna
12 Base�plate�(USB�data�connection�and�antenna�connections�only�with�option
6NF)
13 CVBS�video�connection�to�headunit�(only�in�conjunction�with�option�6NR�and
option�609)
14 AUX-In�connection�with�USB�audio�interface
15 Controller�(CON)
16 Bluetooth�antenna�in�wiring�harness
17 Headunit
18 Central�information�display�(CID)
19 Emergency�call�speaker�(option�6NL�only)
20 Steering�column�switch�cluster�(SZL)
21 Microphone�2
22 Instrument�cluster�(KOMBI)
4.5.2.�Office
With�the�optional�equipment�Mobile�phone�preparation�with�connection�to�Bluetooth�and�USB�devices
(6NL),�the�Combox�allows�the�customer�to�use�the�Office�function.
The�customer�can�use�the�Office�function�to�access�the�SMS,�calendar,�notes,�aimless,�tasks�and
reminders�in�a�compatible�mobile�phone.�The�Contacts�menu�item�has�been�replaced�by�the�Office
menu�item�in�the�central�information�display.
The�data�on�the�mobile�phone�can�only�be�read.�This�means�that�the�data�on�the�mobile�phone�cannot
be�modified�by�the�Combox.
The�"Office�update"�display�tells�the�user�about�the�number�of�new�messages,�which�tasks�are�active
and�forthcoming�deadlines.
28
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
4.�Telephone�Systems
Office�update�display
The�calendar�can�display�deadlines�of�the�last�30�days�and�for�the�next�90�days.
If�an�appointment�contains�phone�numbers�or�email�addresses,�they�can�be�used�directly�or�saved�to
the�Contacts.
Appointment�view
SMS,�aimless,�appointment�entries,�tasks�and�notes�can�be�read�out.
Information�on�the�Office�functions�supported�on�your�mobile�phone�can�be�found�online�at
http://www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth.
Office�for�iPhone
On�an�iPhone�the�Office�functions�calendar�and�email�are�not�supported.�The�calendar�display�is�cur-
rently�only�possible�using�an�App�in�connection�with�optional�equipment�BMW�Apps�(optional�equip-
ment�6NR).
29
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
4.�Telephone�Systems
Office�for�Blackberry
When�using�the�Office�function�on�Blackberry�devices�please�take�note�of�the�following�four�points:
1)�Office�functions�must�be�supported�by�the�mobile�phone.�More�information�is�available�online�at
http://www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth.
BMW�Bluetooth�Internet�page
2)�Office�function�must�be�activated�in�the�headunit.
Activation�of�Office�function�in�Central�Information�Display�(CID)
3)�The�coding�setting�of�the�Blackberry�must�be�deactivated.
4)�There�must�be�no�more�than�500�emails�in�the�inbox�of�the�Blackberry.
30
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
4.�Telephone�Systems
When�using�the�calendar�function�an�App�also�has�to�be�installed�for�the�Blackberry.
App�for�calendar�function�with�Blackberry
If�the�Office�functions�are�not�available�although�all�known�points�are�fulfilled,�deactivate�the�Bluetooth
connection�in�the�headunit�and�on�the�mobile�phone.�Then�reactivate�the�Bluetooth�connection.�Infor-
mation�on�deactivating�and�activating�the�Bluetooth�connections�is�available�in�the�Owner's�Handbook
and�online�at�http://www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth.
31
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
5.�Video�System
Video�from�Digital�Versatile�Disc�(DVD)�can�be�viewed�in�the�Central�Information�Display�(CID)�of�the
F30.�For�safety�reasons,�the�video�picture�in�the�CID�is�switched�off�during�the�journey�and�a�note�is
displayed�instead.
The�following�optional�equipment�is�offered:
• DVD�changer�for�6�DVDs.
Playing�video�DVDs�with�the�DVD�changer�for�6�DVDs�is�only�possible�in�connection�with�Navigation
System�(optional�equipment�609).
As�well�as�playing�back�films,�interactive�media�such�as�travel�guides,�reference�works,�catalogues,�etc.
can�be�displayed.�Multiple�channel�audio�formats�are�supported�in�conjunction�with�the�Top�HiFi�ampli-
fier�(optional�equipment�688�HiFi�loudspeaker�system�Harman�Kardon).
5.1.�Functional�diagram
F30�system�wiring�diagram�video�function
32
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
5.�Video�System
Index Explanation
1 Central�information�display�(CID)
2 Car�Information�Computer�(CIC)
3 6-disc�DVD�changer,�in�glove�box
4 Base�plate�with�video�integration
5 TRSVC�control�unit
6 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
7 Controller
Three�systems�are�involved�as�video�sources�in�connection�with�the�Navigation�headunit�(optional
equipment�609)�in�the�F30:
• DVD�changer
• TRSVC�control�unit�(with�optional�equipment�3AG�reversing�camera�or�optional�equipment
5DL�Surround�View)
• Base�plate�with�video�integration�(with�optional�equipment�6NR�BMW�Apps).
The�transmission�of�the�video�data�is�realized�via�color�Video�Blanking�Signal�(FBAS).�The�Car�Informa-
tion�Computer�(CIC)�headunit�with�optional�equipment�609�used�in�the�F30�only�has�three�(FBAS)�Sig-
nal�connections,�however.�As�no�video�switch�is�available�in�the�F30�only�three�video�sources�can�be
installed.
33
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
6.�BMW�ConnectedDrive
BMW�ConnectedDrive�is�effectively�a�personal�assistant�to�the�driver.�It�utilizes�the�latest�technologies
with�the�aim�of�supplying�the�driver�with�all�the�information�that�he/she�wants�and�needs.�With�the�mar-
ket�introduction�of�the�F01�the�BMW�ConnectedDrive�has�been�enhanced�with�a�further�innovation:
use�of�the�Internet�inside�the�vehicle.
In�the�F30�many�of�the�BMW�ConnectedDrive�functions�already�familiar�from�current�BMW�models�are
used,�such�as�e.g.:
• “BMW�Assist”�(option�6NL)�adds�BMW�Online�service�(option�615)
• “Apps”�(option�6NR)�adds�“BMW�Assist”�(option�6NL)
• “BMW�Online�service”�(option�615)
For�some�BMW�ConnectedDrive�services�the�optional�equipment�Mobile�phone�preparation�with�con-
nection�for�Bluetooth�and�USB�devices�with�telematics�services�(option�6NL)�and�an�active�BMW�Con-
nectedDrive�agreement�are�required.
For�further�information�on�the�optional�equipment�“Apps”�(option�6NR)�and�the�associated�video�con-
nection�of�smartphones,�please�refer�to�the�“Apps/ConnectedDrive”�training�information.
6.1.�BMW�Online�formally�BMW�Search
A�new�improved�interface�for�the�service�is�used�in�the�F30�with�the�optional�equipment�BMW�Online.
The�interface�can�be�personalized�by�the�customer�better�than�before�and�new�features�and�services
can�be�added�by�the�customer.
The�optional�equipment�Mobile�phone�preparation�with�connection�for�Bluetooth�and�USB�devices
with�telematics�services�(option�6NL)�and�an�active�BMW�ConnectedDrive�agreement�are�required�for
BMW�Online�functionality.
BMW�Online�display�in�the�CID
The�ConnectedDrive�Services�team�is�pleased�to�announce�exciting�changes�to�the�BMW�Online�ex-
perience��The�BMW�Online�service�brings�the�latest�Stock�Indexes,�News,�Weather,�Google�Local
Search�results,�Send�to�Mail,�and�Fuel�Prices�to�your�vehicle’s�navigation�system.�These�will�be�avail-
able�in�the�basic�view�depending�on�the�vehicle�equipment.�Other�applications�are�available�under�"Ap-
plications".
34
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
6.�BMW�ConnectedDrive
The�respective�information�is�transferred�to�the�vehicle�by�means�of�an�Internet�connection�via�an�on-
line�portal�developed�and�made�available�by�BMW�and�shown�on�the�control�display�of�the�iDrive�op-
erating�system.�The�enhanced�offering�is�available�without�any�additional�cost�to�not�only�future�cus-
tomers,�but�also�to�a�variety�of�customers�already�registered�for�BMW�ConnectedDrive.
SERVICES�INCLUDED:
Stock�Indexes�-�Want�to�know�the�Dow�Jones,�S&P�500�or�NASDAQ�indices?�BMW�Online�provides
these�indices�right�on�your�control�display.�News�–�With�BMW�Online,�the�latest�US,�Business,�World,
Sports,�Entertainment,�and�BMW�news�headlines�are�available�to�you.�They�can�even�be�read�out�auto-
matically�by�the�vehicle’s�Text-to-Speech�feature.
BMW�Online�News�display�in�the�CID
Weather�-�BMW�Online�provides�the�latest�5-day�weather�forecast�and�even�provides�weather�advi-
sories�and�warnings.�You�can�search�for�weather�at�your�current�location,�your�destination,�or�any�other
location�in�the�US.
BMW�Online�Weather�display�in�the�CID
Google�Local�Search�-�With�Google�Local�Search,�you�can�search�for�a�business�listing�to�get�impor-
tant�information�like�the�address�and�phone�number.�Then,�you�can�set�the�address�as�a�destination�in
your�navigation�or�call�the�business�via�your�Bluetooth-connected�phone.
BMW�Online�Google�display�in�the�CID
35
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
6.�BMW�ConnectedDrive
Fuel�Prices�-�The�latest�fuel�price�information�is�just�a�few�clicks�away��With�BMW�Online,�you�can
search�for�fuel�stations�nearby�and�sort�by�price�or�distance.
BMW�Online�Fuel�price�display�in�the�CID
Send�to�Mail�-�With�the�Send�to�Mail�application,�you�can�email�your�vehicle’s�current�location�and
destination�to�any�email�address.
BMW�Online�Send�to�Mail�display�in�the�CID
The�F30�will�have�the�updated�BMW�Online�display�screen�from�the�start�of�production.�All�current
BMW�vehicles�with�this�option�will�have�these�new�screens�starting�December�1,�2011.�This�will�be�au-
tomatically�updated�when�opening�the�online�features�after�December�1st�on�all�vehicles.
Changes�Starting�December�1,�2011
Display�Before�December�1,�2011
Display�Starting�December�1,�2011
36
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
6.�BMW�ConnectedDrive
HOW�TO�START�BMW�ONLINE:
For�all�cars�produced�before�March�2011,�and�X�vehicles�produced�before�April�2011:
Step�1:�From�the�main�iDrive�menu,�select�BMW�Assist
Step�2:�Once�in�the�BMW�Assist�menu,�select�BMW�Search
Step�3:�After�a�brief�moment,�the�vehicle�connects�to�the�BMW�Online�service
Step�4:�You�may�now�see�a�Welcome�screen.�If�so,�select�the�“Now”�text�to�proceed.�Then,�you�will
now�be�connected�to�BMW�Online
Step�5:�Please�allow�a�moment�for�the�service�to�connect,�and�then�you�will�see�the�main�menu�screen
For�all�cars�produced�after�March�2011,�and�X�vehicles�produced�after�April�2011:
Step�1:�From�the�main�iDrive�menu,�select�ConnectedDrive
Step�2:�Once�in�the�ConnectedDrive�menu,�select�BMW�Online
Step�3:�After�a�brief�moment,�the�vehicle�connects�to�the�BMW�Online�service
Step�4:�You�may�now�see�a�Welcome�screen.�If�so,�select�the�“Now”�text�to�proceed.�Then,�you�will
now�be�connected�to�BMW�Online
Step�5:�Please�allow�a�moment�for�the�service�to�connect,�and�then�you�will�see�the�main�menu�screen
6.2.�HOW�TO�ACCESS�THE�SERVICES
News,�Weather,�and�Google�Local�Search�Once�you�are�connected�to�the�BMW�Online�service,�you�will
be�able�to�access�News,�Weather,�and�Google�Local�Search�directly�from�the�main�menu.
BMW�Online�Main�Menu�display�in�the�CID
Other�Applications�(Fuel�Prices,�Send�to�Mail)�Some�Applications�are�not�shown�on�the�main�menu
and�instead�are�available�via�the�Applications�menu.�To�use�these�applications,�you�must�add�them�to
your�Applications�menu.
37
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
6.�BMW�ConnectedDrive
HOW�TO�ADD�AN�APPLICATION
New�applications�will�be�added�periodically�to�BMW�Online.�In�order�to�get�these�applications,�you
must�add�them�via�the�Applications�menu.
Step�1:�Select�the�Applications�menu
Step�2:�Select�the�Applications�button�from�the�upper-right�corner
Step�3:�On�the�“Add�application”�menu,�select�the�application�to�add
Step�4:�On�the�next�screen,�you�will�see�a�description�of�the�application.�Select�“Add”�to�add�the�appli-
cation.
Step�5:�You�will�now�be�able�to�access�the�application,�under�the�“Applications”�menu�in�the�main
menu.
38
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
7.�Personal�Profile
Personal�Profile�stores�personally�input�data,�such�as�e.g.�the�automatic�setting�of�the�exterior�mirrors
or�the�speed-dependent�volume,�in�the�corresponding�control�units.
Personal�Profile�operating�principle
Index Explanation
A Import/export�via�USB�interface
B Controller
C Import/export�via�BMW�Online
1 User�profile�1�connected�with�an�ID�transmitter
2 User�profile�2�connected�with�an�ID�transmitter
3 User�profile�3�connected�with�an�ID�transmitter
4 Guest�profile�can�only�be�selected�via�the�controller
There�is�a�total�of�four�profiles�in�the�vehicle.�Three�of�these�can�be�adapted�for�different�persons�and
assigned�to�different�ID�transmitters.�Once�the�vehicle�is�unlocked�via�the�ID�transmitter,�the�system
recognizes�the�profile�assigned�to�the�ID�transmitter�and�activates�it.
A�guest�profile�can�be�activated�in�addition�to�the�three�profiles�which�can�be�assigned�to�ID�transmit-
ters.�The�guest�profile�can�be�used�to�make�individual�settings�without�affecting�the�three�personal
profiles.�The�guest�profile�can�be�activated�in�the�Settings�menu�in�the�CID.
39
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
7.�Personal�Profile
Information�for�Service:
When�receiving�a�vehicle�with�Personal�Profile,�it�is�important�to�ensure�that�the�guest�profile�is�activat-
ed.�In�this�way,�the�settings�made�by�the�vehicle�user�are�not�altered.
Profiles�can�be�imported�and�exported�by�means�of�the�USB�interface�or�BMW�Online.�Which�USB�port
can�be�used�to�import�and�export�the�profiles�is�dependent�on�the�vehicle's�equipment�specification:
Personal�profile�is�always�stored�in�the�headunit.�Vehicles�with�navigation�(option�609)�have�a�USB�port
in�the�glovebox�to�perform�import/export�of�data.
With�the�standard�radio�in�combination�with�the�Hands-free�system�with�USB�interface�(option�6NH),
personal�profile�can�be�imported/exported�through�the�USB�connection�in�the�center�console�because
this�is�connected�to�the�headunit.
With�the�standard�radio�in�combination�with�the�Mobile�phone�preparation�with�connection�for�Blue-
tooth�and�USB�devices�(option�6NL)�it�is�not�possible�to�import/export�through�the�USB�connection�in
the�center�console�because�this�is�connected�to�the�Combox�and�not�the�headunit.
Exported�profiles�can�also�be�imported�to�other�vehicles.�Which�settings�of�the�profiles�are�adopted
during�import�to�another�vehicle�is�dependent�on�the�vehicle�model�and�its�equipment�specification.
During�import�only�settings�of�functions�which�are�identical�in�both�vehicles�are�adopted.�If�a�setting
cannot�be�imported,�the�current�setting�of�the�existing�profile�is�retained.
Personal�Profile�settings�in�the�CID
40
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
8.�Navigation
Map�updating�for�navigation�is�performed�in�the�F30�via�a�USB�interface�which�is�connected�to�the
headunit.�The�USB�port�in�glove�box�must�be�used�for�map�updating.�In�vehicles�with�the�USB�port�in
the�center�console,�this�cannot�be�used�for�map�updating�since�the�USB�is�connected�to�the�COM-
BOX.
41
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
9.�Antenna�Systems
The�F30�has�different�antenna�systems,�depending�on�the�national-market�version�and�optional�equip-
ment�used:
Antenna�diversity�is�used�in�vehicles�with�Navigation�system�(optional�equipment�609),�while�phase�di-
versity�is�used�in�vehicles�with�the�standard�radio�equipment.
The�remote�control�service�Antenna�and�the�emergency�call�antenna�are�located�above�at�the�partition
wall�to�the�luggage�compartment�in�the�F30.
The�following�graphic�provides�an�overview�of�the�antenna�system�components.
F30�Antenna�system
42
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
9.�Antenna�Systems
Index Explanation
1 Roof�antenna
2 Antenna�diversity/Phase�diversity
3 Wave�trap,�heated�rear�window
4 Emergency�call�antenna
5 Remote�control�services�antenna
6 Interference�suppression�filter,�audio/additional�brake�light
You�can�see�the�layout�of�the�antennas�in�the�rear�window�on�the�following�graphic.
F30�Antenna�system,�rear�window
Index Explanation
1 Connection�of�heated�rear�window�to�wave�trap
2 AM�antenna
3 Antenna�diversity/Phase�diversity
4 DAB�Band�III�antenna�(not�US)
5 Antenna�FM1
6 Antenna�FM2
43
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
9.�Antenna�Systems
9.1.�Antenna�and�phase�diversity
Operating�principle,�antenna�and�phase�diversity
Index Explanation
A Antenna�diversity�with�(option�609)�Navigation
B Phase�diversity�(standard�radio)
1 Antenna�signal�strong
2 Antenna�signal�weak
3 Diversity�including�amplifier
4 Tuner�module�in�headunit
5 Digital�signal�processor�(DSP)
Vehicles�with�Navigation�(option�609)�are�equipped�with�antenna�diversity.�The�antenna�diversity
boosts�the�signals�of�the�two�FM�antennas�and�evaluates�the�signal�levels�of�the�two�radio�signals.
The�antenna�with�the�better�input�signal�is�used�for�radio�reception.�The�system�switches�to�the�other
FM�antenna�if�the�signal�quality�of�the�received�radio�station�is�inadequate�in�terms�of�quality�and�field
strength.�The�switch-on�signal�for�the�antenna�diversity�and�the�power�supply�is�made�available�to�the
antenna�diversity�via�the�interference�suppression�filter�of�the�additional�brake�light.
Vehicles�with�the�standard�radio�equipment�are�equipped�with�phase�diversity.�The�radio�signals�of�the
two�FM�antennas�are�boosted�in�the�phase�diversity�module�and�transmitted�to�the�Basic�headunit.
The�radio�signals�are�digitized�in�the�Basic�headunit.�An�improved�signal�is�then�calculated�from�the
two�radio�signals�with�the�aid�of�an�algorithm�in�a�digital�signal�processor�(DSP).�The�switch-on�signal
44
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
9.�Antenna�Systems
for�the�phase�diversity�and�the�power�supply�is�made�available�by�the�headunit.�For�updating�the�list
of�stations�only�the�signal�from�one�antenna�is�used�briefly�for�radio�reception�and�the�signal�from�the
other�antenna�is�used�for�scanning�the�frequencies.�The�interval�for�updating�the�list�of�stations�de-
pends�on�the�signal�quality�of�the�stronger�antenna,�but�occurs�at�the�latest�every�four�minutes.
9.2.�Bluetooth�Antenna
The�Bluetooth�antenna�for�the�F30�is�conceived�as�an�open�item�and�supplied�as�part�of�the�wiring�har-
ness.�A�non-connected�antenna�can�no�longer�be�identified�by�this�design.�In�vehicles�which�do�not
have�a�Combox�the�Bluetooth�antenna�is�located�under�the�center�console.�In�vehicles�which�do�have�a
Combox�the�Bluetooth�antenna�is�located�in�the�area�of�the�left�C-pillar
45
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
9.�Antenna�Systems
9.3.�System�wiring�diagram
System�wiring�diagram,�antennas�in�the�F30
46
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
9.�Antenna�Systems
Index Explanation
1 Operating�facility,�integrated�automatic�heating�/�air�conditioning�(IHKA)
2 Integrated�automatic�heating�/�air�conditioning�(IHKA)
3 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
4 Remote�control�services�antenna
5 Power�distribution�box,�luggage�compartment
6 Rear�Electronic�Module�(REM)
7 Wave�trap,�heated�rear�window
8 Connection�of�heated�rear�window�to�wave�trap
9 Heated�rear�window
10 Connection�of�heated�rear�window�to�wave�trap
11 Combox
12 Video�Module�(not�US)
13 Antenna/phase�diversity�(with�amplifier)
14 Line�for�switch-on�signal�(only�in�vehicles�with�antenna�diversity)
15 Additional�brake�light
16 Interference�suppression�filter,�additional�brake�light
17 Bluetooth�antenna�in�vehicles�with�COMBOX
18 Emergency�call�antenna
19 Roof�antenna�(telephone,�SDARS�and�GPS)
20 Base�plate
21 Bluetooth�antenna�in�vehicles�without�COMBOX
22 Headunit
23 Antenna�in�inside�mirror�(VICS)�(for�Japan�only)
47
Bayerische�Motorenwerke�Aktiengesellschaft
Händlerqualifizierung�und�Training
Röntgenstraße�7
85716�Unterschleißheim,�Germany
Technical�training.
Product�information.
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
BMW�Service
General�information
Symbols�used
The�following�symbol�is�used�in�this�document�to�facilitate�better�comprehension�or�to�draw�attention
to�very�important�information:
Contains�important�safety�information�and�information�that�needs�to�be�observed�strictly�in�order�to
guarantee�the�smooth�operation�of�the�system.
Information�status�and�national-market�versions
BMW�Group�vehicles�meet�the�requirements�of�the�highest�safety�and�quality�standards.�Changes�in
requirements�for�environmental�protection,�customer�benefits�and�design�render�necessary�continu-
ous�development�of�systems�and�components.�Consequently,�there�may�be�discrepancies�between
the�contents�of�this�document�and�the�vehicles�available�in�the�training�course.
This�document�basically�relates�to�the�European�version�of�left-hand�drive�vehicles.�Some�operating
elements�or�components�are�arranged�differently�in�right-hand�drive�vehicles�than�shown�in�the�graph-
ics�in�this�document.�Further�differences�may�arise�as�a�result�of�the�equipment�specification�in�specif-
ic�markets�or�countries.
Additional�sources�of�information
Further�information�on�the�individual�topics�can�be�found�in�the�following:
• Owner's�Handbook
• Integrated�Service�Technical�Application.
Contact:�[email protected]
©2011�BMW�AG,�Munich,�Germany
Reprints�of�this�publication�or�its�parts�require�the�written�approval�of�BMW�AG,�Munich
The�information�contained�in�this�document�forms�an�integral�part�of�the�technical�training�of�the�BMW
Group�and�is�intended�for�the�trainer�and�participants�in�the�seminar.�Refer�to�the�latest�relevant�infor-
mation�systems�of�the�BMW�Group�for�any�changes/additions�to�the�technical�data.
Information�status:�September�2011
VH-23/International�Technical�Training
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
Contents
1. Introduction............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 1
1.1. The�hidden�protector.......................................................................................................................................................................................1
2. Models............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2
2.1. Overview............................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2
3. System�Overview.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3
3.1. System�wiring�diagrams..............................................................................................................................................................................3
3.1.1. Bus�overview................................................................................................................................................................................4
3.1.2. System�wiring�diagram� ..............................................................................................................................................7
4. Functions..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 9
4.1. Functions�of�Crash�Safety�Module� .......................................................................................................................................... 9
4.2. Crash-relevant�functions............................................................................................................................................................................ 9
4.2.1. Evaluating�the�sensor�signals.......................................................................................................................10
4.2.2. Crash�detection...................................................................................................................................................................10
4.2.3. Trigger�time�and�trigger�sequence...................................................................................................... 11
4.2.4. Activation�of�the�ignition�circuit�output�stages..................................................................11
4.2.5. Sending�the�crash�message...........................................................................................................................11
4.2.6. Crash�documentation................................................................................................................................................ 12
4.2.7. Emergency�call�function....................................................................................................................................... 12
4.3. System-monitoring�functions........................................................................................................................................................ 13
4.3.1. System�self�test................................................................................................................................................................. 13
4.3.2. Display�of�system�operability........................................................................................................................ 13
4.3.3. Cyclic�monitoring........................................................................................................................................................... 13
4.3.4. Fault�display�and�fault�storage.................................................................................................................... 13
4.3.5. Output�of�faults�(diagnosis)............................................................................................................................. 14
4.3.6. Acoustic�and�visual�seat�belt�warning.............................................................................................14
4.3.7. CIS�Mat............................................................................................................................................................................................ 14
5. System�Components......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 15
5.1. Crash�Safety�Module� .................................................................................................................................................................................15
5.2. Sensors�and�switches................................................................................................................................................................................ 15
5.2.1. Lateral�and�longitudinal�acceleration�sensor,�B-pillar.............................................. 16
5.2.2. Door�airbag�sensor�(pressure)..................................................................................................................... 16
5.2.3. Front�sensor........................................................................................................................................................................... 17
5.2.4. Sensors�in�the�ICM....................................................................................................................................................... 18
5.2.5. CIS�mat............................................................................................................................................................................................ 18
5.2.6. Seat�belt�buckle�switch.......................................................................................................................................... 19
5.2.7. Emergency�call�button............................................................................................................................................ 19
5.2.8. Seat-position�sensors............................................................................................................................................... 19
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
Contents
5.3. Actuators......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 20
5.3.1. Overview......................................................................................................................................................................................... 20
5.3.2. Driver's�airbag........................................................................................................................................................................22
5.3.3. Front�passenger�airbag.......................................................................................................................................... 22
5.3.4. Knee�airbag............................................................................................................................................................................... 23
5.3.5. Head�airbag� ............................................................................................................................................................................. 23
5.3.6. Side�airbag,�front.............................................................................................................................................................. 24
5.3.7. Seat�belt�buckle�tensioner................................................................................................................................ 25
5.3.8. Automatic�tensioner�with�linear�mechanical�force�limiter................................. 26
5.3.9. Safety�battery�terminal............................................................................................................................................ 26
5.3.10. Airbag�indicator�light.................................................................................................................................................. 27
5.3.11. Seat�belt�warning�light.............................................................................................................................................28
5.3.12. Indicator�lamp�for�front�passenger�airbag�deactivation........................................ 28
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
1.�Introduction
1.1.�The�hidden�protector
The�passive�safety�system�of�the�F30�is�based�on�the�objectives�and�characteristics�of�current�BMW
models.�The�passive�safety�system�fulfils�all�legislative�requirements�worldwide.
For�this,�extensive�measures�were�performed�on�the�body�and�on�the�occupants'�safety�and�protection
systems.�In�addition�to�the�restraint�system,�a�special�body�structure�with�a�defined�crash�behavior�is
also�part�of�the�passive�safety�system.�In�the�event�of�an�accident,�the�forces�introduced�are�reduced�in
a�defined�manner�and�therefore�have�less�of�an�impact�on�the�occupants.
The�restraint�systems�ensure�that�the�risk�of�injury�is�further�reduced.
The�4th�generation�Advanced�Crash�Safety�Module�ACSM�is�used�as�the�central�airbag�control�unit�for
the�passive�safety�system�in�the�F30.�The�central�sensor�system�is�incorporated�in�the�ICM.
F30�Passive�safety�system
1
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
2.�Models
2.1.�Overview
In�the�4th�generation,�the�passive�safety�system�is�installed�as�a�Crash�Safety�Module�in�the�F30.�The
following�table�provides�an�overview�of�the�versions�installed�for�different�models:
2
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
3.�System�Overview
3.1.�System�wiring�diagrams
The�following�bus�overview�shows�the�vehicle�circuit�structure�of�the�F30�and�incorporation�of�the
modules�on�the�PT-CAN.
3
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
3.�System�Overview
3.1.1.�Bus�overview
F30�Bus�overview
4
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
3.�System�Overview
Index Explanation
1 Control�units�with�wake-up�authorization
2 Start-up�node�control�units�for�starting�and�synchronizing�the�FlexRay�bus
system
ACSM Advanced�Crash�Safety�Module
AMPT Top-HiFi�amplifier
COMBOX Combox�(Combox�emergency�call,�Multimedia�Combox)
CON Controller
D-CAN Diagnosis-on-Controller�Area�Network
DME Digital�Engine�Electronics�(DME)
DSC Dynamic�Stability�Control
DVDC DVD�changer
EGS Electronic�transmission�control
EKPS Electronic�fuel�pump�control
EPS Electromechanical�Power�Steering
Ethernet Cable-based�data�network�technology�for�local�data�networks
FEM Front�Electronic�Module
FLA High-beam�assistant
FlexRay Fast,�preset�and�fault-tolerant�bus�system�for�use�in�automotive�sector
FZD Roof�function�center
GWS Gear�selector�lever
HEADUNIT/CIC Headunit�(Car�Information�Computer�or�Basic�headunit)
ICM Integrated�Chassis�Management
IHKA Integrated�automatic�heating�/�air�conditioning
K-CAN Body�controller�area�network
K-CAN2 Body�controller�area�network�2
KAFAS Camera-based�driver�assistance�systems
KOMBI Instrument�cluster�(MOST�only�with�option 6WA)
MOST Media�Oriented�System�Transport
OBD On-board�diagnosis�(diagnostic�socket)
PDC Park�Distance�Control�(with�option�5DP,�parking�manoeuvring�assistant:
integrated�in�the�parking�manoeuvring�assistant�control�unit,�otherwise
integrated�in�the�Rear�Electronic�Module�control�unit)
PMA Parking�manoeuvring�assistant
PT-CAN Powertrain�controller�area�network
PT-CAN2 Powertrain�controller�area�network�2
RAD Radio
5
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
3.�System�Overview
Index Explanation
REM Rear�Electronic�Module
REMA�LI Reversible�electromotive�automatic�reel,�left�(not�US)
REMA�RE Reversible�electromotive�automatic�reel,�right�(not�US)
SMFA Seat�module,�driver
SWW Lane�change�warning
TPMS Tire�Pressure�Monitoring�System
TRSVC Control�unit�for�all-round�vision�camera
VDM Vertical�Dynamics�Management
ZGM Central�gateway�module
6
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
3.�System�Overview
3.1.2.�System�wiring�diagram
F30�System�wiring�diagram
7
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
3.�System�Overview
Index Explanation
1 Front�sensor,�left�engine�support
2 Instrument�cluster
3 Crash�Safety�Module
4 Front�sensor,�right�engine�support
5 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
6 Terminal�30
7 Airbag�sensor,�door,�right�(pressure)
8 Head�airbag,�front�passenger
9 Acceleration�sensor,�B-pillar�on�right
10 Indicator�lamp�for�front�passenger�airbag�deactivation�in�roof�function�center
11 Knee�airbag,�front�passenger
12 Front�passenger�airbag,�two-stage�with�ventilation
13 Seat�belt�buckle�contact,�front�passenger
14 Seat-position�sensor,�front�passenger
15 Seat�belt�buckle�tensioner,�front�passenger
16 Seat�occupancy�mat,�CIS�mat
17 Side�airbag,�front�passenger
18 Automatic�tensioner,�front�passenger
19 Adaptive�belt�force�limiter,�front�passenger�(not�US)
20 Safety�battery�terminal
21 COMBOX
22 Integrated�Chassis�Management
23 Side�airbag,�driver's�side
24 Seat�belt�buckle�tensioner,�driver
25 Seat-position�sensor,�driver�(not�US)
26 Seat�belt�buckle�contact,�driver
27 Adaptive�belt�force�limiter,�driver�(not�US)
28 Automatic�tensioner,�driver
29 Acceleration�sensor,�B-pillar�on�left
30 Head�airbag,�driver
31 Driver's�airbag,�two-stage�with�ventilation
32 Knee�airbag,�driver
33 Clock�spring
34 Airbag�sensor,�door,�left�(pressure)
8
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
4.�Functions
4.1.�Functions�of�Crash�Safety�Module
The�function�of�the�Crash�Safety�Module�is�to�permanently�evaluate�all�sensor�signals�in�order�to�iden-
tify�a�crash�situation.�As�a�result�of�the�sensor�signals�and�their�evaluation,�the�Crash�Safety�Module
identifies�the�direction�of�the�crash�and�the�severity�of�the�impact.
The�ACSM�evaluates�the�information�from�the�sensors�and�then�forwards�corresponding�measures�for
selective�activation�of�the�necessary�restraint�systems.
The�Crash�Safety�Module�monitors�the�system�itself�and�indicates�when�it�is�ready�for�operation�by
switching�off�the�airbag�indicator�light.
If�an�error�occurs�during�operation�this�is�stored�in�a�fault�memory.�and�can�be�read�out�for�diagnosis
purposes.
If�a�crash�situation�is�detected,�a�crash�message�is�sent�to�the�other�bus�users�in�the�data�bus�network
as�notification.�The�relevant�control�units�respond�to�this�signal�by�executing�their�own�activities�ac-
cording�to�the�severity�of�the�crash.
The�activities�include:
• Opening�the�central�locking�system
• Activating�the�hazard�warning�flasher
• Switching�on�the�interior�light
• Deactivating�the�electric�fuel�pump
• Making�an�emergency�call.
An�additional�function�of�the�Crash�Safety�Module�is�the�acoustic�seat�belt�warning�that�reminds�the
driver�and�front�passenger�using�visual�and�acoustic�signals�to�fasten�their�seat�belts.�Seat�belt�buck-
le�switches�are�used�to�identify�whether�the�driver�and/or�the�front�passenger�have�their�seat�belts�fas-
tened.�Information�on�occupancy�of�the�front�passenger�seat�is�also�included�for�the�acoustic�seat�belt
warning.�Furthermore�the�position�of�the�driver�and�the�front�passenger�seat�is�monitored.
The�functions�of�the�Crash�Safety�Module�generally�belong�to�one�of�the�following�areas:
• Crash-relevant�functions
• System-monitoring�functions
• Additional�convenience�functions.
4.2.�Crash-relevant�functions
The�Crash�Safety�Module�must�fulfil�the�following�crash-relevant�functions:
• Evaluating�the�sensor�signals
• Crash�detection
• Determining�actuators�to�be�activated
• Specifying�the�trigger�time�and�trigger�sequence
9
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
4.�Functions
• Activation�of�the�ignition�circuit�output�stages
• Sending�the�crash�message�to�all�bus�users
• Crash�documentation
• Emergency�call�function.
4.2.1.�Evaluating�the�sensor�signals
The�sensors�serve�to�identify�and�verify�head-on,�side-on�and�rear-end�crashes�and�also�as�roll-over
detection.
The�sensors�are�directly�connected�to�the�Crash�Safety�Module�where�their�signals�are�evaluated�and
processed.
4.2.2.�Crash�detection
All�F30�vehicles�are�equipped�with�the�following�sensors:
• One�lateral�and�one�longitudinal�acceleration�sensor�in�the�B-pillars�(green)
• One�airbag�sensor�to�monitor�the�pressure�in�each�of�the�front�doors�(blue)
• One�lateral�and�one�longitudinal�acceleration�sensor�in�the�ICM�(yellow)
• One�roll�rate�sensor�in�the�ICM�(yellow)
• One�vertical�acceleration�sensor�in�the�ICM�(yellow)
• One�front�sensor�on�each�of�the�engine�supports�(red).
The�airbag�sensors�in�the�car�doors�assist�with�the�identification�of�a�side-on�crash.
The�front�sensors�on�the�engine�supports�assist�with�the�identification�of�a�head-on�crash�and�the�cor-
responding�severity.
F30�Sensors
10
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
4.�Functions
4.2.3.�Trigger�time�and�trigger�sequence
The�Crash�Safety�Module�uses�the�values�transmitted�by�the�sensors�to�determine�the�direction�and
severity�of�the�crash.
In�the�case�of�a�head-on�crash,�corresponding�high�acceleration�values�from�the�longitudinal�accelera-
tion�sensors�in�the�B-pillar�and�ICM�respectively�must�be�detected�for�example.�An�algorithm�uses�the
accelerations�to�calculate�the�severity�and�direction�of�the�crash.�This�information�is�used�to�assist�cal-
culation�of�the�trigger�times�and�sequence�in�which�the�restraint�systems�are�activated.
A�possible�imminent�rollover�is�also�detected�and�the�appropriate�protection�systems�are�energized.
4.2.4.�Activation�of�the�ignition�circuit�output�stages
The�Crash�Safety�Module�is�supplied�by�the�FEM�with�terminal�30B.�The�Crash�Safety�Module�is�in�of-
fline�mode�with�terminal�30B.�This�means�that�it�is�active�on�the�data�bus�and�can�perform�all�diagnos-
tic�functions.�Triggering�of�the�ignition�circuits�is�blocked�and�is�only�enabled�as�of�terminal�15�once
the�system�self-test�is�complete.�The�Crash�Safety�Module�is�also�ready�for�ignition,�even�with�the�logi-
cal�terminal�R�after�engine�off.
The�ignition�capacitors�are�recharged�via�a�switching�controller.�These�ignition�capacitors�make�the�fir-
ing�energy�available�in�the�event�of�a�crash.�If�the�voltage�supply�is�interrupted�during�a�crash,�the�igni-
tion�capacitors�serve�briefly�as�an�energy�reserve.
The�ignition�circuit�output�stages�consist�of�a�high-side�and�a�low-side�power�switch.�The�high-side
power�switch�connects�the�ignition�voltage,�while�the�low-side�power�switch�connects�to�the�ground.
The�ignition�circuit�output�stages�are�controlled�by�a�microcontroller.
The�high-side�and�low-side�power�switches�also�serve�to�check�the�ignition�circuits�during�the�system
self-test.
4.2.5.�Sending�the�crash�message
In�the�event�of�a�collision�involving�activation�of�the�restraint�systems,�the�Crash�Safety�Module�sends
a�crash�message�to�the�bus�users�in�the�bus-system�network.�In�tandem�with�this,�the�Combox�is
prompted�to�send�an�emergency�call�via�a�direct�single-wire�connection.
As�a�result,�the�respective�control�units�perform�the�following�functions�depending�on�the�crash�severi-
ty:
Function Control�unit
Switch�off�electric�fuel�pump Digital�Motor�Electronics�DME
via�electronic�fuel�pump�control�EKPS
Release�central�locking�system Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)�All�Doors
Rear�Electronic�Module�(REM)�Tailgate/Trunk
Switch�on�hazard�warning�flashers Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
Rear�Electronic�Module�(REM)
Switch�on�interior�light Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
Rear�Electronic�Module�(REM)
Send�emergency�call Combox
11
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
4.�Functions
4.2.6.�Crash�documentation
In�the�event�of�a�collision�where�one�or�more�actuators�are�activated,�a�crash�entry�is�stored�in�a�non-
erasable�memory.�After�three�crash�entries,�a�non-erasable�fault�entry�is�stored�in�the�fault�memory�to-
gether�with�the�information�that�the�three�crash�messages�have�been�saved.�The�airbag�indicator�light
also�lights�up�continuously.
The�three�crash�entries�could�also�be�stored�during�the�course�of�an�accident.�Each�crash�entry�is�as-
signed�a�system�time.�The�control�unit�remains�capable�of�firing�even�after�three�crash�entries.�The
crash�entries�cannot�be�erased�and�serve�the�purpose�of�subsequent�device�diagnosis.�A�maximum�of
three�crash�entries�can�be�stored.�The�control�unit�must�then�be�replaced.
4.2.7.�Emergency�call�function
The�emergency�call�functions�with�the�BMW�Assist.�This�means�an�appropriate�service�provider�with
a�call�center�must�be�available.�A�telephone�network�must�also�be�available�in�order�to�be�able�to�make
an�emergency�call.
The�BMW�Assist�optional�equipment�(option�6NL)�must�be�installed�for�the�emergency-call�function�to
be�available.
Manual�emergency�call
Drivers�who�are�not�directly�involved�in�the�accident�can�use�the�manual�emergency�call�to�request�as-
sistance.
The�emergency�call�button�is�located�in�the�roof�function�center�and�is�connected�to�the�Combox�di-
rectly.
Voice�contact�with�the�relevant�service�provider�for�the�country�is�established�by�pressing�the�emer-
gency�call�button.�The�voice�contact�is�indicated�by�a�flashing�LED�in�the�switch.
Automatic�emergency�call
The�Crash�Safety�Module�sends�a�message�to�the�Combox�in�the�event�of�an�accident�with�corre-
sponding�crash�severity.�The�Combox�sends�an�emergency�call,�and�also�the�location�of�the�vehicle�if
available.
Attempts�are�made�at�the�same�time�to�establish�a�voice�contact�with�the�occupants�of�the�vehicle�in
order�to�obtain�more�detailed�verbal�information�about�the�accident�(e.g.�condition�of�occupants).�Fur-
ther�rescue�operations�can�be�initiated�accordingly.
Advanced�Automatic�Crash�Notification
In�addition,�the�Advanced�Automatic�Crash�Notification�function�features�in�vehicles�with�BMW�Assist.
The�data�from�different�sensors�is�transferred�to�the�call�center�in�the�case�of�an�emergency�call,�for
example�the�status�of�the�belt�contacts�to�determine�the�number�of�persons�in�the�vehicle�or�sensor
data�on�the�severity�of�the�crash�to�obtain�the�probability�of�risk�of�injury.
12
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
4.�Functions
The�emergency�call�contains�additional�specific�information�on�the�circumstances�of�the�accident.
This�means�that�more�precise�information�regarding�the�accident�and�risk�of�injury�is�therefore�avail-
able�at�the�call�center�and�can�be�forwarded�to�the�emergency�coordination�center.�The�emergency�co-
ordination�center�can�then�initiate�appropriate�measures.
4.3.�System-monitoring�functions
The�Crash�Safety�Module�has�the�following�system-monitoring�functions:
• System�self-test�(pre-drive�check)
• Display�of�system�operability
• Cyclic�monitoring
• Fault�display�and�fault�storage
• Output�of�faults�(diagnosis)
• Acoustic�and�visual�seat�belt�warning
• Deactivation�of�the�front�passenger�airbag�and�side�airbag�and�knee�airbag�on�the�front�pas-
senger�side.
4.3.1.�System�self�test
The�Crash�Safety�Module�performs�a�system�self�test�from�terminal�15.�The�airbag�indicator�light�is�en-
ergized�for�roughly�five�seconds�during�the�system�self�test.
Once�the�system�self�test�is�complete�and�no�faults�have�been�identified,�the�airbag�indicator�light
goes�out�and�the�system�is�ready�to�operate.
4.3.2.�Display�of�system�operability
The�airbag�indicator�light�in�the�instrument�panel�goes�out�to�indicate�that�the�Crash�Safety�Module�is
ready�for�operation.
4.3.3.�Cyclic�monitoring
Once�the�system�self-test�has�been�successfully�concluded�and�the�system�is�ready�for�operation,
a�cyclic�monitoring�procedure�is�performed�for�fault-monitoring�purposes.�This�cyclical�monitoring
serves�the�internal�diagnosis�of�the�control�unit�and�overall�airbag�system.�Cyclical�monitoring�takes
place�continuously�from�terminal�15.�This�also�continues�when�logical�terminal�R�is�reached�after�the
engine�is�switched�off.
4.3.4.�Fault�display�and�fault�storage
The�Crash�Safety�Module�has�a�non-volatile�fault�memory.�The�airbag�indicator�light�lights�up�to�indi-
cate�a�fault�entry.
Events,�such�as�the�activation�of�an�airbag�or�seat�belt�buckle�tensioner,�are�also�stored�in�the�fault
memory.
13
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
4.�Functions
If�the�fault�memory�contains�the�entry�that�the�restraint�system�has�been�activated,�this�only�means�the
ignited�restraint�system�is�not�available�for�further�activation�and�not�that�it�malfunctioned�during�the
crash.
4.3.5.�Output�of�faults�(diagnosis)
The�fault�memory�can�be�read�out�via�the�diagnostic�interface�with�the�assistance�of�the�Integrated
Service�Technical�Application�ISTA�in�the�BMW�diagnosis�system.�After�rectifying�the�faults�or�after�re-
newing�activated�components,�the�fault�memory�can�be�cleared�with�the�diagnosis�command�"Clear
fault�memory".
4.3.6.�Acoustic�and�visual�seat�belt�warning
An�acoustic�and�visual�seat�belt�warning�is�a�standard�feature�of�all�vehicles�equipped�with�the�Crash
Safety�Module.�The�Crash�Safety�Module�records�whether�or�not�the�driver�or�front�passenger�have
fastened�their�seat�belts.�If�they�have�not,�an�acoustic�and�visual�warning�is�output�to�remind�them�to
fasten�their�seatbelts.�Both�seat�belt�buckle�switches�are�monitored�separately.
4.3.7.�CIS�Mat
Provision�is�made�in�the�F30�for�the�airbag�to�be�deactivated�automatically�in�order�to�satisfy�the�regu-
lations�of�the�National�Highway�Traffic�Safety�Administration�NHTSA.�When�the�child�seats�listed�in�the
regulation�are�occupied�by�a�child�this�must�lead�to�deactivation�of�the�airbag.
To�do�so,�a�seat�occupancy�mat�is�used�on�the�front�passenger�seat�for�the�purpose�of�occupancy�de-
tection�and�classification�of�occupants�in�the�front�passenger�seat.�A�further�development�of�the�Occu-
pant�Classification�3�mat�(OC3�mat),�the�Capacitive�Interior�Sensing�Mat�(CIS�mat)�is�used�in�the�F30.
The�CIS�mat�is�made�up�of�two�elements:�A�sensor�wire,�which�runs�parallel�to�the�seat�heating�in�the
seat�cushion�and�an�evaluation�unit.�The�CIS�mat�measures�the�capacity�and�ohmic�resistance�be-
tween�the�sensor�wire�(anode)�and�the�vehicle�ground�(cathode)�at�a�frequency�of�120�kHz.�The�CIS
mat�determines�from�the�change�in�capacity�and�resistance�whether�the�front�passenger�seat�is�occu-
pied�by�an�adult�or�a�child�in�a�child�seat.
The�deactivation�of�the�front�passenger�airbag,�the�side�airbag�and�knee�airbag�on�the�front�passenger
side�is�signalled�by�the�indicator�lamp�for�front�passenger�airbag�deactivation.
The�indicator�lamp�for�front�passenger�airbag�deactivation�in�the�roof�function�center�lights�up�if�a�child
seat�with�child�for�e.g.�a�child�restraint�system�that�has�been�tested�in�accordance�with�the�NHTSA
regulations�and�is�holding�a�small�child�is�detected�on�the�front�passenger�seat�or�if�the�front�passen-
ger�seat�is�unoccupied.
The�display�brightness�is�controlled�by�automatic�regulation�of�the�display�illumination.
14
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
5.�System�Components
5.1.�Crash�Safety�Module
The�Crash�Safety�Module�is�accommodated�in�a�housing�with�two�sockets.
The�wiring�harness�is�connected�via�one�of�the�sockets.�An�additional�socket�is�provided�for�the�cock-
pit�wiring�harness.
F30�Crash�Safety�Module
The�Crash�Safety�Module�is�located�in�the�F30�on�the�supporting�structure�of�the�cockpit�module�on
the�driver's�side.
The�Crash�Safety�Module�no�longer�contains�any�sensors.�The�sensors�are�located�in�the�ICM�on�the
transmission�tunnel.
5.2.�Sensors�and�switches
The�following�sensors�and�switches�are�installed:
• Lateral�and�longitudinal�acceleration�sensors�in�ICM
• Roll�rate�sensor�in�the�ICM
• Vertical�acceleration�sensor�in�the�ICM
• Lateral�and�longitudinal�acceleration�sensors�on�the�B-pillars
• One�airbag�sensor�for�pressure�in�each�of�the�front�doors�(blue)
• One�front�sensor�on�each�of�the�engine�supports
• CIS�mat�with�occupant�classification
15
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
5.�System�Components
• Seat�belt�buckle�switch
• Seat-position�sensor,�front�passenger
• Emergency�call�button
5.2.1.�Lateral�and�longitudinal�acceleration�sensor,�B-pillar
The�lateral�and�longitudinal�acceleration�sensors�in�the�B-pillars�assist�with�the�identification�of�head-
on�crashes,�side-on�crashes�and�rear-end�crashes.
The�B-pillar�airbag�sensor�consists�of�a�longitudinal�acceleration�sensor�and�a�lateral�acceleration�sen-
sor.�The�acceleration�sensors�measure�both�the�acceleration�and�the�deceleration�in�the�X�and�Y�direc-
tions.�The�resultant�from�the�X�and�Y�signals�is�decisive�in�identifying�the�direction�of�the�crash.�The
airbag�sensors�in�the�B-pillar�assist�with�the�identification�of�head-on,�side-on�and�rear-end�crashes.
The�B-pillar�airbag�sensors�on�the�left�and�right�are�of�identical�design�and�are�allocated�by�way�of�me-
chanical�coding�during�installation.
F30�Lateral�and�longitudinal�acceleration�sensor,�B-pillar
5.2.2.�Door�airbag�sensor�(pressure)
Pressure�sensors�are�installed�in�the�driver�and�front�passenger�doors.�Side�crashes�are�identified�with
the�assistance�of�the�airbag�sensors.�In�addition�to�the�lateral�acceleration�values�that�are�present,�the
pressure�in�the�door�cavity�also�increases�in�the�event�of�a�side-on�crash.
The�airbag�sensors�in�the�doors�serve�to�verify�the�plausibility�of�the�acceleration�signals�from�the�B-
pillar�airbag�sensors�and�the�ICM�when�a�side�crash�is�detected.�The�airbag�sensors�are�situated�in
the�inner�panel�of�the�doors�and�measure�the�increase�in�pressure�in�the�event�of�a�side�collision.�In
the�event�of�a�side�collision�with�the�door,�the�outer�panel�is�pressed�inward,�thus�reducing�the�volume
and�increasing�the�pressure�in�the�door�interior.�This�pressure�change�is�measured�by�the�airbag�sen-
sors.�The�airbag�sensor�also�includes�electronics,�in�addition�to�the�pressure�sensor,�that�digitize�the
16
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
5.�System�Components
pressure�readings�and�transmit�them�cyclically�to�the�Crash�Safety�Module.�The�data�is�transferred�in
the�same�way�as�the�B-pillar�airbag�sensors.�The�pressure�readings�are�evaluated�in�the�Crash�Safety
Module.
F12/F13�door�airbag�sensor�(pressure)
5.2.3.�Front�sensor
Two�front�sensors�are�installed�in�the�front�area�of�the�engine�support.�The�measured�values�are�for-
warded�to�the�Crash�Safety�Module�where�they�are�evaluated.
The�sensors�in�the�front�area�of�the�side�member�on�the�left�and�right�assist�with�identification�of�a
head-on�crash.
They�deliver�additional�information�to�the�crash�safety�module�on�the�characteristics�and�severity�of
the�collision.�Each�sensor�contains�an�acceleration�sensor�for�recording�the�deceleration,�signal�pro-
cessing�technology�and�an�ASIC�for�data�transfer.�The�measured�values�are�sent�in�the�form�of�a�data
telegram�to�the�crash�safety�module�and�are�used�in�the�calculation�of�the�algorithm.
F30�Up-front�sensor�engine�support
17
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
5.�System�Components
5.2.4.�Sensors�in�the�ICM
The�ICM�control�unit�is�located�centrally�on�the�transmission�tunnel.�In�addition�to�the�driving�dynamics
control�sensors,�the�ICM�in�the�F30�also�incorporates�longitudinal�and�lateral�acceleration�sensors�for
crash�detection.
In�order�for�the�ICM�to�be�able�to�transmit�the�sensor�data�directly�to�the�ACSM�4,�it�is�connected�to
the�latter�via�two�lines.�The�transmitted�data�is�evaluated�in�the�ACSM�4.
The�sensor�data�of�the�roll�rate�sensor�and�the�vertical�acceleration�sensor�is�transmitted�to�the�ACSM
via�the�two�additional�lines.
The�sensor�data�of�the�ICM�helps�the�ACSM�4�identify�side-on,�rear-end�or�head-on�crashes�and�as-
sists�with�roll-over�detection.
F30�ICM
Index Explanation
1 ICM�control�unit
5.2.5.�CIS�mat
The�capacitive�interior�sensing�mat�(CIS�mat)�is�fitted�in�the�front�passenger�seat�instead�of�the�seat
occupancy�mat.�The�CIS�mat�can�detect�whether�the�front�passenger�seat�is�occupied�by�an�adult�or�a
child�in�a�child�seat.�The�deactivation�of�the�front�passenger�airbag�and�side�airbag�and�knee�airbag�on
the�front�passenger�side�is�signalled�by�the�indicator�lamp�for�front�passenger�airbag�deactivation.
18
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
5.�System�Components
5.2.6.�Seat�belt�buckle�switch
The�seat�belt�buckle�switch�detects�whether�the�seat�belt�buckle�tongue�is�in�the�seat�belt�buckle.�The
Crash�Safety�Module�supplies�power�to�the�sensors�and�performs�the�evaluation.
From�terminal�15,�the�seat�belt�buckle�switch�is�permanently�monitored�and�used�for�the�visual�and
acoustic�seat�belt�warning�and�also�to�determine�which�restraint�systems�are�triggered.
F30�Seat�belt�buckle�switch
5.2.7.�Emergency�call�button
The�emergency�call�button�is�located�in�the�roof�function�center.
F30�Roof�function�center�with�emergency�call�button
5.2.8.�Seat-position�sensors
In�accordance�with�the�US�legal�requirement�(FMVSS208),�a�height�identification�for�the�person�in�the
driver�and�front�passenger�seat�must�be�effected.�This�height�identification�is�effected�via�the�adjust-
ment�travel�of�the�forward/back�seat�adjustment.�In�US-version�vehicles,�the�exact�position�is�identified
19
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
5.�System�Components
using�the�seat-position�sensors�for�the�driver�and�front�passenger�seats.�For�vehicles�with�an�electric
seat�adjustment�with�memory�(option�459),�the�seat�position�on�the�driver's�side�is�transferred�from�the
seat�module�on�the�driver's�side�to�the�ACSM.
The�job�of�the�seat-position�detector�is�to�distinguish�between�a�relatively�small�person�and�a�person
of�normal�height�within�the�lengthways�adjustment�range�of�the�seat.�This�detection�is�another�techni-
cal�feature�aimed�at�increasing�the�safety�of�the�occupants.�The�deployment�of�the�two�airbag�stages
and�the�adaptive�vent�valve�is�then�adjusted�to�the�driver's/front�passenger�seat�position.
The�seat-position�detector�takes�the�form�of�a�2-wire�Hall-effect�sensor�and�is�supplied�with�power�via
the�ACSM�control�unit.�The�current�level�of�the�seat-position�sensor�changes�depending�on�the�seat
position�or�the�distance�of�the�seat-position�sensor�to�the�permanent�magnet.
5.3.�Actuators
5.3.1.�Overview
The�following�actuators�are�installed�in�the�F30:
• Two-stage�driver's�airbag�with�active�vent�valve
• Two-stage�driver's�airbag�with�active�vent�valve
• Knee�airbag�on�front�left�and�right
• Head�airbag�on�left�and�right
• Side�airbag�on�front�left�and�right
• Seat�belt�buckle�tensioner�on�front�left�and�right
• Automatic�tensioner�with�linear�force�limiter
• Automatic�tensioner�with�adaptive�force�limiter
• Safety�battery�terminal.
In�addition,�the�following�indicator�lights�inform�the�vehicle�occupants�about�the�condition�of�the�safety
systems:
• Airbag�indicator�light
• Seat�belt�warning�light
• Indicator�lamp�for�front�passenger�airbag�deactivation.
20
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
5.�System�Components
The�following�graphic�shows�the�airbags�in�the�activated�state.�Depending�on�the�type�of�crash,�only
specific�airbags�are�activated.
F30�Airbags
The�familiar�three-point�seat�belts�are�used�as�the�seat�belt�systems�in�the�F30.
F30�Seat�belt
21
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
5.�System�Components
Index Explanation
1 Seat�belt�buckle�tensioner
2 Reversible�motor-driven�reel�ReMA�(not�US)
3 Automatic�reel/Automatic�tensioner
The�following�table�provides�an�overview�of�the�actuators�of�the�seat�belt�systems:
5.3.2.�Driver's�airbag
The�purpose�of�the�driver's�airbag�is�to�reduce�the�risk�of�injury�to�the�driver�in�combination�with�the
seat�belt�when�a�head-on�crash�occurs.�The�driver's�airbag�is�located�in�the�steering�wheel�impact
plate.�The�driver's�airbag�is�equipped�with�a�gas�generator.
A�two-stage�generator�is�installed�which�can�be�used�to�activate�the�stages�at�short�or�long�time�differ-
ences,�depending�on�the�severity�of�the�crash�detected�and�taking�into�consideration�the�seat�position.
Furthermore,�the�driver's�airbag�features�an�active�vent�valve.
5.3.3.�Front�passenger�airbag
The�purpose�of�the�front�passenger�airbag�is�to�reduce�the�risk�of�accident�to�the�front�passenger�in
the�event�of�a�head-on�crash.�The�front�passenger�airbag�is�located�in�the�dashboard.�When�the�front
passenger�airbag�expands,�the�dashboard�tears�open�at�defined�points.�The�front�passenger�airbag
opens�towards�the�windscreen,�emerges�in�the�upwards�direction�and�is�supported�on�the�windscreen
and�dashboard.�The�front�passenger�airbag�is�equipped�with�a�gas�generator.
A�two-stage�generator�is�installed�which�can�be�used�to�activate�the�stages�at�short�or�long�time�differ-
ences,�depending�on�the�severity�of�the�crash�detected�and�taking�into�consideration�the�seat�position.
22
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
5.�System�Components
F30�Front�passenger�airbag
Index Explanation
1 Ignition�squib
2 Ignition�squib
3 Vent�valve
4 Vent�valve�connection
Furthermore,�the�front�passenger�airbag�features�an�active�vent�valve.
5.3.4.�Knee�airbag
The�driver's�side�knee�airbag�and�front�passenger�side�control�the�forwards�displacement�of�the
occupant(s)�in�the�event�of�a�head-on�crash.
F30�Knee�airbags
Index Explanation
1 Knee�airbag,�driver's�side
2 Knee�airbag,�front�passenger�side
5.3.5.�Head�airbag
Head�airbags�are�installed�in�the�F30�to�protect�the�occupants'�heads�in�the�event�of�a�side�collision.
23
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
5.�System�Components
The�head�airbag�extends�from�the�A-pillar�to�the�C-pillar�and�covers�the�entire�area�of�the�side�win-
dows.�It�expands�between�the�occupants�and�side�structure.
System�features:
• Extended�covered�area�across�all�front�and�rear�side�windows
• Protection�of�occupants�from�glass�splinters
• Covered�area�for�different-sized�occupants�optimized.
F30�Head�airbag
5.3.6.�Side�airbag,�front
As�with�all�current�models,�the�side�airbag�at�the�front�ignites�out�of�the�front�seat�backrest.
The�side�airbags�and�gas�generators�are�accommodated�in�a�plastic�housing,�the�airbag�module.�This
is�installed�in�the�front�seat�backrest�and�is�concealed�by�the�seat�cover.
If�activated,�the�side�airbag�emerges�outwards�from�the�backrest�frame�and�spreads�between�the�side
structure�and�occupant.
It�is�important�to�ensure�that�no�additional�seat�covers�are�fitted�as�they�would�greatly�impair�the�func-
tion�of�the�side�airbag,�or�even�immobilize�it�altogether.
24
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
5.�System�Components
F30�Seat�with�side�airbag
Index Explanation
1 Side�airbag
5.3.7.�Seat�belt�buckle�tensioner
The�task�of�the�pyrotechnic�seat�belt�buckle�tensioner�is�to�minimize�the�belt�slack�in�the�pelvis�and
shoulder�regions�in�the�event�of�a�crash,�thereby�improving�the�restraining�effect.
The�seat�belt�buckle�tensioners�are�located�at�the�driver's�seat�or�the�front�passenger�seat.�The�seat
belt�buckle�tensioners�are�ignited�in�specific�crash�situations.
The�seat�belt�buckle�is�connected�by�means�of�a�steel�cable�to�the�piston�in�the�tensioning�tube.�If�the
ignition�squib�is�triggered,�gas�pressure�is�created,�which�moves�the�piston�in�the�tensioning�tube.�This
causes�the�cable�to�pull�the�seat�belt�buckle�down�and�the�seat�belt�is�tensioned.
25
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
5.�System�Components
F30�Seat�belt�buckle�tensioner
Index Explanation
1 Seat�belt�buckle�switch
2 Tensioning�tube�with�piston
5.3.8.�Automatic�tensioner�with�linear�mechanical�force�limiter
An�automatic�tensioner�with�linear�mechanical�force�limiter�for�the�driver�and�front�passenger�is�used
in�the�F30.�In�addition�to�force�limitation�effected�by�a�torsion�bar�spring,�the�seat�belt�strap�is�retract-
ed�with�the�assistance�of�a�gas�generator�in�order�to�reduce�belt�slack�prior�to�forwards�displacement
of�the�occupant.
By�harmonizing�the�individual�passive�safety�components,�seat�belt�tensioner,�automatic�tensioner,
force�limiter�and�airbag,�the�kinetic�energy�acting�on�the�occupants�is�dissipated�more�evenly�for�the
duration�of�the�crash.�Thus�lower�occupant�stress�values�are�achieved.
5.3.9.�Safety�battery�terminal
The�safety�battery�terminal�is�triggered�at�different�thresholds�when�the�Crash�Safety�Module�detects
a�head-on,�side-on�or�rear-end�crash�of�sufficient�severity.�The�line�that�connects�the�battery�to�the
starter�motor/alternator�and�positive�battery�connection�point�is�then�severed�by�means�of�pyrotech-
nics.�The�safety�battery�terminal�is�located�directly�at�the�positive�terminal�of�the�battery.�The�safety
battery�terminal�is�encased�completely�in�plastic�so�that�in�the�event�of�separation�no�sparks�get�out-
side�the�case.
Even�though�the�safety�battery�terminal�has�been�disconnected,�a�voltage�supply�to�all�safety-relevant
consumers�such�as�hazard�warning�flashers,�interior�light,�airbag�and�telephone�(including�emergency
call)�is�ensured.
26
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
5.�System�Components
F30�Safety�battery�terminal
5.3.10.�Airbag�indicator�light
The�airbag�indicator�light�is�located�on�the�instrument�panel.�The�airbag�indicator�light�lights�up�then
goes�out�during�the�pre-drive�check�to�signal�readiness�of�the�Crash�Safety�Module�and�passive�safe-
ty�systems.�The�airbag�indicator�light�is�controlled�via�a�message�on�the�PT-CAN�from�the�Crash�Safe-
ty�Module�to�the�instrument�panel.�The�instrument�panel�receives�a�message�cyclically.�If�the�message
remains�off,�the�airbag�indicator�light�is�activated.
F30�Airbag�indicator�light
27
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
5.�System�Components
5.3.11.�Seat�belt�warning�light
A�visual�and�audible�warning�is�issued�if�the�seat�belt�is�not�fastened�or�is�unbuckled�during�the�jour-
ney.
F30�Seat�belt�warning�light
The�status�of�the�seat�belt�contacts�of�the�rear�seat�bench�is�visible�for�a�short�period�in�the�instrument
cluster�TFT�display�during�starting�or�if�a�contact�is�changed.
5.3.12.�Indicator�lamp�for�front�passenger�airbag�deactivation
The�indicator�lamp�for�front�passenger�airbag�deactivation�in�the�F30�is�in�the�roof�function�center.�The
indicator�lamp�for�front�passenger�airbag�deactivation�is�activated�if�the�CIS�mat�detects�a�small�child�in
a�child�seat�or�if�the�front�passenger�seat�is�unoccupied.
The�brightness�of�the�indicator�lamp�for�front�passenger�airbag�deactivation�is�controlled�via�the�auto-
matic�brightness�control�of�the�display�illumination.
F30�Roof�function�center�with�indicator�lamp�for�front�passenger�airbag�deactivation
28
Bayerische�Motorenwerke�Aktiengesellschaft
Händlerqualifizierung�und�Training
Röntgenstraße�7
85716�Unterschleißheim,�Germany